Home

Lincoln 2011 MKT Automobile User Manual

1. 58 VWreckertowing 353 454 2011 MKT mki Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus
2. 158 foot pedals senpre 120 opening thetrunk 159 Playing a DVD in the system 45 panic alarm 158 Power adjustable foot pedals 120 replacement additional Poser dir bun box Ges transmillerS c0scee0ceeeesees0es 161 FUSES aim alanla ma alli 330 replacing the batteries 160 Power door locks 151 Oo Reverse sensing system 296 Power liftgate 138 Roadside assistance 323 452 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus S Safety belts see Safety restraints 192 195 196 198 200 201 Safety Canopy 216 218 Safety defects reporting 361 362 Safety restraints 192 195 198 200 201 Belt Minder 202 extension assembly 200 for adults 196 198 200 for children ime m a as 222 Occupant Classification SENSON E N OR 194 warning light and CHIME rire 201 202 Safety restraints LATCH ANCHOMS almam 230 Safety seats for children 226 Safety Compliance Certification Label 418 Satellite Radio 64 Scheduled Maintenance Guide Normal Scheduled Maintenance and Log 433 What Maintenance Schedule Should You Follow 429 CALS kepter seaside ezmesi 170 child safety seats 22
3. WARNING Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt or insert a latchplate into the buckle to avoid the Belt Minder chime To do so may adversely affect the performance of the vehicle s airbag system Deactivating activating the Belt Minder feature The driver and front passenger Belt Minder are deactivated activated independently When deactivating activating one seating position do not buckle the other position as this will terminate the process Read Steps 1 5 thoroughly before proceeding with the deactivation activation programming procedure Note The driver and front passenger Belt Minder features must be disabled enabled separately Both cannot be disable enabled during the same key cycle Note If you are using MyKey the Belt Minder cannot be disabled Also if the Belt Minder has been previously disabled it will be re enabled during the use of MyKey Refer to MyKey in the Locks and security chapter The driver and front passenger Belt Minder features can be deactivated activated by performing the following procedure Before following the procedure make sure that e The parking brake is set e The gearshift is in P Park e The ignition is off e The driver and front passenger safety belts are unbuckled 205 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING While the design allows you to deactivate your Belt Minder this system is designe
4. When you determine the vehicle is back far enough or you hear a solid tone from the reverse sensing system bring the vehicle to a complete stop and move the gearshift to D Drive The message center will now display PULL FORWARD USE CAUTION followed by a chime 305 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving When you determine the vehicle is far enough forward or a solid tone from the forward sensing system if equipped is heard bring the vehicle to a complete stop and move the gearshift to R Reverse The message center may display BACK UP SLOWLY USE CAUTION followed by a chime The system may offer subsequent backward and forward maneuvers before proceeding to the finish phase APA finished When active park assist has completed the automated steering the message center displays ACTIVE PARK FINISHED followed by a chime The driver is responsible to assess and correct as necessary the final parking position and put the vehicle in P Park The system can also be deactivated at any time by the following e Pressing the APA control switch e Grabbing the steering wheel e Exceeding a vehicle speed of 18 mph 80 km h for 30 seconds during active park searching Exceeding a vehicle speed of 6 mph 10 km h during automatic steering Deactivating the AdvanceTrac system or the system has activated on a slippery or loose surface e ABS activation or failure e Any door except the driver s
5. Adjustable second row center head restraint if equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a head restraint in the second row center seating position that is vertically adjustable The adjustable head restraint consist of e a trimmed energy absorbing foam and structure 1 e two steel stems 2 e a guide sleeve adjust release button 3 e and a guide sleeve unlock remove button 4 180 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints To adjust the head restraint do the following 1 Raise the head restraint by pulling up on the head restraint 4 2 Lower the head restraint by pressing and holding the guide sleeve adjust release button and pushing down on the head restraint v L Properly adjust the head restraint so that the top of the head restraint is even with the top of your head and positioned as close as possible to the back of your head For occupants of extremely tall stature adjust the head restraint to its full up position To remove the adjustable head restraint do the following 1 Pull up the head restraint until it reaches the highest adjustment position 2 Press and hold both the 4 adjust release button then pull up on the head restraint 7 7 pc 181 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints To reinstall the adjustable head restraint do the following 1 Insert the two stems
6. X ae Remove the screw and unlatch the battery cover to access the batteries The remote control unit uses two AAA batteries which are supplied with the unit Headphones Wireless headphones WARNING The driver should never use the headphones while driving the vehicle Using headphones may prevent the driver from hearing audible warnings such as horns or emergency sirens which could result in a crash causing serious injury Give your full attention to driving and to the road Your FES system is equipped with two sets of battery powered infrared wireless headphones Two AAA batteries are needed to operate the headphones Batteries are included Additional infrared wireless headphones may be purchased for use with the system Also wired headphones may be purchased and plugged in 75 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems where indicated on the left and right hand sides of the system Refer to Wired Headphones following To install the batteries remove the screw on the cover and remove the cover Then gently lift the top of the cover away from the housing to expose the battery compartment When replacing the batteries use two new batteries alkaline recommended and install them with the correct orientation as indicated in the battery housing Replace the cover and thread the screw Fold flat feature In addition to headband adjustment your new wireless headpho
7. 118 e ER ME ME 118 fold aa 119 OPowerpoini 113 heated ieseana 88 119 Power steering 290 programmable memory 159 fluid checking and adding 403 side view mirrors power 118 fluid refill capacity 414 Mobile media system 32 fluid specifications 414 MOON TOOL spss esi 132 Power Windows 115 Motorcraft parts 371 413 o Push button start system 278 MIKEY ssccsciasitheiiascstesiesiivesteteecasss 144 R N ae Radio 32 Navigation system 87 Rear heated seats 187 o Rear heated cooled seats 187 Octane rating esasa 395 Rear seat entertainment Oil see Engine Oil 378 SV SCCM esek am e A al 67 Overdrive 293 Rear view camera display 37 m Rear view camera system 299 Recommendations for Parental MyKey programming 144 attaching safety restraints for Park Assist on 393 SD TEN erine Bee Parking brake 2983 Refrigerator 112 Parts see Motorcraft parts 413 JEA SI fS EEEE 325 Passenger Occupant Remote entry system 156 157 Classification Sensor 194 illuminated entry 161 162 Pedals see Power adjustable locking unlocking doors
8. MW Contrast Day Night Mode Color Palette Daytime Color Contrast Press to increase and to decrease the level of contrast on the screen Day Night Mode Select Day to always display day mode or Night to always display night mode Select Auto for the screen to automatically change between day and night mode Color Palette Select between four different background colors 1 Black 2 Blue 3 Green 4 Red Daytime color Press to select Light color or Dark color for the INA AA bx screen lighting z eedback Brightness Ecore gs S Day Night Mode Color Palette Note When the headlamps are on under high ambient light conditions the system will remain in day mode even if night is selected 38 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Feedback settings 1 Press the MENU hard button 2 Select the Feedback Settings tab on the touchscreen Select from the following display options e Touch screen button beep Select to have the system sound a tone when a selection is made on the touchscreen e Voice volume Press to increase or decrease the system s voice volume System settings 1 Press the MENU hard button 2 Select the System Settings tab on the touchscreen Select from the following display options nr Cirmate OFF Les Language Select between English Francais or Espanol
9. An oil change is required whenever indicated by the message center and according to the recommended maintenance schedule USE ONLY RECOMMENDED ENGINE OILS To reset the oil monitoring system to 100 after each oil change perform the following 1 Press and release SETUP to display OIL LIFE XXX HOLD RESET NEW 2 Press and hold RESET for two seconds and release to reset the oil life to 100 Note To change oil life 100 value to another value proceed to Step 3 3 Once OIL LIFE SET TO XXX is displayed release and press RESET to change the Oil Life Start Value Each release and press will reduce the value by 10 UNITS Displays the current units in English or Metric 21 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Press RESET to change between English and Metric AUTO HIGH BEAM if equipped This feature automatically turns on your high beams if it is dark enough and no other traffic is present Press RESET to turn it off or on AUTOLAMP This feature keeps your headlights on for up to three minutes after the ignition is switched off Press RESET to select the new autolamp delay values of 0 10 20 30 60 90 120 or 180 seconds AUTOLOCK This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when the vehicle is shifted into any gear putting the vehicle in motion Press RESET to turn it off or on AUTOUNLOCK This feature automatically unlocks all vehicle doors when th
10. 46 Jump starting your vehicle 350 K Keyless entry system AULOLOCK 152 keypad 163 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Index locking and unlocking O kole es seve ene eee eee eae 164 programming entry code 163 KEYS eses kre orasi Ema 166 positions of the ignition 276 L Lamps autolamp system 96 bulb replacement specifications chart 106 daytime running light 100 foglamps 97 headlamps 95 headlamps flash to pass 100 instrument panel dimming 101 interior lamps 103 106 replacing bulbs 106 LATCHanchors 230 Lift Gabe Gin ilimmmad l 138 159 Lights warning and indicator 12 anti lock brakes ABS 283 Loadlimits 263 Loading pictures 36 Locks e o 103 AK AN 152 childproof 155 GOOTS PE PRE E RM 151 Lubricant specifications 414 JE bo a EE 349 M Message center 18 19 english metric button 24 system check button 24 warning Messages 24 MERO S eza amal al esd 118 451 Index automatic dimming rearview Powermirrors
11. C If the needle moves close to cx the H range the engine is overheating For more information refer to Engine fluid temperature management and What you should know about fail safe cooling in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter 17 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster WARNING Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot Fuel gauge Indicates approximately how much fuel is left D in the fuel tank when the ignition NF is on The fuel gauge may vary i slightly when the vehicle is in L motion or on a grade Ve The FUEL icon and arrow indicates which side of the vehicle the fuel filler door is located Refer to Filling the tank in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information Tachometer Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute Driving with your tachometer pointer continuously at the top of the scale may damage the engine Odometer Registers the total miles kilometers of the vehicle Refer to Message center in this chapter on ng how to switch the display from Metric to English Trip odometer Refer to Message center in this chapter MESSAGE CENTER Your vehicle s message center allows you to configure personalize certain vehicle options to suit your needs The message center is also capable of monitoring many vehicle systems and will alert you to potential vehicle problems an
12. Note Ensure that the seat and seatback are latched securely in position Keep floor area free of objects that would prevent proper seat engagement WARNING Do not adjust or release the seat floor latch while vehicle is in motion Do not operate the vehicle with seats in tumbled position Always latch the vehicle seat to the floor whether the seat is occupied or empty If not latched or if the seat is tumbled the seat may cause injury during a sudden stop Second row heated seats if equipped Note For a list of warnings regarding personal injury and damage to the seat refer to Front row heated and cooled seats earlier in this chapter To operate the heated seats e Press the button located on the rear of the floor console once to activate high heat e Press twice to activate low heat e Press a third time to deactivate The indicator light on the control will illuminate when activated For low heat one light will be lit for high heat both lights will be lit Second row heated and cooled seats if equipped Note For a list of warnings regarding personal injury and damage to the seat refer to Front row heated and cooled seats earlier in this chapter The second row heated and cooled seat controls are located on the rear of the floor console They function the same as the front row heated and 187 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints cooled seats For instruct
13. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly 257 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading The tire pressure monitoring system complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation WARNING The tire pressure monitoring system is NOT a substitute for manuall
14. e Scan Presets Press for a brief sampling of all the stations held in the memory presets Autoset Presets The autoset feature allows you to set strong radio stations without losing your original preset stations This feature is helpful on trips when traveling between cities with different radio stations To enable select AUTOSET PRESETS and the six strongest stations in your current area will be set as presets To return to your original presets press AUTOSET PRESETS again and the feature will disable e Rear Zone Press to access the functionality of the Family Entertainment System if equipped e RDS In FM mode this feature allows you to receive text information from RDS equipped FM radio stations In FM mode press RDS to activate deactivate RDS must be activated in order to access PTY and SET PTY Note When RDS is active the visualizer is not displayed e Set PTY In FM mode press to select a program type which once selected will be displayed above the SET PTY button Once PTY has been programmed press SEEK or SCAN to initiate a search up or down the frequency The search will stop when the desired program type has been reached Note The system will scan the frequency band three times for the chosen program type If the program type is unavailable in your reception range the system will return to the previous station 6 Press SHOW PRESETS to view the preset stations To set or change a preset station press and
15. 2 Measure the height of the headlamp projector cross hair mark on inner lens center from the ground and mark an 8 foot 2 4 meter horizontal reference line on the vertical wall or screen at this height a piece of masking tape works well 3 Turn on the headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and open the hood To see a clearer light pattern for adjusting you may want to block the light from one headlamp while adjusting the other 4 On the wall or screen you will observe a light pattern with a distinct horizontal edge towards the right If this edge is not at the horizontal reference line the beam will need to be adjusted so the edge is at the same height as the horizontal reference line 102 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus 5 Locate the vertical adjuster on each headlamp Using a Phillips 2 screwdriver turn the adjuster either clockwise to adjust down or counterclockwise to adjust up The horizontal edge of the brighter light should touch the horizontal reference line Close the hood and turn off the lamps Lights HORIZONTAL AIM IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THIS VEHICLE AND IS NON ADJUSTABLE TURN SIGNAL CONTROL e Push down to activate the left turn signal e Push up to activate the right turn signal INTERIOR LAMPS Dome lamps and map lamps The map lamps are located on the overhead console Press the lens on either side of each map lamp to turn on the
16. 4 MENU When playing a DVD press MENU to enter the DVD disc root menu if available Press again to exit and return to the movie SEL Press to confirm the current selection that has been highlighted through the use of the cursor controls Cursor controls Use to navigate through selections when in any menu When not in a menu you can also use them for the following features e A IV Use to scroll through menu sources e mI Fast forward next Press to access the next track or chapter Press and hold to activate fast forward mode 2x 4x 8x 16x or 32x e K4 Fast reverse previous Press to access the previous track or chapter Press and hold to activate fast reverse within a disc Press gt Play to resume normal playback speed and volume 70 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems b A Headphones Speakers Press to activate dual play mode on either headrest system During dual play mode the following happens a Rear speakers turn off b Headphones become active on both headrest systems c Media sources become available through the DVD systems Note If the system is in dual play mode you must press the A q Headphones Speakers button on both headrest systems in order to return to single play For more information please refer to Single play Dual play later in this section 6 MEDIA for Monitor A In Dual Play mode press MEDIA repeatedly to select fro
17. A locked channel can only be accessed by entering the Channel Guide and then entering the PIN Note The PIN can be reset by simultaneously pressing and holding presets 1 and 5 while on the PIN entry screen After approximately five seconds the system will transition to the Channel Guide screen indicating that the PIN is reset Once you have reset the PIN the system will then allow you to set a new PIN Direct Tune Press to enter a specific channel using the keypad and go directly to that channel Set Genre Press to choose from a list of possible satellite radio genres Once a genre is chosen and you press SEEK it will only seek within the selected genre Memo The MEMO feature allows you to save a song title and artist to the system When the saved song is playing on any satellite radio channel the system will alert you with a pop up in the lower status bar You can then choose to tune to the station or to ignore the pop up When you are in the MEMO screen the following options are available e Refresh Press to refresh the current artist and title information e Song Alert Press to store the song information displayed in the Title Field When the stored song is played in the future an audio and visual notification will be initiated 43 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems e Artist Alert Press to store the artist information currently displayed in the Artist Field Whe
18. Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the booster seat WARNING Never place or allow a child to place the shoulder belt under a child s arm or behind the back because it reduces the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision Child restraint and safety belt maintenance Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child safety seat systems periodically to make sure they work properly and are not damaged Inspect the vehicle and child seat safety belts to make sure there are no nicks tears or cuts Replace if necessary All vehicle safety belt assemblies including retractors buckles front safety belt buckle assemblies buckle support assemblies slide bar if equipped shoulder belt height adjusters if equipped shoulder belt guide on seatback if equipped child safety seat LATCH and tether anchors and attaching hardware should be inspected after a collision Refer to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions for additional inspection and maintenance information specific to the child restraint Ford Motor Company recommends that all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a collision be replaced However if the collision was minor and an authorized dealer finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate properly they do not need to be replaced Safety belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and r
19. It is recommended that the driver select a lower gear position when ACC is active in situations such as prolonged downhill driving on steep grades i e driving in mountainous areas In these situations additional engine 127 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls braking is needed to reduce the load on the vehicle s regular brake system to prevent them from overheating For more information reference Automatic transmission operation in the Driving chapter Note If ACC is applying brakes for an extended period of time an audible alarm will sound the head s up display will flash and ACC will shut down This is to allow the brakes to cool down When the brakes have cooled down the ACC will again function normally Turning off cruise control Press the OFF button to turn off the cruise control Note When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition your cruise control set speed memory is erased Detection issues The radar sensor has a limited field of vision In some situations it may not detect vehicles at all or detect a vehicle later than expected Detection issues can occur e When driving on a different line than the vehicle in front 128 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls e With vehicles that edge into your lane These vehicles can only be detected once they have moved fully into your lane z eS Gs e There may be i
20. Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving STARTING Ignition modes 1 Off This position shuts the engine and all electrical accessories off Press and release the START STOP button without applying the brake pedal when your vehicle is in accessory or on modes or when the engine is running Note When the vehicle is in motion a single press and release of the START STOP button will not switch off the engine In order to switch off the engine while the vehicle is in motion press and hold the START STOP button for at least one second 2 Accessory This allows electrical accessories such as the radio to operate while the engine is not running Press and release the START STOP button without applying the brake pedal ACCESSORY POWER ACTIVE and PRESS BRAKE TO START will be displayed in the message center Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information 3 On This will power your vehicle s electrical system and the warning lights in the instrument cluster will illuminate but the engine will remain off Press and hold the START STOP button for at least one second without applying the brake pedal 4 Start Cranks the engine Press the START STOP button for any length of time while applying the brake pedal Starting your vehicle This system meets all Canadian interference causing equipment standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio noise Don t pr
21. Units Select between English and Metric Keyboard layout Select ABC or QWERTY for the keyboard layout in the display Delete saved photos Select View to see what stored photos you may want to delete Restore factory default settings Press Reset to return to the factory default settings Valet mode 1 Press the MENU hard button 39 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 2 Select the Valet Mode tab on the 70am touchscreen Press Enable Valet 3 Mode f Enabing Valet Mode will lock the system using a Sgit PIN selected by the user The same PIN must be entered to disable Valet Mode and unlock the system 3 Enter a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN and press Enter The system will ask you to re enter the PIN Once entered select Enable to activate Valet mode The system is then locked until the correct four digit PIN is entered Note The PIN can be reset by simultaneously pressing and holding presets 1 and 5 while on the PIN entry screen After approximately five seconds the system will transition to the Valet mode screen indicating that the PIN is reset Once you have reset the PIN the system will then allow you to set a new PIN Setting the clock 1 Press the CLOCK hard button 2 Select from the following display options Restore Defauts s f Cimete OFF Time set buttons To set the time
22. 1 Enter the factory set 5 digit code 2 Within five seconds press the 1 e 2 on the keypad and release 3 Press and hold the 1 e 2 for two seconds This must be done within five seconds of completing Step 2 All personal codes are now erased and only the factory set 5 digit code will work Anti scan feature If the wrong code has been entered seven times 35 consecutive button presses the keypad will go into an anti scan mode This mode disables the keypad for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash The anti scan feature will turn off after e one minute of keypad inactivity e pressing the 2 control on your transmitter e the ignition is turned on e the door is unlocked with a key Unlocking and locking the doors using keyless entry To unlock the driver s door enter the factory set 5 digit code or your personal code Each number must be pressed within five seconds of each other The interior lamps will illuminate Note If the two stage unlocking feature is disabled all doors will unlock for more information regarding two stage unlocking refer to the Central locking Two stage unlocking section earlier in this chapter To unlock all doors enter the factory set code or your personal code then press the 3 e 4 control within five seconds 164 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Note If the Intelligent Access Key is within 3 feet 1 meter of the driver door your keyl
23. 434 Owners Guide 1st Printing 2011 MKT mkt USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide Ia eyo 49 51 JUBWNAISUT IYJ 0 I J I osueyD IY pue IO SULU YORE Taye yy LOJTUONN OJUT LO WesteyUT MOA JOSY 131499 932SS9UL 19 SNJ9 JUSWMNIYSUL dy Aq p ze rpur se PayeTdwod 94 PNOYS SEAU BdIAJES OBURYO IOs peddmbe jr 1944 1e urqeo ssuniy 3S2913 y m peddmbe J ayeorqny syurol N pue yyeyseaLp spud pod at uotsuadsns syutof reg 9Beyun 3ULU991S Joodsuy peddmbe jt 1004 yeys zrey Splelys yeay pue weysds ysneyxe sasoy pue YJ3U91 S 10J W JS S FUOOD JUU ayelq Sunred pue sasoy S3UTUJ ayeiq SUMP S10701 saoys sped yerq yoodsuy s u w Imb 10J 1989p yNsuod Yonsd p e yy p ddmb Jt Joao pmyj uorsstusuely o1yewoyne yodsuy Popu9uul0991 UoTedsut qurod ymu WL0J194 Sep 10 SS9U9S00J Team astou eULIOUGe 10J SJU9UOdul09 poyeJol pue SJ99YM 799dSuJ y dap peer mse u pue Te9M 911 yoodsut s 9Ye10Y 19114 pue po aulsue asueyy x BAIOP IMTS 9BULUY TO a lee oe ee so CE EE EZE ES EE hlslels DREN HE EE EDEN AN EE lt p om Es Es CE om aa 435 Owners Guide 1st Printing 2011 MKT mkt USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide Perform the services noted in the following table at the specified time mileage km period either within 3 000 miles 5 000 km of the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message appearing in the message center or when the time mileage km read
24. Carefully pull the bulb out from the contacts Install new bulb s in reverse order Replacing fog lamp bulbs 1 Make sure the fog lamp switch is in the off position 2 From underneath the vehicle partially remove the tire splash shield by removing four drive screws After removing to allow free access to the front fog lamp bulb and electrical wire harness the splash shield flap should be able to be repositioned 3 Rotate the harness bulb assembly counterclockwise to remove from the fog lamp 4 Carefully disconnect the bulb yo from the harness assembly by releasing the two snap clips Install the new bulb in reverse order 107 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls MULTI FUNCTION LEVER Windshield wiper Rotate the end of the control away from you to increase the speed of the wipers rotate towards you to decrease the speed of the wipers Rain sensing wipers The rain sensing wipers will automatically activate when moisture is present on the windshield and the multi function switch is set to one of five auto interval moisture sensitivity settings Rotate the end of the control toward the windshield to increase the sensitivity The speed of the rain sensitive wipers will vary based on the amount of moisture detected on the windshield and the auto interval setting There are no interval intermittent wipe settings on vehicles with rain sensing wipers The
25. Owners of vehicles equipped with traditional keys should program the remote start system as a MyKey in addition to the key that they have already programmed as a MyKey To program the remote start system as MyKey do the following 1 Enter the vehicle and close all doors 2 Remote start the vehicle using a remote start fob 3 Follow Steps 1 4 in the Create a MyKey section 147 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Vehicles equipped with an intelligent access key push button start e It is not possible to program the remote start system as a MyKey on vehicles equipped with intelligent access key push button start Therefore you should treat the remote start fob as you would any other admin key When the vehicle is started using remote start the system will stall the engine when you either enter the vehicle or shift the vehicle into gear Prior to the engine stall the vehicle will have administrative privileges When you restart the engine the vehicle will identify the user as an admin or MyKey driver depending on the settings of the actual key used to start the vehicle Note For all vehicles the number of MYKEY S PROGRAMMED or ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED that is displayed in the MyKey system status menus will include the remote start system as an additional key in the total count See the Check MyKey system status section Note For all vehicles with remote start instal
26. PULL FORWARD USE CAUTION if equipped May display when using the active park assist system See Active park assist in the Driving chapter for more information BACK UP SLOWLY USE CAUTION if equipped May display when using the active park assist system See Active park assist in the Driving chapter for more information BACK UP USE CAUTION if equipped May display when using the active park assist system See Active park assist in the Driving chapter for more information ACTIVE PARK FINISHED if equipped May display when using the active park assist system See Active park assist in the Driving chapter for more information REMOVE HANDS PUT IN REVERSE if equipped May display when using the active park assist system See Active park assist in the Driving chapter for more information ACTIVE PARK NOT AVAILABLE if equipped May display when using the active park assist system See Active park assist in the Driving chapter for more information ACTIVE PARK DEACTIVATED if equipped Displayed when the active park feature has been turned off Refer to Active park assist in the Driving chapter for more information 30 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster SERVICE ADVANCETRAC Displayed when the AdvanceTrac system has detected a condition that requires service TO STOP ALARM START VEHICLE Displayed when the perimeter alarm system is armed and the vehicle is en
27. Reverse an image will automatically display on the touchscreen Once the vehicle is back in D Drive the image will continue to display until you are driving over 5 mph 8 km h To remove this image from the screen press any hard button on the mobile media system When the vehicle is in Park P you at Plats Check Surroundings for Safety may press SETTINGS to make wa i adjustments to the brightness of the display as well as the rearview camera display When the rear camera delay function is ON it extends the display of the camera image into Drive mode until vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h This is useful when trying to engage disengage a trailer Prior to using ensure that the camera lens is clear of any debris mud etc and that both reverse lamps are operational if using at night For further information please refer to Rearview camera system in the Driving chapter 37 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems System menu features Your system has many menu features such as allowing you to adjust the touchscreen brightness adjusting the time and languages adjusting the feedback and system settings To access press the MENU hard button Display options 1 Press the MENU hard button 2 Select the Display tab on the touchscreen Select from the following display options Brightness Select AUTO DIM to manually adjust the brightness by pressing or
28. SPARE T145 80D16 420 KPA 60PSI INFORMATION P225 60R17 200 KPA 29 PSI TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION RENSEIGNEMENTS SUR LES PNEUS ET LE CHARGEMENT MN Gm am e BEN TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION XXX XX XXXX XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 1 ARRI RE 3 The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 492 kg or Le poids total des occupants et du chargement na doit jamais d pesser kg ou COLD TIRE PRESSURE THE PRESSION DES SEE OWNER S PNEU PNEUS A FROID MANUAL FOR o a ADDITIONAL P235 70R16 240 KPA 35 PSI INFORMATION REAR P235 70R16 240 KPA 35 psi VORLEMANUEL SPARE POUR PLUS DE secourns 1145 90R17 415 KPA 60 PSI RENSEIGNEMENTS FE 7 x lt ei gt zs x gt kd oi x S R bei gt X000000000000000X CARGO Cargo Weight includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight including cargo and optional eguipment When towing trailer tongue load weight is also part of cargo weight GAW Gross Axle Weight is the total weight placed on each axle front and rear including vehicle curb weight and all payload 265 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle front or rear These numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The total load on each
29. The following table lists possible causes and actions for this message being displayed 302 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty or obstructed in some way The surface of the radar in the grille is clean but the message remains in the display Heavy rain spray snow or fog is interfering with the radar signals Swirling water or snow or ice on the surface of the road may interfere with the radar signals Clean the grille surface in front of the radar or remove the object causing the obstruction Wait a short time It may take several minutes for the radar to detect that it is no longer obstructed Do not use the collision warning system in these conditions because it may not detect warn or respond to potential collisions Do not use the collision warning system in these conditions because it may not detect warn or respond to potential collisions Activating deactivating collision warning system To turn the warning system and or chime on or off and set the warning sensitivity lt gt refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter Note If the system cannot be turned off ina MyKey equipped vehicle refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information Note If collision warnings are perceived as being too frequent or disturbing then the warning sensitivity can be reduced though the manufacturer re
30. USA fus Entertainment Systems Dual Play Dual play is when the rear seat passengers choose to listen to a different playing media than the front seat passengers With the DVD and rear seat controls turned on the rear seat passengers may choose to listen to Monitor A Monitor B AM FM1 FM2 SR1 SR2 SR3 satellite radio if equipped Disc Jukebox if equipped or SYNC if equipped While the front speakers play the chosen selection for the front audio system the rear seat passengers can listen to another over the headphones The headphone icon will appear in the display indicating that the headphones are active You can access dual play mode in any of the following ways e If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen system a Ensure that the vehicle ignition is turned on Inserting a DVD into the system will automatically activate dual play mode b Press the RADIO or MEDIA hard button Select the Rear Zone tab on the touchscreen and select On for the headphones and Enabled for the rear controls To return to single zone select Off for the headphones If your vehicle is equipped with a non touchscreen system a Press the headphone speaker A 4 button on the remote control or DVD system Press again on both headrest systems to return to single play mode b Press the 2 and 4 memory presets on the radio at the same time Press again to return to single play mode Note If the front seat passenge
31. Use only approved products to clean plastic parts These products are available from your authorized dealer e For routine cleaning use Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A e If tar or grease spots are present use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES The windshield rear and side windows and the wiper blades should be cleaned regularly If the wipers do not wipe properly substances on the vehicle s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause These may include hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes water repellent coatings tree sap or other organic contamination these contaminants may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades and streaking and smearing of the windshield To clean these items follow these tips e The windshield rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with a non abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner ZC 23 available from your authorized dealer 366 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning e The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl rubbing alcohol or Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate ZC 32 A in the U S or Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid CXC 37 A B D or F in Canada available from your authorized dealer This washer fluid contains special solution in addition to alcohol which helps to remove the hot wax deposited on the wiper blade and windshield from automated
32. WARNING Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot Steam and scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you badly Also you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts WARNING Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid container If sprayed on the windshield engine coolant could make it difficult to see through the windshield e DO NOT MIX different colors or types of coolant in your vehicle Make sure the correct coolant is used DO NOT MIX recycled coolant 385 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications and new unused coolant together in the vehicle Mixing of engine coolants may harm your engine s cooling system The use of an improper coolant may harm engine and cooling system components and may void the warranty Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter Note Do not use stop leak pellets or cooling system sealants additives as they can cause damage to the engine cooling and or heating systems This damage would not be covered under your vehicle s warranty e A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added in case of emergency to reach a vehicle service location In this instance the cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50 50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible Water alone without engine coolant can cause engine damage from corrosion
33. When the desired selection is highlighted press ENTER on the remote to confirm Video setup The video setup screen allows you ma Oo to adjust the quality of the video Video Quality Setup image for each headrest monitor To il veiw access Contrast Saturation luma Delay 1 Press SETUP on the remote to access the menu options 2 Press d b to highlight the film reel icon A disc will appear beneath the icon signifying it is the current selection 3 Press y to select and enter the Video setup menu 82 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 4 Press A IV to chose from Sharpness Brightness Contrast Gamma Color Hue Saturation and Luma Delay General setup screen exit To exit the setup screen ee gt 1 Press amp b to highlight the X icon A disc will appear beneath the icon signifying it is the current selection 2 Press ENTER on the remote control Hal Sole Monn k Parental control for the DVD system Your family entertainment system FES allows you to have control over the rear seat controls in a few different ways The DVD system is automatically activated when the vehicle ignition is on which allows the rear seat passengers to use the DVD system There are two levels of control of the FES buttons The states are FULL enabled or LOCKED disabled To change the level of control press the memory preset controls 3 and 5 s
34. YJU S 10 I YJU S JO SN gporyea INOA ut p ddmb ATTeursi10 adAy yURTOOD 94 PPV aseulep UOISSTUSULIJ 9SNE9 ACU pm pOpU9ULUL0991 y UY 19470 pmy Aue JO 9S RAIOJUL 9914195 7991109 OY SUTULI9 9P O WOYDUMLOJUL BDUDUAIUUDUL Pa NpayIs 0 OJO PING AT eNOOUAW OSN ATUO pmnoys AT eNOOUMW 9zmba1 Jey SUOISSTLUSUR I OTYEULOMV sosueyo pmy Sump Area Lew unoure enjoy Ayede py Arp eyeurrxoiddy epeue epeued PNY J9YSEM PLelyspulm PMA J9YSEM PTPHUSPUM Aene wnq Apend unuq SN eyermueou0D SN 91e1 u99Uu0 J9USEM PPUSPUM T USEM PTPUSPUM Umud 61J21910J0N WNW 1J2191090N pazmba se Mi P Toysem preryspury To 0Uu1Bu9 N11S00gO9 1d99X9 pm 3UL1991S JIaMog A eoNO9YAN ALV A eNOOUdN JLOA19S91 UO NIW WO S LX 612191010 pue XVI umyeg V GGEL6N SSM CUSSU TL E Cepaue V 01 9A9 Gan quejooo OUTBUN SM ZV OTDA syenb ET 2ogumN Ld PIOA IO JWEN Hed pJOJ glel000 SUSUN Users Ayeroeds g1J2191070N 416 Owners Guide 1st Printing 2011 MKT mkt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications ENGINE DATA TM engine See Octane See Octane Fuel recommendations recommendations earlier earlier in this chapter in this chapter 1 32 1 42 mm 94 mm Coil on plug Compression 10 3 1 10 0 1 ratio Engine drivebelt routing 3 7L V6 engine 1 Short drivebelt is on first pulley groove closest to engine except vehicles with electric power assisted steering 2 Long drivebelt is on
35. amp sacscescepess cddacehesnccesees 103 WAT dei sdescQaceecseres daveoetie G 244 label sesim lana 256 U replacing oserei 248 VOLAUING yrei a ela 250 Universal garage door opener 134 Safety practices eee 249 USB port sssr 61 sidewall information 251 snow tires and chains 262 v Spare TITE lazeri salan banka sada 334 Temporary mobility kit 340 Vehicle Identification Number terminology ossessi 243 VIN le 419 tire Erades Memenin 243 freadwear m 242 247 Vehicle loading 263 TOVINE ce e ten 270 Ventilating your vehicle 280 recreational towing 275 Ww Trailer Brake GController ntegrated 213 eee trailer towing j alel P Ma 270 Warning lights see Lights 12 WLECKER eksenine derisi 353 Washer faid sese ar 376 Trailer Brake Water Driving through 322 Controller Integrated 213 Windows Transaxle DOWD semen etk lsainei 115 fluid refill capacities 414 rear wiper washer 109 lubricant specifications demaenaie 414 Windshield washer fluid and Transmission 293 WIAD EMS EE ME a r 108 brake shift interlock BSD 292 checking and adding fluid 376 fluid checking and adding liftgate reservoir 376 AUTOMATIC resmi ali an 404 replacing wiper blades 377 378 Troubleshooting
36. and other patents issued or pending Some services supplied under license from Open Globe Inc for U S Patent 6 304 523 Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote The Gracenote logo and logotype and the Powered by Gracenote logo are trademarks of Gracenote Gracenote End User License Agreement EULA This device contains software from Gracenote Inc of 2000 Powell Street Emeryville California 94608 Gracenote The software from Gracenote the Gracenote Software enables this device to do disc and music file identification and obtain music related information including name artist track and title information Gracenote Data from online servers Gracenote Servers and to perform other functions You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End User functions of this device This device may contain content belonging to Gracenote s providers If so all of the restrictions set forth herein with respect to Gracenote Data shall also apply to such content and such content providers shall be entitled to all of the benefits and protections set forth herein that are available to Gracenote You agree that you will use the content from Gracenote Gracenote Content Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and Gracenote Servers for your own personal non commercial use only You agree not to assign copy transfer or transmit the Gracenote Content Gracenote Software or any
37. and release to unlock the driver s door Note The interior lamps and parking lamps will illuminate 2 Press O and release again within three seconds to unlock all the doors The remote entry system activates the illuminated entry feature this feature turns on the lamps for 25 seconds or until the ignition is turned on The battery saver feature will turn off the interior lamps 10 minutes after the ignition is turned off Two stage unlocking may be disabled or re enabled by simultaneously pressing the and controls on the transmitter for four seconds disabling two stage unlock allows all vehicle doors to unlock simultaneously The parking lamps will illuminate twice to indicate that two stage unlock was enabled or disabled When two stage unlocking is disabled intelligent access at the driver s door results in an unlock of all doors not just the driver door Locking the doors 1 Press and release to lock all the doors The parking lamps will illuminate 2 Press and release again within three seconds to confirm that all the doors are closed Note The doors will lock again the horn will chirp and the turn lamps will illuminate if all the doors and liftgate are closed Note If any door or the liftgate is not closed the horn will chirp twice and the lamps will not flash Car finder Press twice within three seconds The horn will chirp and the turn lamps will flash It is recommended that this method be us
38. e Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the finish of the instrument panel interior trim and cluster lens e Do not allow air fresheners and hand sanitizers to spill on interior surfaces If a spill occurs wipe off immediately Damage may not be covered by your warranty 367 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning WARNING Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of the airbag system If a staining liquid like coffee juice has been spilled on the instrument panel or on interior trim surfaces clean as follows 1 Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean white cotton cloth 2 Wipe the surface with a damp clean white cotton cloth For more thorough cleaning use a mild soap and water solution If the spot cannot be completely cleaned by this method the area may be cleaned using a commercially available cleaning product designed for automotive interiors 3 If necessary apply more soap and water solution or cleaning product to a clean white cotton cloth and press the cloth onto the soiled area allow this to set at room temperature for 30 minutes 4 Remove the soaked cloth and if it is not soiled badly use this cloth to clean the area by using a rubbing motion for 60 seconds 5 Following this wipe area dry with a clean white cotton cloth INTERIOR For fabric carpets cloth seats safet
39. for your name and address general information about your new vehicle information about your warranty concerns and any steps you have already taken to try to resolve them A Customer Claim Form will be mailed that will need to be completed signed and returned to the BBB along with proof of ownership Upon receipt the BBB will review the claim for eligibility under the Program Summary Guidelines You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at 1 800 955 5100 or writing to BBB AUTO LINE 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington Virginia 22203 1833 BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be requested by calling the Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center at 1 800 392 3673 Note Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations modify procedures or to discontinue this process at any time without notice and without obligation 358 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance UTILIZING THE MEDIATION ARBITRATION PROGRAM CANADA ONLY For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers In those cases where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the authorized dealer to resolve a factory related vehicle service concern have been unsatisfactory Ford of Canada participates in an impartial third party mediation arbitration program administered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan CAMVAP The CAMVAP program is a straight forward a
40. mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Information on T type tires T type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires these differences are described below T145 80D16 is an example of a tire size SRA n6180016 1054 Note The temporary tire size for your vehicle may be different from this example Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire 1 T Indicates a type of tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association T amp RA that is intended for temporary service on Ass X cars SUVs minivans and light NIW 1S4 09 OL ea trucks asn Kew 2 145 Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge In general the larger the number the wider the tire 3 80 Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire s ratio of height to width Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall 4 D Indicates a diagonal type tire R Indicates a radial type tire 5 16 Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches If you change your wheel size you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter Location of the tire label You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size and other important information located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door Refer to the payload description and graphic in the Vehicle loading
41. nyj oyeg 4 Owners Guide 1st Printing 2011 MKT mkt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications MENW UOTPeoYT 18 IdV UW V 6660CN SSM Cepeue9 GISUTOEMS OX0 e epeue GldS TOEMS OXY e SM SA 0EMS OX e SN dS 0EMS OX e JIEN OTOYA IdV PUR V 086O9ZN SSM Cepeue9 ZISAT OZMS OXO e epeue9 amp ldS TTOZMS OX9 SN SAb 0ZMS OXe SN dSO 0ZMS OXe UoTeoy dodg pIo JOQUNN JVI PLOT epeue TO 10 0 OTJOUYUAS O MG HVS eYEJO0JON e Cepeue9 TO IOJO W umuq 19dng 0E MS HVS eYEJO0JON e sf TO LOOP OTJOUUAS IMA 0E MS AVS 61J2191070Ne SN TO 1010 pug I U S um1u9lgj 0E MS AVS oL e Cepeue9 TO 101ONN ONeyyuAS OCGMG AVS eYEJ910 0N e epeue TO 10 OJA wntwWeig 19dng 0Z MS AVS e Y21910J0fN e sf TO 10301 9149YJUA IMA 0G MS AVS eH2191010NN e SM TO 1010 puojg 9yoyyu4g wnd 0G MS AVS eH2191010N e yuoyjeambo IO IMEN FAV J PIOA 12 s renb gg 12g s renb gg Amedeo uSu wi SOOgoog 9A TSE qo oulsuny Cursu 9A TLS qo oulsuny 15 4 Owners Guide 1st Printing 2011 MKT mkt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications C10 gT send gr Apoedes JueTOod USU x 1S00gO9N TG g BUT 10 SUI eae PNY 107 Jofeap pozuoy ne MOA 395 yIeUL Uone QV 94 pue 9UIBU9 JSooqooy 9A TS V 62692IA SSM 10 CUISUe 9A TLE V 0 6OZIN SSM UOTRoIOeds po Jo syuaurs nbal ay Joour ATUO p u IO uSuy A1oyepueul JOU ST IO OJOUL PUs q I
42. press to increase decrease the time and select AM or PM Display clock Press to turn the clock display on off 40 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Format Press to select between 12 hour and 24 hour format Time Zone Press to select your time zone Note The system does not implement daylight savings time Restore defaults Select Reset to reset to the default settings THX audio system if equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with the THX certified premium audio system This system creates optimal acoustic quality for all seating positions and road conditions The system offers an advanced speaker system amplifier subwoofer and equalizer AM FM 1 Ensure that the system is on 2 Press the RADIO hard button 3 Select the AM tab on the Om OME o 83 10 33am touchscreen to access AM mode Scan 590 Scan Preses Acstoset Presens 4 Press the FM tab repeatedly to Om ORE on switch between FM1 or FM2 mode Srereo 93 9 A w Pn Reer Zone ft 70 Eo 5 On these screens you may select between Show Options and Show Presets Press Show Options to access 41 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems e Scan Press for a brief sampling of all listenable stations Press again to disable and remain on the current selection
43. proper and safe operation For your safety use an outdoor extension cord that is product certified by Underwriter s Laboratory UL or Canadian Standards Association CSA Use only an extension cord that can be used outdoors in cold temperatures and is clearly marked Suitable for Use with Outdoor Appliances Never use an indoor extension cord outdoors it could result in an electric shock or fire hazard Use a 16 gauge outdoor extension cord minimum Use as short an extension cord as possible Do not use multiple extension cords Instead use one extension cord which is long enough to reach from the engine block heater cord to the outlet without stretching Make certain that the extension cord is in excellent condition not patched or spliced Store your extension cord indoors at temperatures above 32 F 0 C Outdoor conditions can deteriorate extension cords over a period of time To reduce the risk of electrical shock do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged cheater adapters Also ensure that the block heater especially the cord is in good condition before use Make sure that when in operation the extension cord plug engine block heater cord plug connection is free and clear of water in order to prevent possible shock or fire Be sure that areas where the vehicle is parked are clean and clear of all combustibles such as petroleum products dust rags paper and similar items Be s
44. 2 E Loosen the clamp holding the air filter assembly to the rubber hose 1 F Remove the harness retaining clip by pulling up 3 Do not disconnect the sensor 4 G Without disconnecting the sensor 4 pull the air filter assembly up to disconnect the air filter assembly from the seated grommets located underneath the air filter assembly H Rotate the air filter assembly 90 degrees counterclockwise and reinstall into the rubber hose I Tighten the clamp 1 J The transmission fluid level indicator can now be accessed 406 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications A WARNING Do not run engine with the air filter disconnected Start the engine and continue with Step 6 6 Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube by turning it to the locked position 7 Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level The fluid should be in the designated areas for normal operating temperature Low fluid level If the fluid level is below the MIN range of the dipstick add fluid to reach the hash mark level Note If li the fluid level is below the MIN level do not drive the vehicle An underfill condition may cause shift and or engagement concerns and or possible damage Correct fluid level The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating temperature 180 F 200 F 82 C 93 C on a level surface The normal operating temper
45. 2 Pull down on the shoulder belt and then grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt together 3 While holding the shoulder and lap belt portions together route the tongue through the child seat according to the child seat manufacturer s instructions Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted 228 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 4 Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from for that seating position until you hear a snap and feel the latch engage Make sure the tongue is latched securely by pulling on it 5 To put the retractor in the automatic locking mode grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and pull downward until all of the belt is pulled out e a 6 Allow the belt to retract to remove slack The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode 7 Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is in the automatic locking mode you should not be able to pull more belt out If the retractor is not locked repeat Steps 5 and 6 8 Remove remaining slack from the belt Force the seat down with extra weight e g by pressing down or kneeling on the child restraint while pulling up on the shoulder belt in order to force slack from the belt This is necessary to remove the remaining slack that will exist once the additional weight of the chil
46. 219 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The Safety Canopy System in combination with safety belts can help reduce the risk of severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact collision or rollover event Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the second or third row seats The safety canopy will not interfere with children restrained using a properly installed child or booster seat because it is designed to inflate downward from the headliner above the doors along the side window opening The Safety Canopy System is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains lateral deceleration sufficient to cause the side crash sensor to close an electrical circuit that initiates safety canopy inflation or when a certain likelihood of a rollover event is detected by the rollover sensor The safety canopy is mounted to roof side rail sheet metal behind the headliner above the first and second row seats and part of the third row seats In certain lateral collisions or rollover events the Safety Canopy System will be activated regardless of which seats are occupied The safety canopy is designed to inflate between the side window area and occupants to further enhance protection provided in side impact collisions and rollover events The fact that the safety canopy did not activate in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the system Rather
47. Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or Ford Motor Company To contact NHTSA you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to http Avww safercar gov or write to Administrator 1200 New Jersey Avenue Southeast Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov 361 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS CANADA ONLY If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform Transport Canada using their toll free number 1 800 333 0510 362 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning WASHING THE EXTERIOR Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo such as Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A which is available from your authorized dealer e Never use strong household detergents or soap such as dish washing or laundry liquid These products can discolor and spot painted surfaces e Never wash a vehicle that is hot
48. CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES 1 Pull the wiper blade and arm away from the glass 2 Squeeze the locking tabs to release the blade from the arm and pull the blade away from the arm to remove it 3 Attach the new blade to the arm and snap it into place Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and the windshield Refer to Windows and wiper blades in the Cleaning chapter To prolong the life of the wiper blades it is highly recommended to scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers The layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the wiper rubber element 377 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Changing rear window wiper blade To replace the rear wiper blade 1 Grab the wiper arm with one hand close to the arm blade joint and pull it as far away from the glass as possible Do not use ae excessive force because it can break _ the wiper arm at the heel Hold it there until the next step 2 Grab the primary structure of the blade with the other hand close to the arm blade joint 3 The wiper arm has a snap retention feature to receive a cross pin from the wiper blade structure Grip tightly and press on the arm blade joint from beneath and gt separate the blade from the arm m e gt Av
49. Company 16800 Executive Plaza Drive Mail Drop 3NE B Dearborn MI 48126 307 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU BBB AUTO LINE PROGRAM U S ONLY Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer If a warranty concern has not been resolved using the three step procedure outlined on the first page of the Customer Assistance section you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO LINE program The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts mediation and arbitration During mediation a representative of the BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor Company to explore options for settlement of the claim If an agreement is not reached during mediation and your claim is eligible you may participate in the arbitration process An arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that you can present your case in an informal setting before an impartial person The arbitrator will consider the testimony provided and make a decision after the hearing You are not bound by the decision but should you choose to accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision Ford must abide by the accepted decision as well Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually decided within forty days after you file your claim with the BBB BBB AUTO LINE Application Using the information provided below please call or write to request a program application You will be asked
50. MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints AIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM SRS The airbag supplemental restraint system SRS is designed to work in conjunction with the safety belts to help protect the driver and front outboard passenger from certain upper body injuries The term supplemental restraint means the airbags are intended as a supplement to the safety belts Airbags offer the most protection when used with safety belts for crash conditions for which airbags are designed to deploy Airbags do not offer any protection in crashes for which they do not deploy Important SRS precautions The SRS is designed to work with the safety belt to help protect the driver and right front passenger from certain upper body injuries Airbags DO NOT inflate slowly there is a risk of injury from a deploying airbag 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Do not place any object between an occupant and an airbag or near any other airbag covering The airbag may not inflate properly and might force an object into that person causing severe injury or death The instrument panel grab handle should never be used for storage The path of an inflating airbag must be kept clear at all times WARNING All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always properly wear
51. Once a panic brake application is detected the system will remain activated as long as the brake pedal is pressed or ABS is engaged The system is deactivated by either releasing the brake pedal or coming to a complete stop When the system activates noise from the ABS pump motor and brake pedal pulsation may be observed this is normal ABS warning lamp The ABS lamp in the instrument cluster momentarily illuminates when the ignition is turned on If the light does not illuminate during start up remains on or flashes the ABS is disabled due to a malfunction and needs to be serviced Even when the ABS is disabled normal braking is still effective If your BRAKE warning lamp illuminates with the parking brake BRAKE released have your brake system serviced immediately Parking brake Apply the parking brake whenever the vehicle is parked To set the parking brake press the parking brake pedal down until the pedal stops 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving The BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster illuminates and remains illuminated when the ignition is turned on until the BRAKE parking brake is released WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the gearshift is securely latched in P Park The parking brake is not recommended to stop a moving vehicle However if the normal brakes fail the parking brake can be used to stop your vehicle in an eme
52. REQUIRED message comes on at 28 751 miles 46 270 km perform the 30 000 mile 48 000 km automatic transmission fluid replacement Example 2 The OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message has not come on but the odometer reads 30 000 miles 48 000 km perform the engine air filter replacement i e Intelligent Oil Life Monitor was reset at 25 000 miles 40 000 km 440 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide Extensive idling and or low speed driving for long distances as in heavy commercial use such as delivery taxi patrol car or livery As required Change engine oil and replace oil filter as indicated by message center and perform services as listed in the Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart except Fiesta Inspect frequently service as Replace cabin air filter if equipped required Replace engine air filter Every 300 hours of engine Change engine oil and replace oil filter Fiesta operation Every 30 000 miles 48 000 km Change automatic transmission fluid not required on Fiesta or vehicles equipped with a 6R80 transmission Every 60 000 miles 96 000 km Replace spark plugs Engine hour meter installation is recommended for these operating conditions Perform the services noted in the preceding table at the specified time mileage km period either within 3 000 miles 5 000 km of the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message appearing in the message center o
53. Start with the ignition off and the headlamp control in the autolamp position 2 Turn the headlamp control to off 3 Turn the ignition on and then back to off 4 Turn the headlamp control to the autolamp position The headlamps will turn on 5 Wait the desired amount of time for the exit delay you want up to three minutes then turn the headlamps off You can also use the message center to program the autolamp exit time delay See Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter 96 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Fog lamp control With the ignition on the fog lamps T can be turned on when the headlamp control is pulled toward you and is in any of the following positions e Parking lamps P e Low beams gD erg MR e Autolamps when active W gt The fog lamp indicator light will illuminate when the fog lamps have been turned on The fog lamps will not operate when the high beams are active High beams Push the lever toward the instrument panel to activate Pull gt the lever towards you to deactivate SYS Ss gt P DEA Auto high beams During nighttime driving the automatic high beam system automatically turns on your high beams if it is dark enough and no other traffic is present When it detects an approaching vehicle s headlights or a preceding vehicle s tail lamps the system turns off the high beams low beams remain on before they distract other
54. Terrain Hills mountains tall buildings power lines electric fences traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception Station overload When you pass a broadcast tower a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency is displayed CD CD player care Do e Handle discs by their edges only Ma Never touch the playing surface Inspect discs before playing Clean only with an approved CD cleaner Wipe discs from the center out Dont e Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods of time e Clean using a circular motion CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4 75 in 12 cm audio compact discs only Due to technical incompatibility certain recordable and re recordable compact discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players 62 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Do not use any irregular shaped CDs or discs with a scratch protection film attached Sf 4 P CDs with homemade paper adhesive labels should not be gt inserted into the CD player as the label may peel and cause the gt CD to become jammed It is recommended that homemade CDs be identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels Ballpoint pens may damage CDs Please contact your authorized dealer for further information Audio system warranty and service R
55. airbag system and Safety Canopy system later in this chapter 210 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints e one or more impact and safing sensors e driver and front passenger safety belt pretensioner e areadiness light and tone e diagnostic module e the electrical wiring which connects the components e Front passenger sensing system Refer to Front passenger sensing system later in this chapter e Passenger airbag off or pass airbag off indicator lamp Refer to Front passenger sensing system later in this chapter The diagnostic module monitors its own internal circuits and the supplemental airbag electrical system wiring including the impact sensors the system wiring the airbag system readiness light the airbag back up power and the airbag ignitors Front passenger sensing system The front passenger sensing system is designed to meet the regulatory requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard FMVSS 208 and is designed to disable will not inflate the front passenger s frontal airbag under certain conditions The front passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of the front passenger s seat and safety belt The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the front passenger s frontal airbag should be enabled may inflate or disabled will not inflate The front passenger sen
56. audio input jack USB port STO and power point Z We 3 Rear climate controls rear power Va point outlet and 110 Volt power point outlet if eguipped GEZ WARNING Use only soft cups in the cupholder Hard objects C 5 can injure you in a collision 111 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Second row center console features if equipped The second row center console incorporates the following features e Flip forward armrest to provide a flat load floor Utility compartment e Cupholders Refrigerator unit Gf equipped in the utility compartment Refer to Console refrigerator freezer WARNING Use only soft cups in the cupholder Hard objects can injure you in a collision Console refrigerator freezer if equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a refrigerator freezer for keeping items cool frozen The refrigerator freezer will operate when the vehicle is on or the ignition is in the accessory mode Ford recommends only using the refrigerator freezer when the vehicle s engine is running If there is a need to use the refrigerator freezer when the engine is off turn the ignition to the accessory mode and limit the time the refrigerator is running to avoid draining the vehicle s battery To open the refrigerator freezer flip the console lid forward and then lift off the refrigerator freezer cover Be sure to replace the cover after you are done using
57. axle must never exceed its GAWR Note For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your authorized dealer ia GVW Gross Vehicle Weight is the Vehicle Curb Weight cargo passengers GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle including all options equipment passengers and cargo The GVWR is shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The GVW must never exceed the GVWR 266 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus e Example only WARNING Tires Wheels and Loading MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO GVWR XXXXXLB XXXXXKG REAR GAWR XXXXLI XXXXKG XXXX XXXXXXX TIRES XXXX XX RIMS XXXX XX RIMS AT XXX KPa XX PSLCOLD 4f AT XXX KPaXX PSI COLD THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE VIN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX TYPE XXX XXXXX EXT PNT XX RC XX DSO WETBRK TINTTR TPPS R TAXLE TR SPR TXXXXX XXX X XX X X XX XXX XXXXXXXXXXXXX_ XXX XXXX XXXXXXX XX DATE XX XX FRONT GAWR XXXXL XXXXKG WITH XXXX XXXXXXX TIRES WITH XXXXX MFD BY F FORD MC MOTOR C0 GYW XXXX LB OXXKG FRONT nib M7 a GAWR vg AR XXX AVEC T RES PNEUS POX DATE xx xx Cd e hy felis
58. ay ans XXXX XXXXXX RIMS JANTES XXxXXX AT AkPa PSI LPC xxx xx VIN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX TYPE XXX XXXX COMPLIES 000 00 ox ROK unc ed yi TT TR TANE R SPR X Xx O 0000000000000 XXX TXXXX00000X XX COLD A FROID xxx xx JUMELEES Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle handling or performance engine transmission and or structural damage serious damage to the vehicle loss of control and personal injury 2011 MKT mkt 267 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading GCW Gross Combined Weight is the weight of the loaded vehicle GVW plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer GCWR Gross Combined Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer including all cargo and passengers that the vehicle can handle without risking damage Important The towing vehicles braking system is rated for operation at GVWR not at GCWR Separate functional brakes should be used for safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle The GCW must never exceed the GCWR Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight is the highest possible weight of a fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow It assumes a vehicle with only mandatory options no cargo internal
59. be heard The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem and warning light are repaired If any of these things happen even intermittently have the Personal Safety System serviced at an authorized dealer immediately Unless serviced the system may not function properly in the event of a collision Safety belt precautions i WARNING Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips A WARNING To reduce the risk of injury make sure children sit where they can be properly restrained A WARNING Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision 195 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always properly wear their safety belts even when an air bag supplemental restraint system SRS is provided WARNING It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly WARNING In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a perso
60. be waived if the axle was filled with 75W140 synthetic gear lubricant meeting Ford specification WSLM2C192 A part number FITZ 19580 B or equivalent Add four ounces 118 ml of friction modifier XL 3 EST M2C118 A or equivalent for complete refill of Traction Lok rear axles The axle lubricant should be changed anytime the axle has been submerged in water California fuel filter replacement If vehicle is registered in California the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this main tenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle s useful life Ford Motor Company however urges you to have all recommended maintenance services performed at the specified inter vals and to record all vehicle service Hot climate oil change intervals If operating conditions are normal and you drive your Ford Lincoln or Mercury vehicle under typical everyday conditions and you are using an API performance category oil of SL or later for example SM etc then you can follow the 7 500 mile 12 000 km normal service oil change intervals schedule Vehicles operating in the Middle East North Africa Sub Saharan Africa or locations with similar climates must follow the oil change interval of 3 000 mile 5 000 km if the owner is using oils defined by the American Petroleum Institute API performance category of API SK or earlier for ex ample SJ efc Engine ai
61. before slip occurs The AWD system is active all the time and requires no input from the operator All components of the AWD system are sealed for life and require no maintenance Note When an AWD system fault is present the warning CHECK AWD will display in the message center The AWD system is not functioning correctly and defaulted to front wheel drive When this warning is displayed have your vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer If your vehicle is equipped with AWD a spare tire of a different size other than the tire provided should never be used If the spare tire is installed the AWD system may disable automatically and enter front wheel drive only mode to protect driveline components This condition may be indicated by an AWD OFF message in the message center see Message center section in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information If there is an AWD OFF message in the message center from using the spare tire this indicator should turn off after reinstalling the repaired or replaced normal road tire and driving a short distance It is recommended to reinstall the repaired or replaced road tire as soon as possible Major dissimilar tire sizes between the front and rear axles could cause the AWD system to stop functioning and default to front wheel drive or damage the AWD system Note The AWD OFF message may also be displayed in the message center if the AWD system has overheated and defaulted to front wheel drive Th
62. camera system with the liftgate open If the back end of the vehicle is hit or damaged then check with your authorized dealer to have your rear video system checked for proper coverage and operation Night time and dark area use At night time or in dark areas the camera system relies on the reverse lamp lighting to produce an image Therefore it is necessary that both reverse lamps are operating in order to get a clear image in the dark If either of the lamps are not operating stop using the camera system at least in the dark until the lamp s are replaced and functioning Servicing e If the image comes on while the vehicle is not in R Reverse have the system inspected by your authorized dealer e If the image is not clear then check if there is anything covering the lens such as dirt mud ice snow etc If the image is still not clear after cleaning have your system inspected by your authorized dealer 300 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The collision warning with brake support is designed to alert the driver of certain collision risks with a red warning light located above the dashboard and an audible warning chime The brake support assists the driver in reducing the collision speed by pre charging the brakes WARNING This system is designed to be a supplementary driving aid It is not intended to replace the driver s attention and j
63. car wash facilities Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear worn or do not function properly e Do not use abrasives as they may cause scratches e Do not use fuel kerosene or paint thinner to clean any parts If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion clean the outer surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild abrasive cleaning solution After cleaning rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield with water Do not use sharp objects such as a razor blade to clean the inside of the rear window or to remove decals as it may cause damage to the rear window defroster s heated grid lines INSTRUMENT PANEL INTERIOR TRIM AND CLUSTER LENS Clean the instrument panel interior trim areas and cluster lens with a clean damp white cotton cloth then use a clean and dry white cotton cloth to dry these areas e Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion of the instrument panel The dull finish in this area helps protect the driver from undesirable windshield reflection e Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted surfaces
64. changing a flat tire wheel removal etc ft Ib 1 2 20 UNF Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners WARNING When a wheel is installed always remove any corrosion dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel Ensure that any fasteners that attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel Installing wheels without correct metal to metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in motion resulting in loss of control Note Inspect the wheel pilot hole prior to installation If there is visible corrosion in wheel pilot hole remove loose particles by wiping with clean rag and apply grease Apply grease only to the wheel pilot hole surface by smearing a dime 1 square cm sized glob of grease around the wheel pilot surface 1 with end of finger DO NOT apply grease to lugnut stud holes or wheel to brake surfaces RUNNING OUT OF FUEL If you have run out of fuel and need to refill the vehicle with a portable fuel container see Running out of fuel in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for proper fuel filling method using a portable fuel container and the included fuel filler funnel Do not i
65. dialog box with the disclaimer appears press OK and ensure that you are using the proper format 5 Insert a CD ROM which contains your photos as jpegs 6 Press OK The photos will be listed on the right half of the screen 7 Select either ADD or ADD ALL The photos are now saved to the hard drive Photo display limitations e The file must be 1 5MB or less e The extension of the file must be one of JPE JPG JPEG e The CD or DVD must be ISO 9660 format UDF format is not supported e The file path must be 255 characters or less 36 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems e Up to 256 files or folders can be displayed in one folder e Not compatible with discs written in Packet Write mode e Only the photograph s which meet these conditions will be displayed Note When burning a CD ensure that you close or finalize the disc when the CD burning process finishes you should select this option before you start burning Consult your software manual or the program s Help files if you re not sure how to finalize the disc Also write the audio data into the first session of a multi session CD as audio systems won t be able to sort through other sessions to find more audio tracks Rearview camera display if equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a rearview camera on the tailgate which provides a video image of the area behind the vehicle When the transmission is in R
66. door opens e Something touching the steering wheel If a fault is present in the system the message ACTIVE PARK FAULT will be displayed followed by a chime Contact an authorized dealer to have your vehicle serviced 306 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving The system should not be used if e a foreign object i e bike rack trailer etc is attached to the front or rear of the vehicle or at another location close to the sensors e the front bumper or side sensors are damaged i e in a collision or obstructed by a foreign object i e front bumper cover e a mini spare tire is used Troubleshooting Why isn t APA searching for a parking space e You may have deactivated the AdvanceTrac system e One of the doors except the driver s door may not be securely closed Why doesn t APA offer a particular parking space e Something may be contacting the front bumper or side sensors Clear any material stuck to the sensors e There may not be enough room to maneuver the vehicle into the space Remember there needs to be enough space on the opposite side of the vehicle to allow the front of the vehicle to swing out as you back into the space e The vehicle is not driven close enough to the parking space less than 60 inches 1 5 m from neighboring parked vehicles e The vehicle is driven too close to the side objects e g less than 16 inches 41 cm from neighboring parked vehicles e You
67. drain holes free from packed dirt 370 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning FORD AND LINCOLN MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS Your Ford or Lincoln Mercury authorized dealer has many quality products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes These quality products have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs they are custom designed to complement the style and appearance of your vehicle Each product is made from high quality materials that meet or exceed rigid specifications For best results use the following products or products of equivalent quality Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner ZC 15 Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A Motorcraft Dusting Cloth ZC 24 Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser U S only ZC 20 Motorcraft Engine Shampoo Canada only CXC 66 A Motorcraft Multi Purpose Cleaner Canada only CXC 101 Motorcraft Premium Glass Cleaner Canada only CXC 100 Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid Canada only CXC 37 A B D or F Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate U S only ZC 32 A Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet amp Upholstery Cleaner ZC 54 Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover U S only ZC 14 Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner ZC 23 Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner Canada only CXC 93 Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner ZC
68. drive disc information such as used free space and total capacity e CD Database Information Select to access the CD database information 48 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Creating a playlist 1 Press the MEDIA hard button 2 Select the Jukebox tab on the touchscreen 3 Select Options 4 Select Edit Playlists 5 Select which playlist you would like to create 6 Select which category you would like to access from your saved music For example say you chose one saved album from which to select songs 7 Select the desired songs and then press Add The system will show you your currently selected songs You can choose to add more tracks to your playlist sort the playlist delete the playlist or to edit the name of the playlist 8 When you are done making any adjustment to the playlist select Edit Name to rename your playlist You can then access your playlist by that name User device Your vehicle is equipped with MEDIA ser Deve SYNC Press the User Device tab to access your SYNC media options For more information please refer to the SYNC media features chapter in your SYNC supplement Connect to Device From Bluetooth Devices Rear DVD system if equipped Your system allows you to access the dual DVD headrest system if equipped To access 1 Press the MEDIA hard button 49 2011 MKT mkt Owner
69. drivers If the vehicle is equipped with automatic high beams the high beam switch will operate differently depending on the status of the automatic high beam system Each of the possible operating scenarios are detailed below Scenario 1 Conditions The automatic high beam system is set to ON in the message center The headlamp switch is in W auto lamps The automatic high beam system has turned the high beams on Operation The high beam switch will not perform any function 97 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights Scenario 2 Conditions The automatic high beam system is set to ON in the message center The headlamp switch is in W auto lamps The automatic high beam system has not turned the high beams on Operation The high beam switch can be used to turn the high beams on They will then remain on until the switch has been returned to the neutral position and the auto high beam system has turned the high beams off Scenario 3 Conditions The automatic high beam system is set to ON in the message center The headlamp switch is in O off pS parking lamps or ZD on Operation The high beam switch can be used to turn the high beams on and off Scenario 4 Conditions The automatic high beam system is set to OFF in the message center The headlamp switch is in W auto lamps C off p parking lamps or ED on Operation The high beam switch can be used to turn
70. economy e Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel economy e Combine errands and minimize stop and go driving Maintenance e Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size e Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel economy e Use recommended engine oil Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter e Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items Follow the recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks found in scheduled maintenance information 399 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Conditions e Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy at any speed e Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy approximately 1 mpg 0 4 km L is lost for every 400 Ib 180 kg of weight carried e Adding certain accessories to your vehicle for example bug deflectors rollbars light bars running boards ski racks may reduce fuel economy Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy e Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first 8 10 miles 12 16 km of driving e Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to driving on hilly terrain e Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal e Close window
71. economy is re initialized to a factory default value if the battery is disconnected AVG MPG L 100km Average fuel economy displays your average fuel economy in miles gallon or liters 100 km If you calculate your average fuel economy by dividing distance traveled by gallons of fuel used liters of fuel used by 100 kilometers traveled your figure may be different than displayed for the following reasons e Your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill up e Differences in the automatic shut off points on the fuel pumps at service stations 19 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster e Variations in top off procedure from one fill up to another e Rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0 1 gallon liter To determine your average highway fuel economy do the following 1 Drive the vehicle at least 5 miles 8 km with the speed control system engaged to display a stabilized average 2 Record the highway fuel economy for future reference It is important to press RESET press and hold RESET for two seconds in order to reset the function after setting the speed control to get accurate highway fuel economy readings For more information refer to Essentials of good fuel economy in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter MPG 1 km 4 This displays instantaneous fuel economy as a bar graph ranging from poor economy to f excellent economy Your vehicle must be moving to calc
72. fuel filler system This allows you to simply open the fuel filler door and insert the fuel filler nozzle into the fuel system The Easy Fuel system is self sealing and protected against dust dirt water and snow ice When fueling your vehicle 1 Turn the engine off 2 Open the fuel filler door 3 Slowly insert the fuel filler nozzle fully into the fuel system and leave the nozzle fully inserted until you are done pumping Pump fuel as normal 393 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 4 After you are done pumping fuel slowly remove the fuel filler nozzle allow about five seconds after pumping fuel before removing the fuel filler nozzle This allows residual fuel to drain back into the fuel tank and not spill onto the vehicle Note A fuel spillage concern may occur if overfilling the fuel tank Do not overfill the tank to the point that the fuel is able to bypass the fuel filler nozzle The overfilled fuel may run down the drain located below and in front of the fuel filler door If the check fuel fill inlet lamp or CHECK FUEL FILL INLET message comes on the fuel fill inlet may not have properly closed The inlet may have stuck open or debris may be preventing the inlet from fully closing At the next opportunity safely pull off the road turn off the engine open the fuel filler door and remove any visible debris from the fuel fill opening Insert either the fuel fill noz
73. has been in motion at a speed greater than 12 mph 20 km h e the vehicle has then come to a stop and the ignition is turned off or to accessory and the driver door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being turned off or to accessory Note The doors will not autounlock if the vehicle has been electronically locked before the driver door is opened 153 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Deactivating activating autounlock feature Your vehicle comes with the autounlock features activated there are four methods to enable disable this feature e Through your authorized dealer e by using a power door unlock lock sequence e using a keypad procedure or e by using the instrument cluster message center Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter Note The autounlock feature can be activated deactivated independently of the autolock feature Power door lock switch autounlock enable disable procedure Before starting ensure the ignition is off and all vehicle doors are closed You must complete Steps 1 5 within 30 seconds or the procedure will have to be repeated If the procedure needs to be repeated wait a minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again 1 Turn the ignition on 2 Press the power door unlock a control on the door panel three times 3 Turn the ignition off A Cg 4 Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three
74. hold any of the memory presets buttons 1 6 or any of the soft key memory preset buttons on the screen while on the desired station The new station will replace the previous one recorded Satellite radio SAT if activated Once the Satellite Radio feature is activated your system will have additional features 1 Ensure that the system is on 2 Press the RADIO hard button 3 Select the SAT tab on the touchscreen to enter satellite radio mode if activated 4 Press Show Options to select from 42 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Sat 123 You will be able to access f sat Om NM o 63 10 30am three different Satellite Radio To modes SAT1 SAT2 and SAT3 m 1 2 sam li Jam ON war The Grateful Dead The Music Never Stopped Scan Press to hear a brief sampling of satellite radio channels within the currently selected genre Press again to stop Scan Presets Press to hear a brief sampling of all preset channels Channel Guide Press to display a list of satellite radio channels sorted by genre and also to skip or lock out certain channels Select the desired genre and choose a channel by pressing the channel name button You can then choose to Skip or Lock a certain channel A skipped channel will not be accessible using the tune knob scan or seek functions To access the skipped channel select Direct Tune and enter the channel number
75. indicates empty you might not be able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank For consistent results when filling the fuel tank e Turn the engine ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running e Use the same filling rate setting ow medium high each time the tank is filled e Allow no more than two automatic click offs when filling e Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating e Use a known quality gasoline preferably a national brand e Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent Calculating fuel economy 1 Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading in miles or kilometers 2 Each time you fill the tank record the amount of fuel added Gn gallons or liters 3 After at least three to five tank fill ups fill the fuel tank and record the current odometer reading 4 Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer reading 5 Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel economy Calculation 1 Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used Calculation 2 Multiply liters used by 100 then divide by total kilometers traveled Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of dr
76. information on the service engine soon indicator refer to Warning lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter Refilling with a portable fuel container With the Easy Fuel no cap fuel system use the following directions when filling from a portable fuel container WARNING Do not insert the nozzle of portable fuel containers or aftermarket funnels into the Easy Fuel system This could damage the fuel system and its seal and may cause fuel to run onto the ground instead of filling the tank which could result in serious personal injury WARNING Do not try to pry open or push open the Easy Fuel system with foreign objects This could damage the fuel system and its seal and cause injury to you or others When filling the vehicle s fuel tank from a portable fuel container use the funnel included with the vehicle 396 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 1 After lifting the carpeted floor panel locate the white plastic funnel It is attached to the rear lower edge of the spare tire compartment 2 Slowly insert the funnel into the Easy Fuel system 3 Fill the vehicle with fuel from the portable fuel container 4 When done clean the funnel or properly dispose of it Extra funnels can be purchased from your authorized dealer if you choose to dispose of the funnel Do not use aftermarket funnels they will not work with th
77. is normally higher than the manufacturer s recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the vehicle label The tire suppliers may have additional markings notes or warnings such as standard load radial tubeless etc 254 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for LT type tires LT type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires these differences are described below Note Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire 1 LT Indicates a tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association T amp RA that is intended for service on light trucks 2 Load Range Load Inflation Limits Indicates the tire s load carrying capabilities and its inflation limits 3 Maximum Load Dual Ib kg at psi kPa cold Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual defined as four tires on the rear axle a total of six or more tires on the vehicle 4 Maximum Load Single Ib kg at psi kPa cold Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single defined as two tires total on the rear axle 255 2011 MKT
78. is programmed to the system 27 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster KEY PROGRAMMED 4 KEYS TOTAL if equipped Displayed during spare key programming when a fourth intelligent access key is programmed to the system MAX OF KEYS LEARNED if equipped Displayed during spare key programming after a fourth intelligent access key is programmed or upon entering spare key programming mode with four intelligent access keys already programmed to the vehicle MYKEY ACTIVE DRIVE SAFELY Displayed at startup when MyKey is in use Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information KEY COULD NOT PROGRAM Displayed when an attempt is made to program a spare key using two existing MyKeys Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information VEHICLE SPEED 80 MPH MAX Displayed when a MyKey is in use and the admin has enabled the MyKey speed limit and the vehicle speed is 80 mph 130 km h Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information SPEED LIMITED TO 80 MPH Displayed when starting the vehicle and MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information CHECK SPEED DRIVE SAFELY Displayed when a MyKey is in use and the optional setting is on and the vehicle exceeds a preselected speed Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter
79. is programmed as a MyKey Refer to MyKey with remote start systems section Lost the only admin key e Purchase a new key from your authorized dealer 149 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Potential Causes Lost any key e For programming spare keys refer to the Programming spare keys section in this chapter I accidentally programmed e Vehicle has a remote start system that all keys as MyKeys is recognized as an admin key Refer to the Using MyKey with remote start systems section to reset all MyKeys as admin keys No MyKey function with e An admin key is present at vehicle intelligent access key push start button start Gf equipped e No MyKeys are programmed to the vehicle Refer to Create a MyKey section MyKey programmed total e Unknown key has been programmed to includes one additional key the vehicle as a MyKey e Vehicle is equipped with a remote start system Refer to Using MyKey with remote start systems section Admin keys programmed e Unknown key has been programmed to total includes one additional the vehicle as admin key key e Vehicle is equipped with a remote start system Refer to Using MyKey with remote start systems section MyKey miles do not e MyKey is not being used by the accumulate intended user e MyKey system has been recently cleared 150 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fu
80. it provides valuable information early in the crash event on the severity of the impact This allows your Personal Safety System to distinguish between different levels of crash severity and modify the deployment strategy of the dual stage airbags and safety belt pretensioners Driver s seat position sensor The driver s seat position sensor allows your Personal Safety System to tailor the deployment level of the driver dual stage airbag based on seat position The system is designed to help protect smaller drivers sitting close to the driver airbag by providing a lower airbag output level 193 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Front passenger sensing system For airbags to do their job they must inflate with great force and this force can pose a potentially deadly risk to occupants that are very close to the airbag when it begins to inflate For some occupants this occurs because they are initially sitting very close to the airbag For other occupants this occurs when the occupant is not properly restrained by safety belts or child safety seats and they move forward during pre crash braking The most effective way to reduce the risk of unnecessary injuries is to make sure all occupants are properly restrained Accident statistics suggest that children are much safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front The front passenger sensing system can auto
81. may be driving in R Reverse APA can only look for a parking space while moving forward Why doesn t APA position the vehicle where I want in the space e The driver allows the vehicle to roll in the opposite direction of the transmission such as rolling forward when R Reverse gear is selected e You may be driving in R Reverse APA can only look for a parking space while moving forward e There may be an irregular curb along the parking space APA might not be able to align the vehicle to curbs that are damaged very shallow or covered with material such as debris leaves snow or tarps e The vehicles or objects bordering the space may not be positioned appropriately e The vehicle was pulled further up from the parking space than usual while driving by the space APA performs best when you drive the same distance past the entire length of the parking space whenever parking your vehicle 307 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving e The tires may not be installed and maintained correctly For example one or more tires may not be inflated correctly may not be of the same size or may not be authorized for use on this vehicle e The vehicle had a repair or alteration that is not authorized by the manufacturer e One of the parked vehicles has a high altitude attachment i e salt sprayer snow plow moving truck high bed etc High altitude attachments may not be detected by the system e The
82. of the 3 autolamp position For severe fog on freeways or severe fog in low traffic situations use of fog lamps is recommended Setting auto high beam sensitivity The automatic high beam system has two sensitivity settings The default setting is near If you would like the high beams to turn off when traffic is further away the sensitivity setting can be changed to far The procedure is as follows Preconditions e Vehicle is at a stop e Ignition is in the on position e The headlamp control is in the gD position e High beams are off Programming Sequence 1 Turn the headlamp control from ZD on to W autolamp three times within two seconds ending inZD on 2 Cycle flash to pass three times using the multi function lever 3 The high beams will flash momentarily to confirm that the sensitivity setting has been changed 99 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights Note The programming sequence will end if either of the following occur e The vehicle speed is not zero e The battery voltage is out of normal range Troubleshooting If the automatic high beam camera becomes blocked the high beams may not come on automatically They will only activate when they are manually turned on with the multi function lever Typical road dust dirt and water spots will not affect the automatic high beam system s performance However in cold or inclement weather conditions the automatic high
83. of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm PERCHLORATE MATERIAL Certain components of this vehicle such as airbag modules seat belt pretensioners and button cell batteries may contain Perchlorate Material Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate BREAKING IN YOUR VEHICLE Your vehicle does not need an extensive break in Try not to drive continuously at the same speed for the first 1 000 miles 1 600 km of new vehicle operation Vary your speed frequently in order to give the moving parts a chance to break in Drive your new vehicle at least 1 000 miles 1 600 km before towing a trailer For more detailed information about towing a trailer refer to Trawler towing in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter Do not add friction modifier compounds or special break in oils since these additives may prevent piston ring seating See Engine oil in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information on oil usage 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction SPECIAL NOTICES New Vehicle Li
84. operate again and vehicle speed will decrease to the set speed or a lower speed if following a slower vehicle 126 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Changing the set speed There are three ways to change the set speed e Accelerate or brake to the desired speed and press and release the SET or SET control e ncrease or decrease the speed by holding either the SET or SET control until the desired set speed is shown on the message center The vehicle speed will gradually change to the selected speed e Increase or decrease the speed in increments of 1 mph 2 km h by briefly pressing the SET or SET control The ACC may apply the brakes to slow the vehicle down to the new set speed The set speed will display continuously in the message center while ACC is active Resuming the set speed Press and release the RESUME control This will automatically return the vehicle to the previously set speed The set speed will display continuously in the message center while ACC is active Note RESUME should only be used if the driver is aware of the set speed and intends to return to it Low speed automatic cancellation ACC is not functional at vehicle speeds below 18 mph 80 km h Once the vehicle speed drops below 18 mph 80 km h an audible alarm will sound the head s up display will flash and the automatic braking will be released Hilly condition usage
85. or Ford authorized remanufactured parts that are used for maintenance replacement or for the service of components affecting emission control must be equivalent to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability It is the owner s responsibility to determine the equivalency of such parts Please consult your Warranty Guide for complete warranty information Non Ford approved chemicals or additives are not required for factory recommended maintenance In fact Ford Motor Company recommends against the use of such additive products unless specifically recommended by Ford for a particular application Oil fluids and flushing In many cases fluid discoloration is a normal operating characteristic and by itself does not necessarily indicate a concern or that the fluid needs to be changed However discolored fluids that also show signs of overheating and or foreign material contamination should be inspected immediately by a qualified expert such as the factory trained technicians at your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealership Your vehicle s oils and fluids should be changed at the specified intervals or in conjunction with a repair Flushing is a viable way to change fluid for many vehicle sub systems during scheduled maintenance It is critical that systems are flushed only with new fluid that is the same as that required to fill and operate the system or using a Ford approved flushing chemical Genuine Ford parts and service When
86. or serious engine damage Ford Motor Company Ford of Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper fuel Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle back into the U S 359 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in Asia Pacific Region Sub Saharan Africa U S Virgin Islands Central America the Caribbean and Israel contact the nearest authorized dealer If the authorized dealer cannot help you contact FORD MOTOR COMPANY FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS 1555 Fairlane Drive Fairlane Business Park 3 Allen Park Michigan 48101 U S A Telephone 313 594 4857 FAX 313 390 0804 Email expcac ford com If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in Puerto Rico contact the nearest authorized dealer If the authorized dealer cannot help you contact Ford International Business Development Inc Customer Assistance Center P O Box 11957 Caparra Heights Station San Juan Puerto Rico 00922 1957 Telephone 800 841 FORD 8673 FAX 313 390 0804 Email prcac ford com If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in the Middle East contact the nearest authorized dealer If the authorized dealer cannot help you contact Ford Middle East Customer Relationship Center P O Box 21470 Dubai United Arab Emirates Telephone 971 4 332
87. or the trunk was opened the battery saver will shut them off 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned off e The battery saver will shut off the headlamps 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned off Accessory mode battery saver for intelligent access keys with push button start The battery saver will shut off the ignition approximately 45 minutes after the vehicle is left in accessory mode in order to preserve the vehicle s battery 162 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security SECURICODE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM The keypad located near the driver s window is invisible until touched and then it lights up so you can see and touch the appropriate buttons Note If you enter your entry code too fast on the keypad the unlock function may not work Re enter your entry code more slowly You can use the keyless entry keypad to e lock or unlock the doors without using a key e recall memory seat power mirrors and adjustable pedals if equipped e enable or disable the autolock and autounlock features activate intelligent access at the driver door refer to Intelligent access in this chapter The keypad can be operated with the factory set 5 digit entry code this code is located on the owner s wallet card in the glove box and is available from your authorized dealer You can also create up to three of your own 5 digit personal entry codes Note Your keypad wil
88. or to remove decals from the inside of the rear window This may cause damage to the heated grid lines and will not be covered by your warranty CABIN AIR FILTER The cabin air filter element is designed to reduce the concentration of airborne particles such as dust spores and pollen in the air being supplied to the interior of the vehicle The presence of a particulate filter element provides the following benefits e Improves your driving comfort by reducing particle concentration e Improves the interior compartment cleanliness e Protects the climate control components from particle deposits Note A cabin air filter must be installed at all times to prevent foreign objects from entering the system Running the system without a filter in place could result in degradation or damage to the system The access door for the filter is located behind the glove box For replacement intervals regarding the cabin air filter see the scheduled maintenance information For more information regarding your filter see your authorized dealer 94 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus HEADLAMP CONTROL Turns the lamps off PS Turns on the parking lamps instrument panel lamps license plate lamps and tail lamps ZD Turns the low beam headlamps on Adaptive headlamps The headlamp beams move in the same direction as the steering wheel which provides more visibility when driving around curves e Without
89. overheating or freezing e Do not use alcohol methanol brine or any engine coolants mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze coolant Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or freezing e Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant These can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine coolant For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non pressurized cap on the coolant recovery system add coolant to the coolant recovery reservoir when the engine is cool Add the proper mixture of coolant and distilled water to the FULL COLD level For all other vehicles which have a coolant degas system with a pressurized cap or if it is necessary to remove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with an overflow system follow these steps to add engine coolant WARNING To reduce the risk of personal injury make sure the engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap The cooling system is under pressure steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly Add the proper mixture of coolant and water to the cooling system by following these steps 1 Before you begin turn the engine off and let it cool 2 When the engine is cool wrap a thick cloth around the coolant pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir a translucent plastic bottle Slowly turn cap counterclockwise left until pressure begins to rel
90. planning your maintenance services consider your Ford and Lincoln Mercury dealership for all your vehicle s needs Get the most from your service and maintenance visits There are a lot of reasons why visiting your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealership for all your service needs is a great way to help keep your vehicle running great 428 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide Convenience Many dealerships have extended evening and Saturday hours to make your service visit more convenient How s that for quality service Factory trained technicians Ford and Lincoln Mercury service technicians participate in extensive factory sponsored certification training to help them become experts on the operation of your vehicle Ask your dealership about the training and certification their technicians have received Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement parts Ford and Lincoln Mercury dealerships stock Ford and Motorcraft branded replacement parts These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor Company s specifications and we stand behind them Parts installed at your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealership carry a nationwide 12 months 12 000 mile 20 000 km parts and labor limited warranty Your dealer can give you details Value shopping for your vehicle s maintenance needs Your dealership recognizes the competitive landscape of maintenance and light repair automotive services With factory
91. practices Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety e Observe posted speed limits e Avoid fast starts stops and turns e Avoid potholes and objects on the road 249 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading e Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking WARNING If your vehicle is stuck in snow mud sand etc do not rapidly spin the tires spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause an explosion A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds WARNING Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph 56 km h The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander Highway hazards No matter how carefully you drive there s always the possibility that you may eventually have a flat tire on the highway Drive slowly to the closest safe area out of traffic This may further damage the flat tire but your safety is more important If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving or you suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged immediately reduce your speed Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road Stop and inspect the tires for damage If a tire is under inflated or damaged deflate it remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel If you cannot detect a cause have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected Tire and wheel alignment
92. prevent dirt and foreign objects from entering the DVD player compartment Be especially careful not to spill liquids of any kind onto the media controls or into the system If liquid is accidentally spilled onto the system immediately turn the system OFF and consult a qualified service technician Cleaning the liquid crystal display LCD screen Clean the display screen by applying a small amount of water or any ammonia based household glass cleaner directly to a soft cloth Rub the screen gently until the dust dirt or fingerprints are removed Do not spray the screen directly with water or glass cleaning solvents Overspray from these fluids could drip down into the internal electronics of the screen and cause damage Do not apply excessive pressure while cleaning the screen Cleaning DVD and CD discs Inspect all discs for contamination before playing If necessary clean discs only with an approved DVD and CD cleaner and wipe from the center out to the edge Do not use circular motion NAVIGATION SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a navigation system Refer to the Navigation System supplement for further information SYNC Your vehicle is equipped with SYNC a hands free communications and entertainment system with special phone and media features For more information please refer to the SYNC supplement or to the SYNC section in the Navigation System supplement if equipped 87 2011 MKT mkt Own
93. reach the recommended air pressure Note If you overfill the tire release air by pressing on the metal stem in the center of the valve Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge 4 Replace the valve cap 5 Repeat this procedure for each tire including the spare Note Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the other tires For T type mini spare tires see the Dissimilar spare tire wheel information section for description Store and maintain at 60 psi 4 15 bar For full size and dissimilar spare tires see the Dissimilar spare tire wheel information section for description Store and maintain at the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure as shown on the Tire Label 6 Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air leak 7 Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges cuts or bulges TIRE CARE Inspecting your tires and wheel valve stems Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and remove objects such as stones nails or glass that may be wedged in the tread grooves Check the tire and valve stems for holes cracks or cuts that may permit air leakage and repair or replace the tire and replace the valve stem Inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking cuts bruises and other signs of damage or excessive wear If internal damage to the tire is suspected have the tire demounte
94. remote entry lock unlock feature operates in any ignition position except while the vehicle is in the start position The panic feature operates with the ignition off If there are problems with the remote entry system make sure to take ALL intelligent access keys with you to the authorized dealer in order to aid in troubleshooting the problem 156 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Intelligent Access WARNING Radio waves from the intelligent access system transmitters in the vehicle may affect certain implanted medical devices such as pacemakers or cardiac defibrillators People having such implanted medical devices should ask the medical device manufacturer or their physician whether the intelligent access system may affect the equipment before coming into close proximity with a vehicle equipped with intelligent access Failure to do so may result in interference with the medical device which could result in serious injury Your intelligent access system uses a radio frequency RF signal to communicate with your vehicle and authorize your vehicle to unlock when commanded either by pressing any keyless entry keypad button the power liftgate button or a button on the transmitter itself If excessive RF interference is present in the area or if your vehicle battery is low it may be necessary to mechanically unlock your door The mechanical key blade in your IA key can be used to open the dri
95. repeat the previous procedure using control button 2 A position can only be recalled when the transmission gearshift is in Park automatic transmission A memory seat position may be programmed at any time The memory seat positions are also recalled when you press your remote entry transmitter o unlock control and the transmitter is 177 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints programmed to a memory seat position or when you enter a valid customer code 1 or 2 on the keypad To program the memory seat to remote entry transmitter refer to Remote entry system in the Locks and Security chapter Note The seat will not travel to its final position if the key is not in the ignition and the easy entry feature is enabled Easy access easy out feature This feature automatically moves the steering wheel all the way up and in and moves the driver s seat rearward 2 in 5 cm when e the transmission is in N Neutral or P Park e the ignition is turned off The seat and steering wheel will move to the original position when e the transmission is in N Neutral or P Park e the ignition is put in accessory mode The easy entry feature can be turned off or on through the vehicle message center Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter REAR SEATS Non adjustable second row outboard head restraints Your vehicle is equipped with second row outboard head restraints t
96. restraints must be purchased separately from the vehicle Failure to follow these instructions and guidelines may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to your child WARNING All children are shaped differently The Recommendations for Safety Restraints are based on probable child height age and weight thresholds from NHTSA and other safety organizations or are the minimum requirements of law Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician CPST and consult your pediatrician to make sure your child seat is appropriate for your child and is compatible with and properly installed in the vehicle To locate a child seat fitting station and CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1 888 327 4236 or on the internet at http Avww nhtsa dot gov In Canada check with your local St John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further information contact your provincial ministry of transportation your local St John Ambulance office at http www sfa ca or Transport Canada at 1 800 333 0371 http www tc gc ca Failure to properly restrain children in safety seats made especially for their height age and weight may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to your child 222 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children A A Recommended Infants or Children weighing 40 Ib 18
97. scraper or F attempt to readjust the mirror glass if it is frozen in place These actions could cause damage to the glass and mirrors Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh abrasives fuel or other petroleum based cleaning products Fold away mirrors Fold the side mirrors in carefully when driving through a narrow space like an automatic car wash 119 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Signal indicator mirrors When the turn signal is activated the outer portion of the appropriate mirror housing will blink gt This provides an additional warning to other drivers that your vehicle is about to tum POWER ADJUSTABLE FOOT PEDALS The accelerator and brake pedal should only be adjusted when the vehicle is stopped and the gearshift lever is in the P Park position Press and hold the rocker control located on the instrument panel to adjust accelerator and brake pedal e Pressthetopofthe control to adjust the pedals away from you e Press the bottom of the control to adjust the pedals towards you WARNING Never adjust the accelerator and brake pedal with feet on the pedals while the vehicle is moving Memory feature if equipped The accelerator and brake pedal positions are saved when doing a memory set function and can be recalled along with the vehicle personality features when a memory position is selected through the remote entry transmitter
98. second pulley groove farthest from engine 417 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 3 5L V6 EcoBoost engine IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE Safety Compliance Certification Label The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration Regulations require MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO i DATE XXIXX GVWR XXXXXLB XXXXXKG that ve Safety Comp lance FRONT GAWR XXXL REAR GAWR XXXL Certification Label be affixed to a XXXXKG wl XXXXKG WITH YXOXIKKAMKNK OTIRES XXXXIXKXAKAKD TIRES vehicle and prescribe where the eee rN eerie N Safety Compliance Certification AT XXX KPAX CPSLGOLD AT XXX KPaX PSI COLD Label may be located The Safety THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MO woe VEHICLE SAFETY AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN Compliance Certification Label 1S EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE located on the structure B Pillar MNE 1000000000000000 by the trailing edge of the driver s i door or the edge of the driver s ll Il ll lI Il door EXT PNT XX RCXX DSO WBTBRK TINTTR PPS TR TANE TR SPR XXNX XXX X XX X XX XX XXX XXXXXXXXXXXXX XXX XXXX XXXXXXX XX 418 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications ee Please note that in the graphic XXXX is representative of your ke vehicle identification number Vehicle identification number VIN The vehicle identification number is
99. sensor obstructed for vehicle on left TL CTA detection limitations Due to the nature of radar technology there may be certain instances where vehicles entering and exiting the blind spot zones may not be detected Below is a list of circumstances that may cause non detection e Debris build up on the rear guarter panel fascias e The rear quarter panel radar beams are obstructed or partially obstructed by an adjacently parked vehicle or object Approaching vehicles passing at speeds greater than 15 mph 24 km h e Severe weather conditions e Driving in reverse faster than 3 mph 5 km h e Backing out of an angled parking spot CTA false alerts Due to the nature of radar technology there may be certain instances when the BLIS will alert with no object present when backing up This is known as a false alert Some level of false alerts are normal Circumstances that may cause a false alert when backing up are backing out of a garage backing in to a parking space and objects very close to the sensor False alerts are temporary and self correct 313 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving CTA and reverse sensing system RSS interaction CTA works along with the reverse sensing system RSS if equipped Become familiar with the warning tones of both systems BLIS and or CTA on off and disable operation The BLIS and or the CTA can be turned off via the message center If either the
100. so the compressor doesn t drain the vehicle s battery Do not allow the compressor to operate continuously for more than 15 minutes this will help prevent the compressor from overheating Never leave the temporary mobility kit unattended when it is operating Sealant compound contains latex Make sure that you use the non latex gloves provided to avoid an allergic reaction Keep the temporary mobility kit away from children Only use the temporary mobility kit when the ambient temperature is between 40 F 40 C and 158 F 70 C Only use the sealing compound before the use by date The use by date is on the lower right hand corner of the label located on the sealant canister bottle Check the use by date regularly and replace the canister after four years Do not store the temporary mobility kit unsecured inside the passenger compartment of the vehicle as it may cause injury during a sudden stop or collision Always store the kit in its original location After sealant use the TPMS sensor and valve stem on the wheel must be replaced by an authorized Ford dealer When inflating a tire or other objects use the black air hose only Do not use the transparent hose which is designed for sealant application only 342 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies e Operating the temporary mobility kit could cause an electrical disturbance in radio and DVD player operation What to do
101. system by restarting the engine and watch the message center for POWER STEERING ASSIST FAULT If the message returns or returns while driving take the vehicle to your dealer to have it checked With the message displayed the steering assist is turned off making the vehicle harder to steer WARNING If the message SERVICE POWER STEERING is displayed in the message center the EPS system has detected a problem with the system function On the next key cycle the message SERVICE POWER STEERING NOW will be displayed and steering assist will be removed until the steering system is serviced Have your vehicle taken to the nearest dealer as soon as possible 3 7L V6 Duratec engine Your vehicle is equipped with a hydraulic steering system To help prevent damage to the power steering system never hold the steering wheel at its furthest turning points until it stops for more than a few seconds when the engine is running If the power steering system breaks down or if the engine is turned off you can steer the vehicle manually but it takes more effort e Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering pump fluid level below the MIN mark on the reservoir e Some noise is normal during operation If excessive check for low power steering pump fluid level before seeking service by your authorized dealer e Heavy or uneven steering efforts may be caused by low power steering pump fluid level Check for low power steering pump flui
102. the keypad 45 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Settings Allows you to adjust the certain settings of the DVD player such as e Video Display Settings Press to adjust the brightness and contrast You can also choose to return to the default settings by pressing Restore Default e Audio Language Press to select which language you would like the DVD to display Subtitle Display Press to turn subtitles on off Subtitle Language Press to select in which language you would like the subtitles to appear e Aspect Ratio Press to select from wide full normal and cinema display e Angle Mark Notification Some DVD discs may have more viewing angles from which to select Once you have made your selection press ENTER to confirm This is disc dependent feature Note Some of the above settings are DVD dependent and availability operation will vary among DVDs Dolby noise reduction is manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation Dolby and the double D symbol are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation During DVD play you can also touch the screen to access the virtual remote which will allow you to Move controls on the screen as well as use the cursor controls Enter and Return to navigate and make selections within the menus Jukebox Your mobile media system has a Jukebox w
103. the paddle shifters on the steering wheel Press the paddle shifters to exit grade assist and enable control of selecting the gear you desire using the paddle shifters on the steering wheel e The grade assist lamp in the instrument cluster will not be illuminated e The current transmission gear will be displayed in the cluster Paddle shifters The paddle shifters allow you to shift gears quickly without taking your hands off the steering wheel 1 To manually downshift the transmission with the gearshift lever in M Manual press the paddle as shifters forward gt 2 To manually upshift the K Un i transmission with the gearshift lever in M Manual pull the paddle shifters rearward 295 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Recommended shift speeds Upshift according to the following chart Upshifts when accelerating recommended for best fuel economy Shift from 15 mph 24 km h The instrument cluster will show the current selected gear you are in P In order to prevent the engine from A running at too low an RPM which N may cause it to stall the SST will D automatically make some downshifts even if it has determined that you M have not downshifted in time Although the SST will make some downshifts for you it will still allow you to downshift at any time as long as the SST determines that the engine will not be damaged from over revving Engine damag
104. the seat back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion and affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system resulting in serious injury or death in a crash Always sit upright against your seatback with your feet on the floor The front passenger sensing system may detect small or medium objects placed on the seat cushion For most objects that are in the front passenger seat the passenger airbag will be disabled Even though the passenger airbag is disabled the pass airbag off lamp may or may not be illuminated according to the table below 213 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Small i e three ring Unlit Disabled binder small purse bottled water Medium i e heavy Lit Disabled briefcase fully packed luggage Empty seat or small Lit Disabled to medium object with safety belt buckled If you think that the status of the passenger airbag off indicator lamp is incorrect check for the following e Objects lodged underneath the seat e Objects between the seat cushion and the center console if equipped e Objects hanging off the seat back e Objects stowed in the seatback map pocket if equipped e Objects placed on the occupant s lap e Cargo interference with the seat e Other passengers pushing or pulling on the seat e Rear passenger feet and knees resting or pushing on the seat The conditions listed above may cause the weigh
105. the vehicle to avoid becoming stranded without an IA key Guarding against exhaust fumes Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes Take precautions to avoid its dangerous effects WARNING If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes Important ventilating information If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of time open the windows at least 1 inch 2 5 cm or adjust the heating or air conditioning to bring in fresh air ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED An engine block heater warms the engine coolant which aids in starting and allows the heater defroster system to respond quickly If your vehicle is equipped with this system your equipment includes a heater element which is installed in your engine block and a wire harness which allows the user to connect the system to a grounded 120 volt A C electrical 280 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving source The block heater system is most effective when outdoor temperatures reach below 0 F 18 C WARNING Failure to follow engine block heater instructions could result in property damage or physical injury WARNING To reduce the risk of electrical shock do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged cheater adapters Prior to using the engine block heater follow these recommendations for
106. times 5 Turn the ignition back on The horn will chirp one time to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active 6 To enable disable the autounlock feature press the lock control then press the unlock control The horn will chirp once if autounlock was deactivated or twice one short and one long chirp if autounlock was activated 7 Turn the ignition off The horn will chirp once to confirm the procedure is complete 154 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Keyless entry keypad autounlock enable disable procedure 1 Turn the ignition off 2 Close all the doors 3 Enter factory set 5 digit entry code 4 Press and hold the 3 e 4 While holding the 3 e 4 press and release the 7 e 8 While still holding the 3 e 4 press and release the 7 8a second time 5 Release the 3 e 4 The user will receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been disabled or a chirp followed by a honk to indicate the system has been enabled CHILDPROOF DOOR LOCKS e When these locks are set the e rear doors cannot be opened from Cay the inside e The rear doors can be opened G from the outside when the E A childproof door locks are set but the doors are unlocked R i The childproof locks are located on the rear edge of each rear door and must be set separately for each door Setting the lock for one door will not automatically set the lock for both doors
107. to avoid inhaling excess fumes WARNING The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static electricity which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an ungrounded fuel container 392 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Refueling WARNING Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause severe injuries To help avoid injuries to you and others e Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island e Turn off your engine when you are refueling e Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle e Keep sparks flames and smoking materials away from fuel e Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended when refueling your vehicle this is against the law in some places e Keep children away from the fuel pump never let children pump fuel e Do not use personal electronic devices while refueling It can ignite fuel vapors Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build up when filling an ungrounded fuel container e Place approved fuel container on the ground e DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle including the cargo area e Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while filling e DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill position Easy Fuel no cap fuel system Your fuel tank is equipped with an Easy Fuel no cap
108. uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check for and correct any wheel misalignment tire imbalance or mechanical problem involved before tire rotation Note Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire wheel A dissimilar spare tire wheel is defined as a spare tire and or wheel that is different in brand size or appearance from the road tires and wheels If you have a dissimilar spare tire wheel it is intended for temporary use only and should not be used in a tire rotation Note After having your tires rotated inflation pressure must be checked and adjusted to the vehicle requirements INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL Both U S and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U S DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall 251 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Information on P type tires P215 65R15 95H is an example of a tire size load index and speed rating The definitions of these items are listed below Note that the tire size load index and speed rating for your vehicle may be different from this example 1 P Indicates a tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association T amp RA that may be used for service on
109. vehicle is parked for extended periods Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used Power point 110V AC if equipped The 110V AC power point outlet is used for powering electrical devices that require up to 150W Exceeding the 150W limit will cause the power point to cut off the power temporarily to provide overload protection Note The 110V AC power point is equipped with a safety cap and a safety twist tab They both provide AC 110V protection from inserting any object 150W into the power point other than the 110V AC electrical device plug The safety cap should always be in a closed position whenever the power point outlet is not in use The 110V AC power point is located on the back of the center console inside the second row center console on vehicles equipped with that feature 114 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls The power outlet is not designed for the following electric appliances they may not work properly e Cathode ray tube type televisions e Motor loads such as vacuum cleaners electric saws and other electric power tools compressor driven refrigerators etc Measuring devices which process precise data such as medical equipment measuring equipment etc Other appliances requiring an extremely stable power supply microcomputer controlled electric blankets touch sensor lamps etc WARNING Do not keep electrical devices plugged in the po
110. vents The system will automatically provide outside air to reduce window fogging To return to full automatic control press AUTO on the main climate control bezel Fan Speed Press to increase the fan speed and to decrease fan speed Dual Press to activate deactivate separate driver and passenger temperature controls 90 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls Max A C Distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel vents to cool the vehicle This re cooling of the interior air is more economical and efficient Recirculated air may also help reduce undesirable odors from entering the vehicle Press MAX A C again for normal operation CLIMATE Front Zone Rear Zone Auto Rear Control pene e e Je Rear Zone CA Temperature Fan Speed Rear Zone Power Press to activate deactivate the rear climate system Auto Press to activate auto for the rear climate system The system will automatically determine fan speed and airflow direction in order to reach and maintain the desired temperature Rear Zone Press to activate the touchscreen controls for the rear climate system Rear Control Press to allow the rear passengers to control the rear climate system using the rear mounted controls Temperature Press up down to increase decrease the rear climate temperature Fan Speed Press to decrease increase the fan speed VOICE COMMANDS IN CLIM
111. with and without a trailer section 256 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to O the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale
112. 0 Ibs 1400 750 5 x 150 650 Ib In metric units 635 340 5 x 68 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity e Another example for your vehicle with 1 400 lb 635 kg of cargo and luggage capacity You decide to go golfing Is there enough load capacity to carry you 4 of your friends and all the golf bags You and four friends average 220 lb 99 kg each and the golf bags weigh approximately 30 Ib 13 5 kg each The calculation would be 1 400 5 x 220 5 x 30 1 400 1 100 150 150 Ib Yes you have enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and your golf bags In metric units the calculation would be 635 kg 5 x 99 kg 5 x 13 5 kg 635 495 67 5 72 5 kg e A final example for your vehicle with 1 400 Ib 635 kg of cargo and luggage capacity You and one of your friends decide to pick up cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio you have been planning for the past 2 years Measuring th
113. 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Using roadside assistance Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your wallet for quick reference In the United States this card is found in the Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment In Canada the card is found in the Warranty Guide in the glove compartment U S Ford Mercury and Lincoln vehicle customers who require Roadside Assistance call 1 800 241 3673 Canadian customers who require roadside assistance call 1 800 665 2006 If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself Ford Motor Company will reimburse a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest dealership within 35 miles 56 km To obtain reimbursement information U S Ford Mercury and Lincoln vehicle customers call 1 800 241 3673 Customers will be asked to submit their original receipts Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information call 1 800 665 2006 or visit our website at www ford ca HAZARD FLASHER CONTROL The hazard flasher control is located on the instrument panel by the radio The hazard flashers will operate when the ignition is in any position or if the key is not in the ignition Press the flasher control and all front and rear direction signals will flash Press the flasher control again to turn them off Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists Note W
114. 37 A 371 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS To help you service your vehicle we provide scheduled maintenance information which makes tracking routine service easy If your vehicle requires professional service your authorized dealer can provide the necessary parts and service Check your Warranty Guide to find out which parts and services are covered Use only recommended fuels lubricants fluids and service parts conforming to specifications Motorcraft parts are designed and built to provide the best performance in your vehicle PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE e Do not work on a hot engine e Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts e Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed space unless you are sure you have enough ventilation e Keep all open flames and other burning material such as cigarettes away from the battery and all fuel related parts Working with the engine off 1 Set the parking brake and shift to P Park 2 Turn off the engine 3 Block the wheels Working with the engine on 1 Set the parking brake and shift to P Park 2 Block the wheels WARNING To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and or personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running 372 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing U
115. 4 Anti lock brake system see parking 283 Brakes srmn mesai 282 283 shiftinterlock 292 Anti theft system 165 167 USS RE ARE MR ctes 105 armingthesystem 167 disarming a triggered C SVSUGIUL 5 arsada ine Baek alien 168 triggering ccsscstsecsssscteecsssescazesners 169 Capacities for refilling fluids 414 Audio system see Radio 32 Cargo area shade 142 448 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cargo Neb saaat alal 142 A DRAM Me 44 Cell phone use 8 Changing a tire 333 Childsafetyseats 226 in front Seat 227 inrearseat 221 LATCH sala Aleme ai ae 230 recommendations 224 tether anchorage hardware 233 Child safety seats booster lara K e A e 236 Cleaning your vehicle engine compartment 364 instrument panel 367 INUETIOL ocres 368 plastic parts 366 WES N ME asteni 363 MAK NE airoso lesiye 364 ene e su e ei N a 364 wiperblades 366 Climate control see Air conditioning or Heating 88 Collision Warning System 301 Console overhead 110 111 Controls POWET iSCab visa sa eaa 173 steerin
116. 47 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 2 Select the Jukebox tab on the touchscreen You can then select from the following options Alanis Morissette Hand In My Pocket Jagged Littie Pill Scan Press for a brief sampling of the currently selected CD playlist genre etc Press again to disengage Repeat Press to repeat the current CD playlist etc Press again to disengage Shuffle Press to shuffle all the tracks on the current CD playlist etc in random order Press again to disengage Music library Press to access all of your saved music You can choose to view play the material in the following ways e Play all tracks Select to play all tracks saved in the jukebox e Playlist Select to play your own playlist e Play genre Select to have the system play only music from a specific genre e Play artist Select to have the system play only music by a specific artist e Play album Select to have the system play only music from a specific album Options Select to view your other options e Edit Playlists Select to edit your playlists e Edit Music Library Contents Select to make changes to the content in your music library e Update Album Information from CD Database Select to update the residing album information from the Gracenote database if a recent software update was performed e Hard Disk Drive Information Select to access the system s hard
117. 6 ce e ME KON 369 climate control 88 176 188 easy access easyout feature 178 front seats 175 187 e GR e 187 memory Seat 159 177 second row seats 182 185 third row seats 185 188 189 Second row power fold seat 185 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Index SecuriCode keyless entry SYSTEM aore ene e 163 SecuriLock passive anti theft DIE E E sim lerini 165 Servicing your vehicle 372 Settingtheclock 40 SOS Post Crash Alert 221 Sound features 53 Spare tire see Changing the Ke E e RA EENE 336 Spark plugs specifications 413 417 Specification chart lubricants 414 Speedcontrol 120 Starting your vehicle 276 278 jump starting oe 350 push button start system 278 Steering wheel controls 131 L L ge A anA 109 SYNGO esse asi saman si 87 System limitations 58 T Temporary mobility kit 340 Third row power fold seat 190 Tilt steering wheel 109 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS Tires Wheels and Loading 257 TIKES PE 242 248 333 alignment serin 250 LZ e e 246 CHANGING emmi mii 333 336 453 Index checking the pressure 246 Turn SIGNAL
118. 6084 FAX 971 4 3327299 Email menacac ford com www me ford com If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate to any of the above locations register your vehicle identification number VIN and new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations If you are in another foreign country contact the nearest authorized dealer If the authorized dealer employees cannot help you they can direct you to the nearest Ford affiliate office Customers in the U S should call 1 800 392 3673 360 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER S LITERATURE To order the publications in this portfolio contact Helm Incorporated at HELM INCORPORATED P O Box 07150 Detroit Michigan 48207 Or to order a free publication catalog call toll free 1 800 782 4356 Monday Friday 8 00 a m 6 00 p m EST Helm Incorporated can also be reached by their website www helminc com items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card check or money order Obtaining a French Owner s Guide French Owner s Guides can be obtained from your authorized dealer or by contacting Helm Incorporated using the contact information listed previously in this section REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS U S ONLY If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
119. 7 OE EL tes ote pi 395 running out offuel 349 396 safety information relating to automotive fuels 391 FUSES ra de dal se 325 G Garage door opener 134 Gas cap see Fuel cap 393 Gas mileage see Fuel economy 397 GUP OS eek armalar ee 17 H Hazard flashers 324 Headlamps saskin sence 95 AMINE RR TOE RE 101 autolamp system 96 bulb specifications 106 daytime running lights 100 flashtopass 100 high beam sy nz 97 replacing bulbs 106 tumingonandoff 95 Heating heating and air conditioning SVSUGIM semen sin danis sea sisi 88 Home screen 35 Homelink wireless control SYS G M sile ir saman 134 HOO s zde izlanda alada anl 373 I TEMON say lar damn 276 417 Illuminated visor mirror 110 Infant seats see Safety seats 226 Inspection maintenance I M DOS UNG See ime Mala horas 402 Instrument panel CLEANING ie li 367 CSTORE sereni ik kana lades 12 lighting up panel and 33 Lis 0 GE EE SE A GE Ee 101 Intelligent AccessKey 144 Intelligent Access with push button start 157 J Le e Ee na 333 POSIMONING saniser selam 333 S OTMBGE se isssccacsavacteeseancresueanenerany 333 Jukeboxfeatures
120. A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires If your vehicle seems to pull to one side when you re driving the wheels may be out of alignment Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment periodically Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer Front wheel drive FWD vehicles and those with an independent rear suspension if equipped may require alignment of all four wheels The tires should also be balanced periodically An unbalanced tire and wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear Tire rotation Rotating your tires at the recommended interval as indicated in the Scheduled Maintenance Guide chapter will help your tires wear more evenly providing better tire performance and longer tire life 250 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading e Front wheel drive FWD vehicles FRR AR front tires at top of diagram aN ASSN eI Sisi eI PRISNI 3 PRISNI ssh AAA RAX gt WANA LITTTTT e Rear wheel drive RWD g vehicles Four wheel drive 4WD All wheel drive AWD N vehicles front tires at top of diagram AWW SSS KER a hah AAW SVAN SAS AKA y N S Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires Note If your tires show
121. ATE MODE Please refer to the Voice commands in climate mode section of the Navigation system supplement for more information on using voice commands with the climate control system Operating tips e To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather place the air flow selector in the 47 position e To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle do not drive with the system off or with recirculated air engaged e Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the airflow to the back seats 91 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls e Remove any snow ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield e To improve the A C cool down drive with the windows slightly open for 2 3 minutes after starting the vehicle or until the vehicle has aired out e A small amount of air may be felt from the floor vent regardless of the air distribution setting that is selected In extremely cold temperatures to maximize overall heater performance it is suggested to not operate the auxiliary system if equipped until the engine temperature gauge crosses into the normal operating range For maximum cooling performance MAX A C 1 Select MAX A C The system will default to single zone operation and set the temperature to 60 F 16 C 2 AIC C amp D and V will be selected 3 Fan speed will be increased to the highest speed but can be adjusted as
122. After idling for a few seconds release the parking brake apply the brake shift into gear and drive Note If the engine does not start on the first try turn the vehicle to the off position wait 10 seconds and try Step 1 again If the engine still fails to start press the accelerator to the floor and try Step 1 again keeping the accelerator on the floor until the engine begins to accelerate above cranking speeds this will allow the engine to crank with the fuel shut off in case the engine is flooded with fuel 278 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving There may be areas inside your vehicle where the IA key is not detected If the message NO KEY DETECTED appears on your message center when you press the START STOP button it may be necessary to move your IA key to another area within the vehicle The IA key may not be detected near the roof between the driver or passenger sun visor and the roof or in the overhead console area or in the third row seat cup holder and armrest area or in the extreme corners of the rear package tray near your audio speakers It is not recommended that you stow the IA key in these locations If you move the IA key to a location where it has been detected before and you still see the NO KEY DETECTED message your IA key s battery may be low or you may be in an area with excessive radio frequency interference If this occurs you can use the back up method to start your vehicle s
123. BLIS and or the CTA is turned off the systems will automatically turn back on at the next ignition key cycle When either the BLIS and or the CTA is turned off the message center displays BLIND SPOT SYS OFF and or CTA SYSTEM OFF When the BLIS and or the CTA system is off the driver will not receive alerts Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter Note If the system cannot be turned off refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information The BLIS and or the CTA can be disabled permanently even after an ignition key cycle This must be done by your authorized dealer Note Once either of the systems are disabled enabling must also be performed at the dealership When disabled the message center will display BLIND SPOT DISABLED and or CTA DISABLED BLIS and or CTA fault operation If the BLIS and or CTA senses a fault on either the left or right sensor the BLIS alert indicator will go on and remain on and the message center will display BLIND SPOT SYSTEM FAULT or CROSS TRAFFIC SYSTEM FAULT For faults that may cause the associated left or right alert indicator not to illuminate only the message center faults will occur Blocked sensor An extreme build up of materials on the quarter panel fascias such as mud or snow can cause degraded performance of the BLIS Also heavy rain can cause the same effect The BLIS can detect this degraded performance and issue a blocked warning t
124. CONFIRM CLEAR is displayed 4 Press and hold the RESET button for two seconds until ALL MYKEYS CLEARED is displayed Check MyKey system status The vehicle system check will provide the status of the following MyKey parameters e MYKEY MILES This odometer only tracks mileage when a MyKey is used If mileage does not accumulate as expected then the MyKey is not being used by the intended user The only way to reset this odometer to zero is by disabling MyKey If this odometer is lower than the last time you checked then the MyKey system has been recently cleared e MYKEY S PROGRAMMED Indicates how many MyKeys are programmed to the vehicle Can be used to detect deletion of a MyKey e ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED Indicates how many admin keys are programmed to the vehicle Can be used to detect if an additional spare key has been programmed to the vehicle Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter for MyKey system warnings displays Using MyKey with remote start systems MyKey is not compatible with non Ford approved aftermarket remote start systems If you choose to install a remote start system please see your authorized dealer for a Ford approved remote start system Vehicles equipped with traditional keys When using a Ford approved remote start system the default settings will recognize the remote start system as an additional admin key with its associated privileges
125. Cluster WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES QOO0000000000 OOOOO000000000 Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may become serious enough to cause extensive repairs A warning light may illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle s functions Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the bulbs work If any light remains on after starting the vehicle refer to the respective system warning light for additional information Note Some warning lights are reconfigurable telltale RTT indicator lights and will illuminate in _ the message center These lights UU mil function the same as the other warning lights Charging system RTT Illuminates when the battery is not charging properly If it stays on while the engine is running there may be a malfunction with the charging system Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible This indicates a problem with the electrical system or a related component Engine oil pressure RTT Illuminates when the oil pressure Tw falls below the normal range refer to Engine oil in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter 12 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Engine coolant temperature RTT Illuminates when the engine E coolant temperature is high Stop the vehicle as soon as possible switch off the engine and let coo
126. Collision warning system limitations Due to the nature of radar technology there may be certain instances where vehicles will not provide a collision warning These include e Stationary or slow moving vehicles below 6 mph 10 km h e Pedestrians or objects in the roadway e Oncoming vehicles in the same lane e Severe weather conditions see also blocked sensor section e Debris build up on the grille near the headlamps see block sensor section e Small distance to vehicle ahead e Steering wheel and pedal movements are large very active driving style e High interior temperatures which may deactivate the illumination or the warning lamps until the interior temperature reduces audible warning will alert the driver In addition sun load and sunglasses may reduce the visibility of the warning lamps Therefore it is recommended to keep the audible warning on WARNING The collision warning system s brake support can only help reduce the speed at which a collision occurs if the driver applies the vehicle s brakes The brake pedal must be pressed just like for any typical braking situation Blocked sensor If a message regarding a blocked sensor is displayed the radar signals from the sensor located behind a fascia cover near the driver side of the lower grille have been obstructed When the radar signals are obstructed a vehicle ahead cannot be detected and the collision warning system will not function
127. Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem increases the chance of engine damage Take your vehicle to a service facility as soon as possible FUEL FILTER Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel tank Regular maintenance or replacement is not needed WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS mN Important safety precautions WARNING Do not overfill the fuel tank The pressure in an overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire WARNING The fuel system may be under pressure If you hear a hissing sound near the fuel filler door Easy Fuel no cap fuel system do not refuel until the sound stops Otherwise fuel may spray out which could cause serious personal injury WARNING Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or mishandled WARNING Gasoline may contain benzene which is a cancer causing agent 391 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel e Extinguish all smoking materials and any open flames before refueling your vehicle e Always turn off the vehicle before refueling e Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if swallowed can cause death or permanent injury If fuel is swallowed call a physician immediately even if no symptoms are immedi
128. ENDED SERVICE PLANS CANADA ONLY You can get more protection for your vehicle by purchasing a Ford Extended Service Plan ESP Ford ESP is the only service contract backed by Ford Motor Company Depending on the plan you purchase Ford ESP provides benefits such as e Rental reimbursement e Coverage for certain maintenance and wear items e Protection against repair costs after your New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage expires e Roadside Assistance benefits You may purchase Ford ESP from any participating Ford Motor Company dealership There are several Ford ESP plans available in various time distance and deductible combinations Each plan is tailored to fit your own driving needs including reimbursement for towing and rental When you purchase Ford ESP you receive peace of mind protection throughout Canada and the United States provided by a network of Ford Motor Company dealers For more information visit your local Ford of Canada dealer or www ford ca to find the Ford Extended Service Plan that is right for you NOTE Repairs performed outside of Canada and the United States are not eligible for Ford ESP coverage This information is subject to change 426 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide GENERAL MAINTENANCE INFORMATION Why maintain your vehicle This guide describes the scheduled maintenance required for your vehicle Carefully following this schedule helps prot
129. ERRIDE if equipped Displayed when the accelerator pedal is being pressed while ACC is active CRUISE NOT AVAILABLE if equipped Displayed when a system malfunction is preventing ACC from engaging CRUISE MALFUNCTION if equipped Displayed when a radar malfunction is preventing the ACC from engaging CRUISE NOT AVAILABLE SENSOR BLOCKED SEE MANUAL if equipped Displayed when the radar is blocked because of poor radar visibility due to bad weather or ice mud water in front of radar Driver can typically clean the sensor to resolve 26 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster COLLISION WARN MALFUNCTION if equipped Displayed when there is a system malfunction with the collision warning system The system will be disabled COLLISION WARN NOT AVAILABLE if equipped Displayed when there is a system malfunction with the collision warning system The system will be disabled COLLISION WARN NOT AVAILABLE SENSOR BLOCKED SEE MANUAL if equipped Displayed when the collision warning system radar is blocked because of poor radar visibility due to bad weather or ice mud water in front of the radar Driver can typically clean the sensor to resolve PRESS BRAKE TO START if equipped Displayed when the start stop button is pressed without the brake pedal being applied This is a reminder that the brake pedal must be applied when the start stop button is pressed in order to s
130. Gracenote Data except in a Tag associated with a music file to any third party YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT GRACENOTE DATA THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN You agree that your non exclusive licenses to use the Gracenote Content Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions If your licenses terminate you agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Content Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and Gracenote Servers Gracenote 56 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems respectively reserve all rights in Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and the Gracenote Servers and Gracenote Content including all ownership rights Under no circumstances will either Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information that you provide including any copyrighted material or music file information You agree that Gracenote may enforce its respective rights collectively or separately under this agreement against you directly in each company s own name Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical purposes The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow Gracenote to count queries without knowing anything about who you are For more information see the web page at www gracenote com for the Gracenote Privacy Po
131. HomeLink button note Step 2 in the Programming section while you press and release every two seconds cycle your hand held transmitter until the frequency signal has been accepted by the HomeLink The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink accepts the radio frequency signal e Proceed with Step 3 in the Programming section Operating the HomeLink Wireless Control System To operate simply press and release the appropriate HomeLink button A Activation will now occur for the trained product garage door gate operator security system entry door lock or home or office lighting etc For convenience the hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time In the event that there are still programming difficulties contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 136 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Erasing HomeLink buttons To erase the three programmed buttons individual buttons cannot ae be erased e Press and hold the two outer O O HomeLink buttons until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Release both buttons Do not hold for longer that 30 seconds V HomeLink is now in the train or learning mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with Step 1 in the Programming section Reprogramming a single HomeLink button To program a device to HomeLink u
132. How to disengage the automatic locking mode Disconnect the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode WARNING After any vehicle collision the safety belt system at all passenger seating positions must be checked by an authorized dealer to verify that the automatic locking retractor feature for child seats is still functioning properly In addition all safety belts should be checked for proper function 199 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE REPLACED if the safety belt assembly automatic locking retractor feature or any other safety belt function is not operating properly when checked by an authorized dealer Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions Energy management feature front outboard e This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy management feature at the front seats to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on collision e The energy management feature has a retractor assembly that is designed to extend the safety belt webbing in a controlled manner This helps reduce the belt force acting on the user s chest WARNING Failure to inspect and replace if necessary the belt and retractor assembly after an ac
133. If the vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking the vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer Refer to Warning lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter for information on the brake system warning light BRAKE Four wheel anti lock brake system ABS Your vehicle is equipped with an anti lock braking system ABS This system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by keeping the brakes from locking Noise from the ABS pump motor and brake pedal pulsation may be observed during ABS braking and the brake pedal may suddenly travel a little farther as soon as ABS braking is done and normal brake operation resumes These are normal characteristics of the ABS and should be no reason for concern 282 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Using ABS When hard braking is required apply continuous force on the brake pedal Do not pump the brake pedal since this will reduce the effectiveness of the ABS and will increase your vehicle s stopping distance The ABS will be activated immediately allowing you to retain steering control during hard braking and on slippery surfaces However the ABS does not decrease stopping distance Brake assist The brake assist system provides full braking force during panic braking situations It detects a rapid application of the brake pedal and uses the ABS system to achieve maximum braking pressure
134. Inflating your tires in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT Displayed when the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is malfunctioning If the warning stays on or continues to come on have the system inspected by your authorized dealer TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT Displayed when a tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning or your spare tire is in use For more information on how the system operates under these conditions refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible POWER STEERING ASSIST FAULT The power steering system has disabled power steering assist due to a system error service is required SERVICE POWER STEERING The power steering system has detected a condition that requires service SERVICE POWER STEERING NOW The power steering system has detected a condition that requires service immediately REMOVE OBJECTS NEAR PASS SEAT Displayed when objects are by the passenger seat After the objects are moved away from the seat if the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible 25 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster AWD OFF if equipped Displayed when the AWD system has been automatically disabled to protect itself This is caused by operating the veh
135. LY California Civil Code Section 1793 2 d requires that if a manufacturer or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the vehicle s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of attempts the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or payable by the consumer less a reasonable allowance for consumer use The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund or replacement vehicle California Civil Code Section 1793 22 b presumes that the manufacturer has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its applicable express warranties if within the first 18 months of ownership of a new vehicle or the first 18 000 miles 29 000 km whichever occurs first 1 Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non conformity likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR 2 Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity a defect or condition that substantially impairs the use value or safety of the vehicle OR 3 The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of more than 30 calendar days not necessarily all at one time In the case of 1 or 2 above the consumer must also notify the manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the following address Ford Motor
136. M testing Some state provincial and local governments may have Inspection Maintenance I M programs to inspect the emission control equipment on your vehicle Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration Your vehicle may not pass the I M test if the service engine soon indicator is on or not working properly bulb is burned out or if the OBD II system has determined that some of the emission control systems have not been properly checked In this case the vehicle is considered not ready for I M testing If the service engine soon C indicator is on or the bulb does not work the vehicle may need to be serviced Refer to On board diagnostics OBD II in this chapter If the vehicle s engine or transmission has just been serviced or the battery has recently run down or been replaced the OBD II system may indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I M testing To determine if the vehicle is ready for I M testing turn the ignition key to the on position for 15 seconds without cranking the engine If the service engine soon indicator blinks eight times it means that the vehicle is not ready for I M testing if the service engine soon O indicator stays on solid it means that the vehicle is ready for I M testing 402 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications The OBD II system is designed to check the emission control system during normal drivi
137. MEDIA button to access radio or satellite radio media sources while in dual play mode Once the desired media source selection appears on the screen press MENU SEL on the DVD headrest A system when and then press gq PP to step forward or back through any saved presets When accessing SYNC in dual play mode press MENU SEL on DVD headrest monitor A when SYNC appears on the screen then press A v to scroll through SYNC media options of USB Bluetooth Line in auxiliary audio mode and Exit Supported USB devices To help ensure compatibility the DVD system has been tested with most brands of flash thumb devices and most common personal audio players Setup menu options To access the set up menu first select the desired headrest monitor system by pressing MON A or MON B Then press SETUP on the remote control Note This is the only way to gain access to the Setup menu options You cannot access from the monitor headrest controls Note On any of the following screens press d PP to access the previous next menu level 79 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Aspect ratio TV display type This screen allows you to select the viewing size and shape of the video ae S displayed on the LCD screen This is T disc dependent feature MEME DEN To access 1 Press SETUP on the remote to access the menu options 2 Press lt j b to highlight the monito
138. MP3 i the MP3 audio disc screen will display and allow you to access the folders and files The folder track and elapsed time will appear in the status bar The screen will list the title album and file name Press the arrow controls on the headrest DVD system to scroll through the folders When the desired folder is highlighted press SEL to confirm the selection 2 If there is already a disc in the system press the power button on the DVD system and then press Play to begin to play the disc To play an auxiliary source through the DVD system The DVD system can be used to connect and play auxiliary electronic devices game systems personal camcorders video cassette recorders etc and to connect to and access certain files through your USB port 68 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 1 On the front of each monitor located behind the left trim cover panel is the headphone input jack 5 This headphone will listen to the media selected through that monitor When you need to make CO remy C any adjustments to the media volume etc ensure that the monitor A source is highlighted USB port 4 To access ensure that the monitor is already selected as the media source Monitor A or Monitor B Then plug in your flash thumb drive and it will automatically begin to play The system will try to play whatever file it comes to first slideshow of picture
139. Maintenance Guide EXCEPTIONS In addition there are several exceptions to the Normal Schedule They are listed below Normal vehicle axle maintenance CA Rear axles and power take off PTO units containing synthetic lubricant and light duty trucks equipped with Ford design axles are lubricated for life These lubricants are not to be checked or changed unless a leak is suspected service is re quired or the axle assembly has been submerged in water The axle and PTO lubricant should be changed anytime the axle and PTO have been submerged in water During extended trailer tow operation above 70 F 21 C ambient and wide open throttle for extended periods above 45 mph 72 km h non synthetic rear axle lubricants should be replaced every 3 000 miles 4 800 km or three months whichever occurs first The 3 000 mile 4 800 km lubricant change interval may be waived if the axle was filled with 75W140 synthetic gear lubricant meeting Ford specification WSL M2C192 A part number F1TZ 19580 B or equivalent Add friction modifier XL 3 EST M2C118 A or equivalent for complete refill of Traction Lok rear axles refer to Maintenance product and specifications in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for details The axle lubricant should be changed anytime an axle has been submerged in water Police Taxi Livery vehicle axle maintenance Replace rear axle lubricant every 100 000 miles 160 000 km Rear axle lubricant change may
140. NG The dipstick cap and surrounding components may be hot gloves are recommended 1 Drive the vehicle 20 miles 80 km or until it reaches normal operating temperature 2 Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake 3 With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear ranges Allow a minimum of 10 seconds for each gear to engage 4 Latch the gearshift lever in P Park and leave the engine running 404 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 5 Remove the dipstick wiping it clean with a clean dry lint free rag If necessary refer to Identifying components in the engine compartment in this chapter for the location of the dipstick For vehicles with the EcoBoost engine move the air filter assembly aside to access the transmission dipstick WARNING Use gloves when moving the air filter assembly components will be hot For vehicles equipped with the EcoBoost engine do the following A Shut the engine off B Clean the area around the clamp that connects the air filter assembly to the rubber hose 1 405 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications C Remove the bolt cover if equipped D Remove two bolts that attach the air filter assembly to the front of the vehicle
141. Power distribution box 10 Windshield washer fluid reservoir 6 Air filter assembly 375 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low In very cold weather do not fill the reservoir completely Only use a washer fluid that meets Ford specifications Do not use any special washer fluid such as windshield water repellent type fluid or bug wash They may cause squeaking chatter noise streaking and smearing Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the use of methanol a common windshield washer antifreeze additive Washer fluids containing non methanol antifreeze agents should be used only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the vehicle s paint finish wiper blades or washer system WARNING If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 40 F 5 C use washer fluid with antifreeze protection Failure to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident Checking and adding washer fluid for the liftgate Washer fluid for the liftgate is supplied by the same reservoir as the windshield 376 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications
142. SA fus 143 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security KEYS Your vehicle is equipped with two intelligent access keys which operate the power locks and the remote entry system The IA key must be inside the vehicle in order to activate the push button start system The IA key also contains a removable mechanical key blade that can be used to unlock the driver door To release the mechanical key blade press the release button on the back of the transmitter and slide the blade out Your IA keys are programmed to your vehicle You cannot enter or start your vehicle with an unprogrammed key If you lose one or both of your IA keys replacements are available from your authorized dealer For more information on programming replacement IA keys refer to the SecuriLock passive anti theft system section in this chapter Note Your vehicle s TA backup keys were issued with a security tag that provides important vehicle key cut ML information It is recommended that you keep the tag in a safe place for future reference MYKEYTM The MyKey M feature allows you to program a restricted driving mode to promote good driving habits All but one of the keys programmed to the vehicle can be activated as a MyKey The key will remain restricted until MyKey is disabled Any remaining keys are referred to as an 144 2011 MKT mkt Owners Gui
143. SA fus Maintenance and Specifications OPENING THE HOOD 1 Inside the vehicle pull the hood release handle located at the bottom of the instrument panel near the steering column A LI A oe 2 Go to the front of the vehicle and release the auxiliary latch using the ze handle that is located under the front passenger side of the hood 3 Lift the hood until the lift cylinders hold it open 373 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 5L V6 EcoBoost engine Engine coolant reservoir Brake fluid reservoir Battery Power distribution box Air filter assembly Automatic transmission fluid dipstick out of view Engine oil dipstick Engine oil filler cap O a1 ES OE W MK Windshield washer fluid reservoir 374 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Engine shield J J Some vehicles may be equipped with an aero shield under the engine This shield needs to be removed for service including oil and filter changes It is secured with U four quick release fasteners Pa iTi fo 3 7L V6 engine t 1 Power steering fluid reservoir 7 Automatic transmission fluid 2 Engine coolant reservoir dipstick 3 Brake fluid reservoir 8 Engine oil dipstick 4 Battery 9 Engine oil filler cap 5
144. TY RESTRAINTS Personal Safety System The Personal Safety System provides an improved overall level of frontal crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help further reduce the risk of airbag related injuries The system is able to analyze different occupant conditions and crash severity before activating the appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of occupants in a variety of frontal crash situations Your vehicle s Personal Safety System consists of e Driver and passenger dual stage airbag supplemental restraints e Front outboard safety belts with pretensioners energy management retractors first row only and safety belt usage sensors e Driver s seat position sensor e Front passenger sensing system e Passenger airbag off or pass airbag off indicator lamp e Front crash severity sensor e Restraints Control Module RCM with impact and safing sensors e Restraint system warning light and back up tone 192 2011 MKT mki Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints e The electrical wiring for the airbags crash sensor s safety belt pretensioners front safety belt usage sensors driver seat position sensor front passenger sensing system and indicator lights How does the Personal Safety System work The Personal Safety System can adapt the deployment strategy of your vehicle s safety devices according to crash severity and occupant con
145. Table of Contents Introduction 4 Instrument Cluster 12 Warning lights and chimes 12 Gauges 17 Message center 18 Entertainment Systems 32 Setting the clock 40 AM FM 41 CD 44 Jukebox features 46 Auxiliary input jack Line in 59 USB port 61 Satellite radio 64 Family entertainment system 67 Navigation system 87 SYNC 87 Climate Controls 88 Navigation system based climate control 88 Rear window defroster 94 Lights 95 Headlamps 95 Turn signal control 103 Bulb replacement 105 Driver Controls 108 Windshield wiper washer control 108 Steering wheel adjustment 109 Power windows 115 Mirrors 118 Speed control 120 Adaptive cruise control 122 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Table of Contents Locks and Security 144 Locks 151 Anti theft system 165 Seating and Safety Restraints 170 Seating 170 Safety restraints 192 Airbags 207 Child restraints 222 Tires Wheels and Loading 240 Tire information 242 Tire inflation 244 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS 257 Vehicle loading 263 Trailer towing 270 Recreational towing 275 Driving 276 Starting 276 Brakes 282 AdvanceTrac 284 Transmission operation 293 Reverse sensing system 296 Rear view camera system 299 All wheel drive 316 Roadside Emergencies 323 Getting roadside assistance 323 Hazard flasher control 324 Fuel pump shut off 324 Fuses and relays 325 Changing tires 333 Temporary mobility kit 340 Wheel lug nut torque 349 Jump starting 350 Wrecker
146. The power liftgate system is equipped with an obstacle detection feature If the power liftgate is closing the system will reverse to full open when it detects an obstacle A chime will sound three times when an obstacle is detected as the liftgate begins to reopen Once the obstacle is removed the liftgate can be closed under power If the power liftgate is opening the system will stop and a chime will sound three times when an obstacle is detected Once the obstacle is removed the liftgate can again be operated normally Resetting the power liftgate The power liftgate may not operate properly and may need to be reset if any of these conditions occur e alow voltage or dead battery e disconnected battery e the liftgate is manually closed and left ajar unlatched To reset the power liftgate 1 Disconnect the battery for 20 seconds then reconnect the battery 2 Manually close and fully latch the liftgate 3 Power open the liftgate by using the transmitter or the instrument panel control button Note If the power liftgate system is turned off in the message center the system cannot be activated with the outside release handle or rear cargo area control button The system will need to be turned on to resume operation with the outside release handle or rear cargo area control button The power liftgate is still operational through the use of the transmitter and instrument panel button when the power liftgate is turned off
147. Use to adjust the brightness of the instrument panel and all applicable switches in the vehicle during headlamp and parking lamp E operation E c Tap the top of the switch to the first F detent to brighten all interior lighted T components Tap the bottom of the switch to the first detent to dim all interior lighted components Press and hold the switch until the desired lighting level is reached Press and hold the top of the switch to the second detent to activate the interior courtesy lights The lights will remain on until bottom of the switch is pressed and held at the second detent Note If the battery is disconnected discharged or a new battery is installed the dimmer switch requires re calibration Press the dimmer switch from the full dim position to the full on position to reset This will ensure that your displays are visible under all lighting conditions AIMING THE HEADLAMPS The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant If your vehicle has been in an accident the alignment of your headlamps should be checked by your authorized dealer Vertical aim adjustment 1 Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface approximately 25 feet 7 6 meters away 101 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights e 1 8 feet 2 4 meters e 2 Center height of lamp to ground e 3 25 feet 7 6 meters e 4 Horizontal reference line
148. VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace Scheduled Maintenance Guide 439 Scheduled Maintenance Guide SPECIAL OPERATING CONDITIONS If you operate your Ford Lincoln Mercury vehicle primarily in one of the more demanding Special Operating Conditions listed below you will need to have some items maintained more frequently If you only occasionally operate your vehicle under these conditions it is not necessary to perform the additional maintenance For specific recommendations see your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealership service advisor or technician Towing a trailer or using a camper or car top carrier As required Change engine oil and replace oil filter as indicated by message center and perform services as listed in the Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart Inspect frequently service as See axle maintenance items under Exceptions required Every 30 000 miles 48 000 km Change automatic transmission fluid not required on 6R80 transmission Every 60 000 miles 96 000 km Change manual transmission fluid Perform the services noted in the preceding table at the specified time mileage km period either within 3 000 miles 5 000 km of the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message appearing in the message center or when the time mileage km reading indicates service is due Example 1 The OIL CHANGE
149. aches 5 mph 8 km h only if the rear camera delay feature is on or until any navigation radio button is pressed Note The default setting for the rear camera delay is off Press the Settings button found on the navigation screen to set the rear camera delay feature to on or off 299 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving When towing the camera system will only see what is being towed behind the vehicle this might not provide adequate coverage as it usually provides in normal operation and some objects might not be seen The camera lens for the camera is located on the liftgate Keep the lens clean so the video image remains clear and undistorted Clean the lens with a soft lint free cloth and non abrasive cleaner Note If the camera system image is not clear or seems distorted it may be covered with water droplets snow mud or any other substance If this occurs clean the camera lens before using the camera system WARNING The camera system is a reverse aid supplement device that still requires the driver to use it in conjunction with the rearview mirror and the side mirrors for maximum coverage WARNING Objects that are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper might not be seen on the screen due to the limited coverage of the camera system A WARNING Backup as slow as possible since higher speeds might limit your reaction time to stop the vehicle A WARNING Do not use the
150. adaptive headlamps 1 e With adaptive headlamps 2 Note The system has a power up Bary movement check feature When the vehicle is started the lamps track MO left to right then back to center to alert the driver that the system is working properly There is a delay of two to five seconds before the adaptive headlamp system will operate when the vehicle is driven as the system is inactive below 3 mph 5 km h 95 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights Autolamp control The autolamp system provides light sensitive automatic on off control of the exterior lights normally controlled by the headlamp control e To turn autolamps on rotate the control clockwise to w e To turn autolamps off rotate the control counterclockwise to The autolamp system also keeps the lights on for a predetermined amount of time after the ignition switch is turned to off You can change the amount of time the lamps stay on by using the programming procedure that follows Note If the vehicle is equipped with autolamps it will have the headlamps on with windshield wipers feature If the windshield wipers are turned on for a brief period of time the exterior lamps will turn on with the headlamp control in the Autolamp position Autolamps programmable exit delay Programmable exit delay allows the length of the autolamp exit delay to be changed To program the auto lamp exit time delay 1
151. age is English Angle mark This feature allows you to select m o gt EZ from different viewing angles that General Setup Page may be found on the disc This is a a yama a mas disc dependent feature If the DVD RS WN 42 does not have this capability it will a not be available italano Espafiol Portugues Note This is a disc dependent feature To access Bol 85 Icime 1 Press SETUP on the remote to access the menu options 2 Press 4 b to highlight the monitor icon A disc will appear beneath the icon signifying it is the current selection 3 Press vy to select and enter the TV display menu 4 When Angle Mark is highlighted press gt to access the menu 5 Press A IV to select from all available angles 6 When the desired language is highlighted press ENTER on the remote to confirm the selection 81 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Speaker setup This screen allows you to adjust the de D audio balance for your speakers To gt Speaker Batup Page ACCESS OKT inl bs a MALAI Stereo 1 Press SETUP on the remote to access the menu options 2 Press lt b to highlight the speaker icon A disc will appear beneath the icon signifying it is the current selection 3 Press v to select and enter the Speaker setup menu 4 When Downmix is highlighted press B gt to access the menu 5 Press A IV to select from left right and stereo 6
152. age is displayed Your oil change service interval can be up to one year or 10 000 miles 16 000 km Reset your Intelligent Oil Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter change refer to the Instrument Cluster chapter If your message center is prematurely reset or becomes inoperative you should perform the oil change interval at six months or 5 000 miles 8 000 km from your last oil change 433 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide Jaydeypo LAJSNA juauMnjsuy IJ 0 Jofor a8uey Jay PUL TO IMFU Y Toe yy IOWUOP IT TO USU MOA yosoy 197199 V8essour Jaysnjo JUSUMAsUT IY Aq payeorpuT se pojetdurod oq PMOS STEALOJUI 9014195 OBULY TOs o fef paddmbe Jt Jaq ave urqeo yoedsuy BER SBULNJ 952913 y m p ddmb Jr oyeollanj syurof q pue YYEUYSOALIP spud po o uotsuadsns squtof reg 93eYUT 3UL1991S 799dSUJ p ddmb Ji sjooq 7Jeys J1ey 199dsuJ spors yeay pue woysfs ysnvyxe yoodsuy pue Y13U91 S 10J weaisks Suood sugu ayelq Sued pue sosoy SBUTUTJ ayerq SUMIP S10701 saoys sped oye1g joodsuy syugug mba IO 1ojeop yNsuod yousdip e yy p ddmb JD ede PING UOIsstwisuey oyewome 799dSUJ pepusunuodel UoyIedsut qurod ymu WL0J19d 321p 10 SS9U9S00J TEIM STOU TeuLlouge 10J Syu9uodulo9 poer pue sjeoym 499dSuJ uydop sal 072104 peer ainsveww pue Team N Joadsut Jay pue po oulsue asueyyD TeAX97UJ 99TA19 osueyD TO
153. age your tire pressure monitoring system TPMS and should not be used However if you must use a sealant the TPMS sensor and valve stem on the wheel must be replaced by an authorized Ford dealer 333 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies WARNING Refer to Tire pressure monitoring system TPMS in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for important information If the tire pressure monitor sensor becomes damaged it will no longer function Dissimilar spare tire wheel information WARNING Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control injury or death If you have a dissimilar spare tire wheel then it is intended for temporary use only This means that if you need to use it you should replace it as soon as possible with a road tire wheel that is the same size and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by Ford If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged it should be replaced rather than repaired A dissimilar spare tire wheel is defined as a spare tire and or wheel that is different in brand size or appearance from the road tires and wheels and can be one of three types 1 T type mini spare This spare tire begins with the letter T for tire size and may have Temporary Use Only molded in the sidewall 2 Full size dissimilar spare with label on wheel This spare tire has a label on the wheel that s
154. airbag system included recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of injuries related to the deployment of side airbags The side airbag system consists of the following e An inflatable bag airbag with a gas generator concealed behind the outboard bolster of the driver and front passenger seatbacks e A special seat cover designed to allow airbag deployment e The same warning light electronic control and diagnostic unit as used for the front airbags e Two crash sensors mounted in the front doors one on each side of the vehicle e Crash sensors located on the C pillars one sensor on each pillar on each side of the vehicle Side airbags in combination with safety belts can help reduce the risk of severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact collision The side airbags are fitted on the outboard side of the seatbacks of the front seats In certain lateral collisions the airbag on the side affected by the collision will be inflated The airbag was designed to inflate between the door panel and occupant to further enhance the protection provided occupants in side impact collisions The airbag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains lateral deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to close an electrical circuit that initiates airbag inflat
155. al Check battery performance Check operation of horn exterior lamps turn signals and hazard warning lights Check radiator coolers heater and air conditioning hoses Inspect windshield washer spray and wiper operation Check windshield for cracks chips and pitting Inspect for oil and fluid leaks Inspect engine air filter Inspect half shaft dust boots if equipped Check shocks and struts and other suspension components for leaks and damage Inspect steering and linkage Inspect accessory drive belt s Inspect clutch operation if equipped Be sure to ask your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealership service advisor or technician about the multi point vehicle inspection It s a comprehensive way to perform a thorough inspection of your vehicle It s your checklist that gives you immediate feedback on the overall condition of your vehicle You ll know what s been checked what s okay as well as those things that may require future or immediate attention The multi point vehicle inspection is one more way to keep your vehicle running great 431 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide CEP unde Pesen s Heber amp Fes s Sor st Balance Multi Point Inspection Report Card as Recommended by Ford Motor Company Teda Mb on lane me mog wan Ebbi Mison Mobo Wk Mi Jad Fit sper rings DJ twelve NE ta beaks OO Oo OD teaser DOL State af He
156. alth Factory spec cud rata aaps Mone any ansing exe menin rope sein aa E RA Canditiond C SYNC L waden e fe J Cheetos wet mimes L N Conttbutes te ak la afl dan AY LI NN sos Py EV Aa asia boat Fe quipped eit an Loud ant dal ip ee R perrban rham nornir d im Tati masg eS TO LL esin s mestes bs nia dmg OL irge coreg syste acts ts sa cogs E tre iron xt io tchery powarandei Pa polar be Li m ar FE ATAR IMO ATE z t A zeit L Ded j O m roai nopia ar C eee ms ramiz Creer en D an xin mara CORE eter ual OO r ure m __ar CO sir mn j0 Corian Service Advisor see SEN Customer Signature a N Technician 1200000004 3101 a oes Fart wa 432 Sn gk A Gg Bakanl e Turton rc mer Copy 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide NORMAL SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE AND LOG For your convenience your vehicle is equipped with a message center which determines the proper oil change service interval You should perform the engine oil change as indicated by the instrument cluster message center The message center will display ENGINE OIL CHANGE SOON or OIL CHANGE REQUIRED to indicate when an oil change is needed The engine oil change service needs to be completed within two weeks or 500 miles 800 km after the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED mess
157. and water provides the following e Freeze protection down to 34 F 36 C e Boiling protection up to 265 F 129 C e Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion e Proper function of calibrated gauges 384 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications When the engine is cold check the level of the engine coolant in the reservoir o COLD FILL RANGE e The engine coolant should be at the FULL COLD level or within the COLD FILL or MIN MAX range as listed on the engine coolant reservoir depending upon application e Refer to scheduled maintenance information for service interval schedules If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty If the reservoir is low or empty add engine coolant to the reservoir Refer to Adding engine coolant in this chapter Note Automotive fluids are not interchangeable do not use engine coolant antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified function and vehicle location Adding engine coolant When adding coolant make sure it is a 50 50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir when the engine is cool until the appropriate fill level is obtained If coolant is filled to the COLD FILL RANGE or FULL COLD level when the engine is not cool the system will remain underfilled
158. anuals for video games and video game equipment when used as auxiliary inputs for your Family Entertainment System FES Do not operate video games or video equipment if the power cords and or cables are broken split or damaged Carefully place cords and or cables where they will not be stepped on or interfere with the operation of seats and or compartments Disconnect video games and video equipment power cords and or cables when not in use Avoid touching auxiliary input jacks with your fingers Do not blow on them or allow them to get wet or dirty Do not clean any part of the DVD player with benzene lacquer thinner acetone or any other solvent 85 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Federal Communication Commission FCC Compliance Changes or modifications not approved by Ford Lincoln Mercury could void user s authority to operate the equipment This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference and radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this e
159. any and Ford authorized service facilities and that the diagnostic information may be used for any purpose See your SYNC supplement for more information Event Data Recording This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an airbag deployment or hitting a 6 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction road obstacle this data will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems performed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as e How various systems in your vehicle were operating e Whether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts were buckled fastened e How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or the brake pedal and e How fast the vehicle was travelling and e Where the driver was positioning the steering wheel This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur Note EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data or information e g name gender age and crash location is recorded see limitations regarding 911 Assist and Tra
160. aphs e Similar SYNC features Home screen Your system has a home screen where you can save view favorite pictures view your current audio and climate control settings as well as display the audio visualizer You can split the screen in to two or three different sections or you can choose to have one main view To access your home screen press the house icon at the bottom left hand corner of any screen The left side of the screen will 70am display an uploaded photo The right side can also display the Audo uploaded photo The upper right 0 panel will only display the current audio settings The lower right panel Climate OFF displays the vehicle s climate settings if eguipped the visualizer or the hybrid fuel economy if eguipped Press gt on the bottom of the display to access the settings screen for the right side 35 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Loading pictures Your system allows you to save and view up to 32 photos To access 1 Ensure that you are on the Home E 7 09am Screen Press amp at the bottom left of any screen to access 2 Touch the left side of the home screen to initiate the left screen photo display and saved photos screen Audio OFF Climate OFF 3 Select the Add button on the touchscreen The following disclaimer will appear Please confirm the supported photo formats 4 When the pop up
161. ar the windshield of fog and thin ice The system will automatically provide outside air to reduce window fogging Press this button again to return to the previous air flow selection a D Power Press to activate deactivate the climate control system When the system is off outside air is prevented from entering the vehicle The climate status in the touchscreen will also be turned off 8 g Driver heated seat Press to activate Refer to Front seating in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter for more information 9 Driver temperature Press to increase decrease the air temperature on the driver side of the vehicle This control also adjusts the passenger side temperature when dual zone operation is disengaged 10 ac Driver cooled seat Press to activate Refer to Front seating in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter for more information 11 AUTO Press to engage full automatic operation Select the desired temperature using the temperature control The system will automatically determine fan speed airflow location A C on or off and outside or recirculated air to heat or cool the vehicle to reach the desired temperature 12 Fan speed control Press to decrease increase the fan speed 13 gt Recirculated air Press to activate deactivate air recirculation in the vehicle Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time needed to cool down the interior of the vehicle when used with A C and may also help r
162. are receiving follow these steps 1 Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your selling servicing authorized dealer 2 If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved contact the Sales Manager Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager 3 If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company policies please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center In order to help you serve you better please have the following information available when contacting a Customer Relationship Center e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Your telephone number home and business e The name of the authorized dealer and city where located e The vehicle s current odometer reading In some states you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing remedies under your state s warranty laws Ford is also allowed a final repair attempt in some states 356 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance In the United States a warranty dispute must be submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE before taking action under the Magnuson Moss Warranty Act or to the extent allowed by state law before pursuing replacement or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws This dispute handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson Moss Warranty Act or state replacement or repurchase laws IN CALIFORNIA U S ON
163. ase your repair cost reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities and adversely affect driver and passenger safety Frequent inspection of vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to heavy off highway usage DRIVING THROUGH WATER If driving through deep or standing water is unavoidable proceed very slowly especially when the depth is not known Never drive through o water that is higher than the bottom SZ of the wheel rims for cars or the bottom of the hubs for trucks When driving through water traction or brake capability may be limited Also water may enter your engine s air intake and severely damage your engine or your vehicle may stall Driving through deep water where the transmission vent tube is submerged may allow water into the transmission and cause internal transmission damage Once through the water always dry the brakes by moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes 322 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE Getting roadside assistance To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern Ford Motor Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program This program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty The service is available e 24 hours seven days a week e for the coverage period l
164. at least as far apart as those in this vehicle Each time you use the safety seat check that the seat is properly attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor if applicable Tug the child seat from side to side and forward and back where it is secured to the vehicle The seat should move less than one inch when you do this for a proper installation If the safety seat is not anchored properly the risk of a child being injured in a crash greatly increases Combining safety belt and LATCH lower anchors for attaching child safety seats When used in combination either the safety belt or the LATCH lower anchors may be attached first provided a proper installation is achieved Attach the tether strap afterward if included with the child seat Refer to Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children in this chapter 232 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Attaching child safety seats with tether straps i Many forward facing child safety seats include a tether strap which extends from the back of the child safety seat and hooks to an anchoring point called the top tether anchor Tether straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats Contact the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a tether strap or to obtain a longer tether strap if the tether strap on your safety seat does not reach the appropriate top tether anchor in th
165. ately apparent The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours e Avoid inhaling fuel vapors Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation In severe cases excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious illness and permanent injury e Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes If fuel is splashed in the eyes remove contact lenses if worn flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention Failure to seek proper medical attention could lead to permanent injury e Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin If fuel is splashed on the skin and or clothing promptly remove contaminated clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water Repeated or prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation e Be particularly careful if you are taking Antabuse or other forms of disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism Breathing gasoline vapors or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction In sensitive individuals serious personal injury or sickness may result If fuel is splashed on the skin promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and water Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse reaction WARNING When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck Never smoke while refueling Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions Care should be taken
166. ats until they reach age eight a height of 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters tall or 80 Ib 86 kg Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these questions when seated without a booster seat e Can the child sit all the way back against the vehicle seat back with knees bent comfortably at the edge of the seat cushion e Can the child sit without slouching e Does the lap belt rest low across the hips e Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest e Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip Types of booster seats There are generally two types of belt positioning booster seats backless and high back Always use booster seats in conjunction with the vehicle lap shoulder belt 236 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints e Backless booster seats If your backless booster seat has a removable shield remove the shield If a vehicle seating position has a low seat back or no head restraint a backless booster seat may place your child s head as measured at the tops of the ears above the top of the seat In this a case move the backless booster to another seating position with a higher seat back or head restraint and lap shoulder belts or consider using a high back booster seat High back booster seats If with a backless booster seat you cannot find a seating position that adequately supports your child s head a h
167. ature can be reached after approximately 20 miles 30 km of driving The transmission fluid level should be targeted within the cross hatch area if at normal operating temperature 180 F 200 F 82 C 93 C High fluid level If the fluid level is above the MAX range of the dipstick remove fluid to reach the hashmark level Note 4 Fluid level above the MAX level may cause shift and or engagement concerns and or possible damage High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating condition If your vehicle has been operated for an extended period at high speeds in city traffic during hot weather or pulling a trailer the vehicle should be turned off until normal operating temperatures are reached Depending on vehicle use cooling times could take up to 30 minutes or longer 407 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels Before adding any fluid make sure the correct type is used The type of fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick and also in the Maintenance product specifications and capacities section in this chapter Use of a non approved automatic transmission fluid may cause internal transmission component damage If necessary add fluid in 1 2 pint 250 ml increments through the filler tube until the level is correct If an overfill occurs excess fluid should be removed by an authorized dea
168. audio system is limited to 45 MYKEY VOLUME LIMITED will be displayed in the audio system display when attempting to exceed the limited volume e The AdvanceTrac system cannot be turned off When this optional setting is on the MyKey user will not be able to deactivate the system Note It may be beneficial to deactivate the AdvanceTrac system if the vehicle is stuck in snow mud or sand Create a MyKey To program MyKey on one of the keys programmed to the vehicle insert the key that you want to make a MyKey into the ignition For vehicles equipped with push button start put the intelligent access key in the backup slot see the Driving chapter for the location of the backup slot Turn the ignition on Use the message center buttons to do the following 1 Press SETUP until PRESS RESET TO CREATE MYKEY is displayed 145 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security 2 Press and release the RESET button HOLD RESET TO CONFIRM MYKEY will be displayed 3 Press and hold the RESET button for two seconds until MARK THIS AS RESTRICTED is displayed 4 Wait until KEY RESTRICTED AT NEXT START is displayed MyKey is successfully programmed Make sure you label it so you can distinguish it from the admin keys Note To program the optional settings go to Step 2 in the Programming MyKey Optional Settings section If your vehicle is equipped with remote start see the Using MyKey with Rem
169. ause the seat heater to overheat Do not puncture the seat with pins needles or other pointed objects because this may damage the heating element which may cause the seat heater to overheat An overheated seat may cause serious personal injury Note Do not do the following e Place heavy objects on the seat e Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the seat Allow the seat to dry thoroughly 175 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The heated seats will only function when the engine is running To operate the heated seats Press once to activate the high heat setting three indicator lights Continue pressing to scroll through the other settings medium heat two indicator lights low heat one indicator light or off If the engine falls below 350 rpm while the heated seats are on the feature will turn itself off and will need to be reactivated Cooled seats The cooled seats will only function when the engine is running To operate the cooled seats Press once to activate the high cool setting three indicator lights r Continue pressing to scroll through the other settings medium cool two indicator lights low cool one indicator light or off If the engine falls below 350 rpm while the cooled seats are on the feature will turn itself off and will need to be reactivated Climate controlled seats air filter replaceme
170. ay Backup lamps relay gt secondary fuse e power 3 a 20A PCM vehicle power 1 PCM vehicle power 4 coil on plugs 332 32 Driver seat motor Memory motor power 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Fuse Relay Fuse Amp Protected Circuits a Rating HC micro relay LL cruise control HC micro relay HC micro relay front 56 HC micro relay Rear window defroster Heated mirrors a nat use e set used b 60 H micro relay Trailer tow battery charge se va relay Fuel pump SSS CHANGING THE TIRES If you get a flat tire while driving do not apply the brake heavily Instead gradually decrease your speed Hold the steering wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road Note The tire pressure monitoring system TPMS indicator light will illuminate when the spare tire is in use To restore the full functionality of the monitoring system all road wheels equipped with tire pressure monitoring sensors must be mounted on the vehicle Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage to the TPMS sensors refer to Tire pressure monitoring system TPMS in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter Replace the spare tire with a road tire as soon as possible During repairing or replacing of the flat tire have the authorized dealer inspect the TPMS sensor for damage WARNING The use of tire sealants may dam
171. back in and ensure it is fully seated 379 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Adding engine oil 1 Check the engine oil For instructions refer to Checking the engine oil in this chapter 2 If the engine oil level is not within the normal operating range add only certified engine oil of the recommended viscosity Remove the engine oil filler cap and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening 3 Recheck the engine oil level Make sure the oil level is not above the normal operating range on the engine oil level dipstick 4 Install the dipstick and ensure it is fully seated 5 Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise until it stops To avoid possible oil loss DO NOT operate the vehicle with the engine oil level dipstick and or the engine oil filler cap removed Engine oil and filter recommendations 3 7L V6 engine Look for this certification trademark Use SAE 5W 20 engine oil Only use oils certified for gasoline engines by the American Petroleum Institute API An oil with this trademark symbol conforms to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee ILSAC comprised of U S and Japanese automobile manufacturers To protect your engine and engine s warranty use Motorcraft SAE 5W 20
172. beam system s availability may be decreased In such conditions the manual override may be used to turn the high beams on or off For significant blockages e g bird dropping bug splatter snow or ice the automatic high beam system uses a blocked sensor computer program If a blockage is detected and no changes are observed the system will go into low beam mode until the blockage is cleared If blockages are repeatedly detected the system will stay in low beam mode for the remainder of the ignition cycle unless the system is able to begin detecting other vehicles again If it appears that automatic control of the high beams is not functioning properly check the windshield in front of the camera for blockage Flash to pass Pull and release to activate Daytime running lamps DRL if equipped Turns the front fog lamps on To activate e the ignition must be in the on position e the headlamp control is in the off autolamps or parking lamp position and 100 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights e the transmission must be out of the P Park position WARNING Always remember to turn on your headlamps at dusk or during inclement weather The Daytime Running Lamp DRL system does not activate the tail lamps and generally may not provide adequate lighting during these conditions Failure to activate your headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision PANEL DIMMER CONTROL
173. ble into the 12V power point in the vehicle 5 Remove the warning sticker found on the canister and place it on the top of the instrument panel or the center of the dash 6 Start the engine only if the vehicle is outdoors or ina well ventilated area 7 Turn dial 1 counterclockwise to the sealant position Turn on the kit by pressing the on off button 2 8 Inflate the tire to the pressure listed on the tire label located on the driver s door or the door jamb area Note When the sealing compound is first added into the tire the air pressure gauge reading on the compressor unit may indicate a higher value this is normal and should be no reason for concern The pressure will drop after about 30 seconds of operation The 344 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies tire pressure has to be checked with the compressor in the OFF position to get the correct tire pressure reading WARNING Do not stand directly over the temporary mobility kit while inflating the tire If you notice any unusual bulges or deformations in the tire s sidewall during inflation stop and call roadside assistance WARNING If the tire doesn t inflate to the recommended tire pressure within 15 minutes stop and call roadside assistance 9 When the recommended tire pressure is reached turn off the kit by pressing the on off button disconnect the kit from the tire valve and the power point Re
174. by method claims of certain U S patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited MP3 MPG WAV JPG WMA HDCD and all other file types referenced in this Owner s Guide Supply of this product only conveys a license for private non commercial use and does not convey a license nor imply any right to use this product in any commercial i e revenue generating real time broadcasting terrestrial satellite cable and or any other media broadcasting streaming via internet intranets and or other networks or in other electronic content distribution systems such as pay audio or audio on demand applications An independent license for such use is required For details please visit http www mp3licensing com Safety information WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving and that you comply with all applicable law
175. c 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Track Error The system is unable The system will skip to reproduce a corrupt the corrupted track MP3 file Invalid Disc Detected Dirty CD DVD or Wipe the CD DVD with unsupported format a dry soft cloth from the center to the outer edge of the disc Error PINs did not A different PIN was Press OK and try match Please re enter entered to unlock the entering PIN again If Popup window system for valet mode unable contact your authorized dealer Invalid PIN Please System does not Press OK and enter Re enter Popup recognize PIN as valid different PIN to lock window the system Auxiliary input jack Line in WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving and that you comply with all applicable laws The auxiliary input jack provides a way to connect your portable music player to the in vehicle audio Q system This allows the audio from a a portable music player to be played B through the vehicle speakers with PK high fidelity To achieve optimal performance please observe the following instructions when atta
176. cable must be long enough to allow the portable music player to be safely stored while the vehicle is in motion USB port WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving and that you comply with all applicable laws Your vehicle is equipped with a USB port inside your center console This f 4 feature allows you to plug in media 7 Pe playing devices memory sticks and Q also to charge devices if they Bo support this feature For further information on this feature refer to Accessing and using your USB port in the SYNC supplement or Navigation System supplement GENERAL AUDIO INFORMATION Radio frequencies AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications Commission FCC and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications Commission CRTC Those frequencies are AM 530 540 1700 1710 kHz FM 87 7 87 9 107 7 107 9 MHz 61 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Radio reception factors There are three factors that can affect radio reception e Distance strength The further you travel from an FM station the weaker the signal and the weaker the reception
177. cars SUVs minivans and light trucks Note If your tire size does not begin with a letter this may mean it is designated by either ETRTO European Tire and Rim Technical Organization or JATMA Japan Tire Manufacturing Association 2 215 Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge In general the larger the number the wider the tire 3 65 Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire s ratio of height to width 4 R Indicates a radial type tire 5 15 Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches If you change your wheel size you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter 6 95 Indicates the tire s load index It is an index that relates to how much weight a tire can carry You may find this information in your Owner s Guide If not contact a local tire dealer Note You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law 7 H Indicates the tire s speed rating The speed rating denotes the speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure The tires on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation pressure These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference in conditions The ratings range from 81 mph 130 km h to 186 mph 299 km h These ratings are listed in the following cha
178. cated on the outboard side of the seat Press the forward side of the control to adjust firmness Press the rearward side of the control to adjust softness Twelve way power seat The control is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion Press the front portion to tilt the seat p Press the control to move the seat forward backward up or down 174 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Press the control to recline the gt 4 seatback forward or rearward K CI Using the four way power lumbar support if equipped The lumbar control is located on the side of the seat cushion Press the front of the control to adjust firmness Press the rear of the control to adjust softness J Press the top of the control to raise gt 1 the height of the lumbar support py Press the bottom of the control to lower the height of the lumbar l support Front row heated and cooled seats Heated seats WARNING Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaustion or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the seat heater The seat heater may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion because this may c
179. ching your portable music 59 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems device to the audio system If your vehicle is equipped with a navigation system refer to Auxiliary input jack section in the Audio Features chapter of your Navigation System supplement Required equipment 1 Any portable music player designed to be used with headphones 2 An audio extension cable with stereo male 1 8 in 3 5 mm connectors at each end To play your portable music player using the auxiliary input jack 1 Begin with the vehicle parked and the radio turned off 2 Ensure that the battery in your portable music player is new or fully charged and that the device is turned off 3 Attach one end of the audio extension cable to the headphone output of your player and the other end of the audio extension cable to the AIJ in your vehicle 4 Turn the radio on using either a tuned FM station or a CD loaded into the system Adjust the volume to a comfortable listening level 5 Turn the portable music player on and adjust the volume to 1 2 the volume 6 Press AUX on the vehicle radio repeatedly until LINE LINE IN or SYNC LINE IN appears in the display You should hear audio from your portable music player although it may be low 7 Adjust the sound on your portable music player until it reaches the level of the FM station or CD by switching back and forth between the AUX and FM or CD controls Trouble
180. chors at the LATCH equipped seating positions in your vehicle This type of attachment method eliminates the need to use safety belts to attach the child seat however the safety belt can still be used to attach the child seat For forward facing child seats the top tether strap must also be attached to the proper top tether anchor if a top tether strap has been provided with your child seat See Attaching child safety seats with tether straps and Recommendations for attaching safety restraints for children in this chapter for more information 230 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for child seat installation at the seating positions marked with the child seat symbol The LATCH anchors are located at the rear section of the rear seat between the cushion and seat back below the locator symbols on the seatback Follow the child seat manufacturer s instructions to properly install a child seat with LATCH attachments Follow the instructions on attaching child safety seats with tether straps Refer to Attaching child safety seats with tether straps later in this chapter Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the anchors shown WARNING Never attach two child safety seats to the same anchor In a crash one anchor may not be strong enough to hol
181. cident could increase the risk of injury in a collision Safety belt pretensioner Your vehicle is equipped with safety belt pretensioners at the driver and front outboard passenger seating positions The safety belt pretensioner tightens the safety belts firmly against the occupant s body at the start of the crash WARNING The driver and front passenger safety belt system including retractors buckles and height adjusters must be replaced if the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in deployment of front airbags seat mounted side airbags and Safety Canopy System and safety belt pretensioners Safety belt extension assembly If the safety belt is too short when fully extended there is an 8 inch 20 cm safety belt extension assembly that can be added part number 611C22 This assembly can be obtained from an authorized dealer Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety belt Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on the label Also use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too short for you when fully extended 200 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt across the torso Front safety belt height adjustment Your vehicle has safety belt height adjustments at the front outboard seating positions Adjust the height of the shoul
182. commends using the highest sensitivity setting where possible Setting lower sensitivity would lead to fewer and later system warnings Refer to the Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter for instructions on reducing the sensitivity ACTIVE PARK ASSIST APA IF EQUIPPED Active park assist APA will detect an available parallel parking space and automatically steer the vehicle into the space hands free while you control the accelerator gearshift and brakes The system will visually and or audibly instruct the driver to park the vehicle 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus 303 Driving WARNING This system is designed to be a supplementary park aid It may not work in all conditions and is not intended to replace the driver s attention and judgment The driver is responsible for avoiding hazards and maintaining a safe distance and speed even when the APA is in use Conditions in which the system may not work e Something passes between the front bumper and the space such as a pedestrian or cyclist e The edge of the vehicle is high from the ground such as a bus tow truck or flat bed truck Automatic search for parking space To start press the APA control switch on the center console The message center will display ACTIVE PARK SEARCHING To designate what side of the street to search on use the turn signal The arrow symbols gt gt and lt lt in the message center indicate on which
183. conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance 242 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature ABC The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 139 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinflation or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure TIRES Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service but they must be maintained in order to get the max
184. countdown when any of the above actions occur before the vehicle becomes armed Each door the hood or the liftgate is armed individually and if any are open they must be closed for that entry point to enter the 20 second countdown The turn signal lamps will flash once when all doors the hood or the liftgate are closed indicating the vehicle is locked and entering the 20 second countdown Disarming the system You can disarm the system by any of the following actions e Unlock the doors by using your transmitter e Unlock the doors by using your keyless entry pad e Unlock the driver door or all doors using the intelligent access e Unlock the driver s door with a key Turn the key toward the rear of the vehicle to make sure the alarm disarms 168 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security e Turn ignition on e Press the D control on the transmitter This will only shut off the horn and parking lamps when the alarm is sounding The alarm system will still be armed Pressing the power door unlock control within the 20 second prearmed mode will return the vehicle to a disarmed state Triggering the anti theft system The armed system will be triggered if e Any door the hood or the liftgate is opened without using the door key keypad or intelligent access key e Turn the ignition on with an invalid SecuriLock key 169 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fu
185. creen and set the time 8 SEEK In radio and satellite radio mode if activated press lt q Pe to seek to the previous next available station or channel within the currently selected Category Genre In CD DVD Jukebox or User device mode press lt b to access the previous next track or chapter 9 SHUFFLE Press to shuffle the songs on the current CD Jukebox sure or User Device 33 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 10 SCAN Press for a brief sampling of radio stations satellite sem 7 radio channels CD Jukebox or User Device tracks 11 VOL On off volume Press to turn the system on off Turn to adjust the volume 12 Memory presets In radio and satellite radio mode if MSE E activated Press 1 6 to access your previously saved preset stations channels To save to a preset Tune to the desired station channel Press and hold the desired preset button in which you would like to store the station channel The sound will momentarily mute and then return when the preset is saved 13 MENU Press MENU to access the system menu Press while the system menu is active to step through the system menu tabs of Display Feedback Settings System Settings and Valet Mode 14 RADIO Press RADIO to access the radio menu Press while the Es radio menu is active to step through the available radio sources of AM FM1 FM2 SAT1 SAT2 and SAT3 satellite radio
186. ct customers if a tire defect requires a recall Tire replacement requirements Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and handling capability WARNING Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the same size load index speed rating and type such as P metric versus LT metric or all season versus all terrain as those originally provided by Ford The recommended tire and wheel size may be found on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label or the Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or edge of the driver s door If this information is not found on these labels then you should contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death Additionally the use of non recommended tires and wheels could cause steering suspension axle or transfer case power transfer unit failure If you have questions regarding tire replacement contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible 248 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading WARNING When mounting replacement tires and wheels you should not exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the sidewall of the tire to set the beads without additional precautions listed below If the beads do not seat at the
187. d two child safety seat attachments and may break causing serious injury or death 231 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Depending on where you secure a child restraint and depending on the child restraint design you may block access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and or LATCH lower anchors rendering those features potentially unusable To avoid risk of injury occupants should only use seating positions where they are able to be properly restrained Use of inboard lower anchors from the outboard seating positions center seating use The lower anchors at the center of the second row rear seat are spaced 520 mm 20 5 inches apart The standardized spacing for LATCH lower anchors is 280 mm 11 inches center to center A child seat with rigid LATCH attachments cannot be installed at the center seating position LATCH compatible child seats with attachments on belt webbing can only be used at this seating position provided that the child seat manufacturer s instructions permit use with the anchor spacing stated Do not attach a child seat to any lower anchor if an adjacent child seat is attached to that anchor WARNING The standardized spacing for LATCH lower anchors is 280 mm 11 inches center to center Do not use LATCH lower anchors for the center seating position unless the child seat manufacturer s instructions permit and specify using anchors spaced
188. d always properly wear safety belts SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN Infant and or toddler seats Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the child When installing a child safety seat e Review and follow the information presented in the Airbag supplemental restraint system SRS section in this chapter e Carefully follow all of the manufacturer s instructions included with the safety seat you put in your vehicle If you do not install and use the safety seat properly the child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision 226 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the vehicle seat all the way back Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position whenever possible If all children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating position properly restrain the largest child in the front seat Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder belts Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position whenever possible If all children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating position properly rest
189. d and inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced For your safety tires that are damaged or show signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely to blow out or fail Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear abnormally Inspect all your tires including the spare frequently and replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist 246 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Tire wear When the tread is worn down to 1 16th of an inch 2 mm tires must be replaced to help prevent your vehicle from skidding and hydroplaning Built in treadwear indicators or wear bars which look like narrow strips of smooth rubber across the tread will appear on the tire when the tread is worn TR down to 1 16th of an inch 2 mm ta A When the tire tread wears down to the same height as these wear bars the tire is worn out and must be replaced Damage Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage such as bulges in the tread or sidewalls cracks in the tread groove and separation in the tread or sidewall If damage is observed or suspected have the tire inspected by a tire professional Tires can be damaged during off road use so inspection after off road use is also recommended WARNING Age Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as weather storage conditions and conditions o
190. d is added to the child restraint It also helps to achieve the proper snugness of the child seat to the vehicle Sometimes a slight lean towards the buckle will additionally help to remove remaining slack from the belt 229 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 9 Attach the tether strap if the child seat is equipped Refer to Attaching child safety seats with tether straps later in this chapter 10 Before placing the child in the seat forcibly move the seat forward and back to make sure the seat is securely held in place To check this grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side to side and forward and back There should be no more than 1 inch 2 5 cm of movement for proper installation Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician CPST to make certain the child restraint is properly installed In Canada check with your local St John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST Attaching child safety seats with LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren attachments The LATCH system is composed of three vehicle anchor points two 2 lower anchors located where the vehicle seat back and seat cushion meet called the seat bight and one 1 top tether anchor located behind that seating position LATCH compatible child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted attachments that connect to the two lower an
191. d level before seeking service by your authorized dealer e Do not fill the power steering pump reservoir above the MAX mark on the reservoir as this may result in leaks from the reservoir 291 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving If the steering wanders or pulls equipped with either EPS or hydraulic steering system check for e an improperly inflated tire e uneven tire wear e loose or worn suspension components e loose or worn steering components e improper vehicle alignment A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering seem to wander pull BRAKE SHIFT INTERLOCK This vehicle is equipped with a brake shift interlock feature that prevents the gearshift lever from being moved from P Park when the ignition is in the on position unless the brake pedal is applied If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P Park when the ignition is on and the brake pedal applied it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle s brake lamps are not operating properly Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter If the fuse is not blown and the brake lamps are working properly you will need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer WARNING Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brake lamps are working WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Switch the ignition to off and remove the ke
192. d structure 1 e two steel stems 2 e a guide sleeve adjust release button 3 e and a guide sleeve unlock remove button 4 To adjust the head restraint do the following 1 Adjust the seatback to an upright driving riding position 2 Raise the head restraint by pulling up on the head restraint A 3 Lower the head restraint by pressing and holding the guide sleeve adjust release button and pushing down on the head restraint 4 Vf Properly adjust the head restraint so that the top of the head restraint is even with the top of your head and positioned as close as possible to the back of your head For occupants of extremely tall stature adjust the head restraint to its full up position 171 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING The adjustable head restraint is a safety device Whenever possible it should be installed and properly adjusted when the seat is occupied To remove the adjustable head restraint do the following 1 Pull up the head restraint until it reaches the highest adjustment position 2 Simultaneously press and hold both the adjust release button and 4 the unlock remove button then pull up on the head restraint To reinstall the adjustable head restraint do the following 1 Insert the two stems into the guide sleeve collars 2 Push the head restraint down until it locks 4 A Properly adjust th
193. d to improve your chances of being safely belted and surviving an accident We recommend you leave the Belt Minder system activated for yourself and others who may use the vehicle To reduce the risk of injury do not deactivate activate the Belt Minder feature while driving the vehicle 1 Turn the ignition on DO NOT START THE ENGINE 2 Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off Approximately one minute 3 Wait 10 seconds after the safety belt warning light turns off e Step 4 must be completed within 20 seconds after the completion of Step 3 4 For the seating position being disabled buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three times at a moderate speed ending in the unbuckled state e After Step 4 the safety belt warning light will be turned on for three seconds 5 Within approximately seven seconds of the light turning off buckle then unbuckle the safety belt e This will disable the Belt Minder feature for that seating position if it is currently enabled As confirmation the safety belt warning light will flash four times per second for three seconds e This will enable the Belt Minder feature for that seating position if it is currently disabled As confirmation the safety belt warning light will flash four times per second for three seconds followed by three seconds with the light off then followed by the safety belt warning light flashing four times per second for three seconds again 206 2011
194. d various conditions with an informational message followed by a long indicator chime 18 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster The message center display is located in the instrument cluster Info Press the INFO button repeatedly to cycle through the following features SETUP RESET TRIP A B Registers the distance of individual journeys Press and release INFO until the A or B trip appears in the display this represents the trip mode Press and hold RESET until it resets Refer to UNITS later in this section to switch the display from Metric to English MYKEY MILES km if programmed For more information refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter MILES km TO E This displays an estimate of approximately how far you can drive with the fuel remaining in your tank under normal driving conditions Remember to turn the ignition off when refueling to allow this feature to correctly detect the added fuel LOW FUEL LEVEL will display when you have approximately 50 miles 80 km to empty Press RESET to clear this warning message It will return at approximately 25 miles 40 km 10 miles 16 km and 0 miles 0 km miles to empty Distance to empty is calculated using a running average fuel economy which is based on your recent driving history of 500 miles 800 km This value is not the same as the average fuel economy display The running average fuel
195. d warnings provided by the vehicle manufacturer A safety seat that is improperly installed or utilized is inappropriate for your child s height age or weight or does not properly fit the child may increase the risk of serious injury or death WARNING Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision which may result in serious injury or death WARNING Never use pillows books or towels to boost a child They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death in a collision WARNING Always restrain an unoccupied child seat or booster seat These objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop which may increase the risk of serious injury WARNING Never place or allow a child to place the shoulder belt under a child s arm or behind the back because it reduces the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision WARNING Do not leave children unreliable adults or pets unattended in your vehicle Transporting children Always make sure your child is secured properly in a device that is appropriate for their age height and weight All children are shaped differently The child height age and weight thresholds provided are recommendations or the minimum requirements of law The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA provides educat
196. de 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security administrator key or admin key The admin key can be used to create a MyKey program optional MyKey settings and clear the MyKey feature When the MyKey feature is enabled the user can use system check in the message center to see how many MyKeys and admin keys are programmed to the vehicle and see the total distance the vehicle has been driven with the MyKey active MyKey restricted features Standard settings these settings cannot be changed e Belt Minder cannot be disabled The audio system will be muted whenever Belt Minder is activated until the safety belts are buckled Refer to the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter for a detailed description of Belt Minder operation e Low fuel warnings are displayed in the message center followed by a chime when the distance to empty value reaches 75 miles 120 km e The following systems if equipped cannot be turned off reverse sensing system Blind Spot Information System BLIS with cross traffic alert and collision warning system Optional settings these settings can be changed e Vehicle speed is limited to 80 mph 130 km h Visual warnings are displayed followed by a chime when the vehicle speed has reached 80 mph 130 km h e Visual warnings are displayed followed by a chime when a preselected vehicle speed of 45 55 or 65 mph 75 90 or 105 km h is exceeded e The maximum volume of the
197. densation can be a natural by product of this design When moist air enters the lamp assembly through the vents there is a possibility that condensation can occur when the temperature is cold When normal condensation occurs a thin film of mist can form on the interior of the lens The thin mist eventually clears and exits through the vents during normal operation Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours under dry weather conditions Examples of acceptable condensation are e Presence of thin mist no streaks drip marks or droplets e Fine mist covers less than 50 of the lens Examples of unacceptable moisture usually caused by a lamp water leak are e Water puddle inside the lamp e Large water droplets drip marks or streaks present on the interior of the lens Take your vehicle to a dealer for service if any of the above conditions of unacceptable moisture are present 105 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights Using the right bulbs Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below Headlamp bulbs must be marked with an authorized D O T for North America and an E for Europe to ensure lamp performance light brightness and pattern and safe visibility The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn time Number of Bulbs ade Number PY24W SV Function Front turn lamp Front sidemarker lamp N A Fr
198. der belt so the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder To adjust the shoulder belt height squeeze and hold the buttons on the side and slide the height adjuster up or down Release the buttons and pull down on the height adjuster to make sure it is locked in place WARNING Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder Failure to adjust the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt and increase the risk of injury in a collision v gt Safety belt warning light and indicator chime A The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts 201 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Conditions of operation The driver s safety belt is not The safety belt warning light buckled before the ignition illuminates 1 2 minutes and the switch is turned to the on warning chime sounds 4 8 seconds position The driver s safety belt is The safety belt warning light and buckled while the indicator warning chime turn off light is illuminated and the warning chime is sounding The driver s safety belt is The safety belt warning light and buckled before the ignition indicator chime remain off switch is turned to the on position Belt Minder The Belt Minder featur
199. desired To aid in side window defogging demisting in cold weather 1 Select 7 2 Select A C 3 Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort 4 Set the fan to the highest speed 5 Direct the outer instrument panel vents toward the side windows 92 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls AUXILIARY CLIMATE CONTROL 60F 90F 16C 32C OOO 000 oOo 000 REAR LOCK l Fan control Turn to select the desired fan speed or choose the following e O Off Select to shut the rear climate system off e AUTO Select to activate automatic control of the fan speed The system will automatically determine fan speed in order to reach and maintain the desired temperature 2 ay Rear driver side heated seat control if equipped Press to activate Refer to Rear seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter for more information 3 Mode selector Press repeatedly to select airflow as follows e Ji Vent Directs air to the overhead vents of the second and third row seating areas The left light will be illuminated e A Floor Directs air to the floor of the second or third row seating areas The right light will be illuminated are A Vent and Floor Distributes air to the floor and overhead vents of the second and third row seating areas Both lights will be illuminated 4 a Rear passenger side heated seat control if equipped Press to activate Refer to Rear seats in the Sea
200. ditions A collection of crash and occupant sensors provides information to the Restraints Control Module RCM During a crash the RCM activates the safety belt pretensioners and or either one or both stages of the dual stage airbag supplemental restraints based on crash severity and occupant conditions The fact that the pretensioners or airbags did not activate for both front seat occupants in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the system Rather it means the Personal Safety System determined the accident conditions crash severity belt usage etc were not appropriate to activate these safety devices Front airbags are designed to activate only in frontal and near frontal collisions not rollovers side impacts or rear impacts unless the collision causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration The pretensioners are designed to activate in frontal and near frontal collisions and in side collisions and rollovers Driver and passenger dual stage airbag supplemental restraints The dual stage airbags offer the capability to tailor the level of airbag inflation energy A lower less forceful energy level is provided for more common moderate severity impacts A higher energy level is used for the most severe impacts Refer to Airbag supplemental restraints SRS section in this chapter Front crash severity sensor The front crash severity sensor enhances the ability to detect the severity of an impact Positioned up front
201. doors Two stage unlocking may be disabled and re enabled to allow all vehicle doors to unlock simultaneously by simultaneously pressing the and controls on the transmitter for four seconds Note The turn lamps will flash twice to confirm that a change to the feature has occurred 151 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Autolock feature The autolock feature will lock all the doors when e all the doors are closed e the ignition is on e you shift into any gear putting the vehicle in motion and e the vehicle attains a speed greater than 12 mph 20 km h The autolock feature repeats when e any door is opened then closed while the ignition is on and the vehicle speed is 9 mph 15 km h or lower and e the vehicle then attains a speed greater than 12 mph 20 km h Deactivating activating autolock feature Your vehicle comes with the autolock features activated there are four methods to enable disable this feature e Through your authorized dealer e by using a power door unlock lock procedure e using a keypad procedure or e by using the instrument cluster message center Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter Note The autolock feature can be activated deactivated independently of the autounlock feature Power door lock switch autolock enable disable procedure Before starting ensure the ignition is off and all vehicle doors are closed You must com
202. dside Emergencies Standard fuse amperage rating and color COLOR Fuse Mini Standard Maxi outs Fuse link rating fuses fuses fuses fases zum a Gey Grey a e gt Ca Pink Pink __ a Tan Tan SA Brown Brown ioa ra Rea oo ia Bwe Blue _ EBA Natural Natural 40A G Orange Green Green A Red Red Red eoa Blue Yellow Yellow mA Ton Brown Peon Natural Black Black 326 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Passenger compartment fuse panel A e a N a e fel N E DDD BG oj JN B ro rol rol rl rl roj esi ol Jel pst Jel sl B fo Jel Jel Joo leo Jo H ABBR BE oi ka o Cs Ce Cie 5 C27 C28 The fuse panel is located under the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel The fuses are coded as follows Fuse Relay Fuse Amp Protected Circuits Rating Po B80 Right rear smart window ee m Refrigerator 3 15A Driver seat switch 2nd row lumbar switches 5 10A Brake transmission shift interlock e ee ae Po 20A _ Turmssignals 327 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Fuse Relay Fuse Amp Protected Circuits isa Sia Se e a 13 5A IA receiver Exterior mirror switch Steering column position switch Driv
203. dy a disc in the system press the power button on the DVD system and then pressB Play to begin to play the disc 3 Use the bezel controls to play BD pause 7s stop q or eject A a DVD Press 4 to access the previous next chapter Press and hold for a fast reverse forward search 67 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Note The system goes into dual play mode when it is turned on Audio from the DVD system will not play over the rear two speakers until dual play mode is turned off When dual play mode is turned on the audio sound plays over the front two speakers until dual play mode is turned off Note Each headrest monitor is labeled with an identifier either A or B found in the upper right corner of the system To watch a DVD playing in the other headrest system Press MEDIA repeatedly until the desired system Monitor A or Monitor B appears in the display To play a CD or MP3 disc The DVD system can play audio CDs CD R and CD R W CD ROM To ensure proper disc operation check the disc for finger prints and scratches Clean the disc with a soft cloth wiping from the center to the edge 1 Insert a disc into the system 02 47 04 22 128 Ue cee ea Mega Hit 1 002 010 label side facing the rear passengers The disc slot indicator lights will illuminate The system a will automatically load the disc and Leave n it will begin to play If it is an
204. e 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning WAXING e Wash the vehicle first e Use a quality wax that does not contain abrasives e Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non body low gloss black colored trim such as grained door handles roof racks bumpers side moldings mirror housings or the windshield cowl area The paint sealant will gray or stain the parts over time PAINT CHIPS Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match your vehicle s color Take your color code printed on a sticker in the driver s door jamb to your authorized dealer to ensure you get the correct color e Remove particles such as bird droppings tree sap insect deposits tar spots road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips e Always read the instructions before using the products ALUMINUM WHEELS AND WHEEL COVERS Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clearcoat paint finish In order to maintain their shine e Clean weekly with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner ZC 37 A which is available from your authorized dealer Heavy dirt and brake dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream of water e Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or covers e Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your wheel rims or covers Industrial strength heavy duty cleaners or cleaning chemicals in combination with br
205. e Easy Fuel system and can damage it The included funnel has been specially designed to work safely with your vehicle ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY Measuring techniques Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you the driver You must gather information as accurately and consistently as possible Fuel expense frequency of fill ups or fuel gauge readings are NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy We do not recommend taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1 000 miles 1 600 km of driving engine break in period You will get a more accurate measurement after 2 000 miles 3 000 miles 3 000 k m 5 000 km Filling the tank The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Maintenance product specifications and capacities section of this chapter 397 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the empty reserve combined Indicated capacity is the difference in the amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should not be relied upon to increase driving range When refueling your vehicle after the fuel gauge
206. e Insert the key and turn to the lock position key horizontal to engage the childproof locks e Insert the key and turn to the unlock position key vertical to disengage the childproof locks 155 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM The intelligent access keys TA key comply with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment The typical operating range for your transmitter is approximately 33 feet 10 meters A decrease in operating range could be caused by e weather conditions e nearby radio towers e structures around the vehicle or e other vehicles parked next to your vehicle The transmitter allows you to e remotely unlock the vehicle doors 2 l e remotely lock all the vehicle doors A e remotely open the power liftgate 85 e activate the personal alarm e arm and disarm the perimeter anti theft system e operate the illuminated entry feature e activate the global opening windows feature Refer to Intelligent Access in this section for more features The
207. e driver s door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being turned off Press RESET to turn it off or on COLLISION WARN GAP if equipped This allows you to adjust the sensitivity setting of the collision warning system See Collision warning system in the Driving chapter for more information Press RESET to change the sensitivity setting from high sensitivity lt gt to low sensitivity lt gt COLLISION WARN CHIME if equipped This feature warns the driver of a possible collision See Collision warning system in the Driving chapter for more information Press RESET to turn the warning chime on or off The system will revert to chime on each time the vehicle is started The heads up display and or chime will activate briefly to confirm the last setting COLLISION WARN SYSTEM Cif equipped This feature warns the driver of a possible collision See Collision warning system in the Driving chapter for more information Press RESET to turn the collision warning system on or off The system will revert to on each time the vehicle is started The heads up display and or chime will activate briefly to confirm the last setting 22 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster BLIND SPOT if equipped The blind spot information system BLIS is designed to assist the driver by monitoring the side areas of the vehicle Press RESET to turn it off or on CROSS TRAFFIC if e
208. e head restraint so that the top of the head restraint is even with the top of your head and positioned as close as possible to the back of your head For occupants of extremely tall stature adjust the head restraint to its full up position WARNING To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash head restraints must be installed properly 172 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Tilting head restraints if equipped The front head restraints may have a tilting feature for extra comfort To tilt the head restraint do the following 1 Adjust the seatback to an upright driving riding position 2 Pivot the head restraint forward ii m towards your head to the desired location After the head restraint reaches the forward most tilt position pivoting it forward again will then release it to the rearward un tilted position Adjusting the front power seat Ten way power seats Move the front of the control up or down to tilt the seat cushion TTT TT j t Move the rear of the control up or down to raise or lower the seat cushion Move the control in the directions shown to move the seat forward or backward 173 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Press the control to recline the seatback forward or rearward Using the two way power lumbar support if equipped The power lumbar control is lo
209. e inside of the vehicle with the rear seat folded down you have room for 12 100 Ib 45 kg bags of cement Do you have enough load capacity to transport the cement to your home If you and your friend each weigh 220 Ib 99 kg the calculation would be 1 400 2 x 220 12 x 100 1 400 440 1 200 240 lb No you do not have enough cargo capacity to carry that much weight In metric units the 269 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading calculation would be 635 kg 2 x 99 kg 12 x 45 kg 635 198 540 103 kg You will need to reduce the load weight by at least 240 Ib 104 kg If you remove 3 100 Ib 45 kg cement bags then the load calculation would be 1 400 2 x 220 9 x 100 1 400 440 900 60 Ib Now you have the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home In metric units the calculation would be 635 kg 2 x 99 kg 9 x 45 kg 635 198 405 32 kg The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance Certification Label found on the edge of the driver s door TRAILER TOWING Trailer towing puts additional loads on your vehicle s engine transmission axle brakes tires and suspension For your safety and to maximize vehicle performance be sure to use the prop
210. e is a supplemental warning to the safety belt warning function This feature provides additional reminders by intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning light in the instrument cluster when the driver s and front passenger s safety belt is unbuckled The Belt Minder feature uses information from the front passenger sensing system to determine if a front seat passenger is present and therefore potentially in need of a warning To avoid activating the Belt Minder feature for objects placed in the front passenger seat warnings will only be given to large front seat occupants as determined by the front passenger sensing system Both the driver s and passenger s safety belt usages are monitored and either may activate the Belt Minder feature The warnings are the same for the driver and the front passenger If the Belt Minder warnings have expired warnings for approximately five minutes for one occupant driver or front passenger the other occupant can still activate the Belt Minder feature Note If you are using MyKey the Belt Minder warning will not expire Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter 202 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The driver s and front The Belt Minder feature will not passenger s safety belts are activate buckled before the ignition switch is turned to the on position or less than 1 2 mi
211. e may occur if excessive engine revving is held without shifting REVERSE SENSING SYSTEM The reverse sensing system RSS sounds a tone to warn the driver of obstacles near the rear bumper when the R Reverse is selected and the vehicle is moving at speeds less than 3 mph 5 km h The system is not effective at speeds above 3 mph 5 km h and may not detect certain angular or moving objects 296 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving WARNING To help avoid personal injury please read and understand the limitations of the reverse sensing system as contained in this section Reverse sensing is only an aid for some generally large and fixed objects when moving in reverse on a flat surface at parking speeds Inclement weather may also affect the function of the RSS this may include reduced performance or a false activation WARNING To help avoid personal injury always use caution when in R Reverse and when using the RSS WARNING This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects The system is designed to provide a warning to assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to avoid damaging the vehicle The system may not detect smaller objects particularly those close to the ground WARNING Certain add on devices such as large trailer hitches bike or surfboard racks and any device that may block the normal detection zone of the RSS system may create false be
212. e root folder if available You may then select from all possible folders on the disc 44 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems EE Press to access the previous track Press and hold to reverse in the current track gt ii Play Pause Press to play or pause the current track PP Press to access the next track Press and hold to advance within the current track Press lt SEEK gt hard button to listen to the next BD or previous C lt track Playing a DVD in the system 1 Ensure that the vehicle and the system are on and that the vehicle is in P Park This will allow you to be able to view and hear the DVD If the vehicle is moving you will only be able to hear the audio 2 Insert a DVD into the system label side up The system will automatically go into DVD mode You can then select any of the following options on the touchscreen H d Press to access the previous chapter Press and hold to reverse in the current chapter B 11 Play Pause Press to play or pause the DVD b Press to access the next chapter Press and hold to advance within the current chapter iea Stop Press to stop the current track Title Goes to the main title screen stored on the disc Menu Goes to the main menu of the disc Cursor controls Use these controls to navigate to the desired menu selections Search Press to select and go to a specific title or chapter using
213. e top of the battery clean and dry Also make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to the battery terminals If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals remove the cables from the terminals and clean with a wire brush You can neutralize the acid with a solution of baking soda and water It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an extended period of time This will minimize the discharge of your battery during storage Note Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to the vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery performance and durability N WARNING Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause personal injury Therefore do not allow flames sparks or lighted substances to come near the battery When working near the battery always shield your face and protect your eyes Always provide proper ventilation 382 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications WARNING When lifting a plastic cased battery excessive pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps resulting in personal injury and or damage to the vehicle or battery Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners WARNING Keep batteries out of reach of children Batteries contain sulfuric acid Avoid contac
214. e vehicle The rear seats of your vehicle are equipped with built in tether strap anchors located behind the seats as described below The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions shown from top view e 40 40 second row seats and third row passenger side 4 kk E b g 4 e 60 40 second row seats and third row passenger side 4 E E b b mm t Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as shown The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other than the correct tether anchor Once the child safety seat has been installed using either the safety belt the lower anchors of the LATCH system or both you can attach the top tether strap Perform the following steps to attach a child safety seat to the tether anchor 1 Route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the head restraint posts For vehicles with adjustable head restraints route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the head restraint posts 233 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 2 Locate the correct anchor for the selected rear seating position e 2nd row bucket 40 40 e 2nd row bench 60 40 lt D Bee FCP Dc e 3rd row KJ A No
215. eTrac with RSC system Install any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker as far as possible from the front center console the tunnel and the front seats in order to minimize the risk of interfering with the AdvanceTrac with RSC sensors Reducing the effectiveness of the AdvanceTrac with RSC system could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death WARNING Remember that even advanced technology cannot defy the laws of physics It s always possible to lose control of a vehicle due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions Aggressive driving on any road condition can cause you to lose control of your vehicle increasing the risk of personal injury or property damage Activation of the AdvanceTrac with RSC system is an indication that at least some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the road this could reduce the operator s ability to control the vehicle potentially resulting in a loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death If your AdvanceTrac with RSC system activates SLOW DOWN WARNING If a failure has been detected within the AdvanceTrac with RSC system the stability control light will illuminate steadily and you may hear a chime If equipped with a message center the vehicle will also indicate a failure with the brake system Have the system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately The AdvanceTrac with RSC sy
216. ease 386 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 3 Step back while the pressure releases 4 When you are sure that all the pressure has been released use the cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap 5 Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture to within the COLD FILL RANGE or the FULL COLD level on the reservoir If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow system fill the radiator until the coolant is visible and radiator is almost full 6 Replace the cap Turn until tightly installed Cap must be tightly installed to prevent coolant loss After any coolant has been added check the coolant concentration refer to Checking engine coolant If the concentration is not 50 50 protection to 34 F 36 C drain some coolant and adjust the concentration It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50 50 coolant concentration Whenever coolant has been added the coolant level in the coolant reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle If necessary add enough 50 50 concentration of engine coolant and distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level If you have to add more than 1 0 quart 1 0 liter of engine coolant per month have your authorized dealer check the engine cooling system Your cooling system may have a leak Operating an engine with a low level of coolant can result in engine overheat
217. ecome severely damaged by driving the vehicle with a tire that has insufficient air pressure Only punctured areas located within the tire tread can be sealed with the temporary mobility kit Loss of air pressure may adversely affect tire performance For this reason e Do not drive the vehicle above 50 mph 80 km h e Do not drive further than 120 miles 200 km Drive only to the closest Ford Motor Company authorized dealer or tire repair shop to have your tire inspected Drive carefully and avoid abrupt steering maneuvers Periodically monitor tire inflation pressure in the affected tire if the tire is losing pressure have the vehicle towed 341 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Read the information in the Tips for use of the temporary mobility kit section to ensure safe operation of the temporary mobility kit and your vehicle Tips for use of the temporary mobility kit Read the following list of tips to ensure safe operation of the temporary mobility kit Before operating the temporary mobility kit make sure your vehicle is safely off the road and away from moving traffic Turn on the hazard lights Always set the parking brake to ensure the vehicle doesn t move unexpectedly Do not remove any foreign objects such as nails or screws from the tire When using the temporary mobility kit leave the engine running only if the vehicle is outdoors or in a well ventilated area
218. ect against major repair expenses resulting from neglect or inadequate maintenance and may also help to increase the value of your vehicle when you sell or trade it It is your responsibility to see that all scheduled maintenance is performed and that the materials used meet Ford engineering specifications Failure to perform scheduled maintenance specific in this guide will invalidate warranty coverage on parts affected by the lack of maintenance Be sure receipts for completed maintenance are kept with the vehicle and confirmation of the work performed is always recorded in this guide Your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer has factory trained technicians who can perform the required maintenance using genuine Ford parts They are committed to meeting your service needs and to assuring your continuing satisfaction Protecting your investment Maintenance is an investment that will pay dividends in the form of improved reliability durability and resale value To ensure the proper performance of your vehicle and its emission control systems it is imperative that scheduled maintenance be completed at the designated intervals For your convenience your vehicle is equipped with a message center which determines the proper oil change service interval You should perform the engine oil change as indicated by the instrument cluster message center The message center will display ENGINE OIL CHANGE SOON or OIL CHANGE REQUIRED to indicate when an oil cha
219. ed end of the retention bracket over the threaded stud in the trunk floor and secure it with the plastic wing nut If you are stowing the flat tire remove the L shaped bolt from the external pocket of the felt bag With the 3rd row seat in the raised position stand the flat tire in the rear of the vehicle with the tire s valve stem facing the rear of the vehicle Fasten the flat tire to the vehicle by inserting the L shaped bolt through one of the lug bolt holes in the wheel and turning clockwise into the threaded hole in the vehicle until the tire is secured If you are stowing the temporary spare tire place the tire over the jack and secure it with the large wing nut 339 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies TEMPORARY MOBILITY KIT IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a temporary mobility kit located under the driver s seat To remove the temporary mobility kit move the driver s seat fully forward and undo the Velcro strap that attaches it to the rear of the seat frame To replace the temporary mobility kit open the Velcro strap on the bag and slide the bag back under the driver s seat Wrap the strap over the rear frame bar loop it through the buckle and secure the bag to the seat frame The temporary mobility kit consists of an air compressor to reinflate the tire and a sealing compound in a canister that will effectively seal most punctures caus
220. ed by nails or similar objects This kit will provide a temporary seal allowing you to drive your vehicle up to 120 miles 200 km at a maximum speed of 50 mph 80 km h WARNING When towing a trailer use the temporary mobility kit and not the mini spare tire The mini spare tire is not intended for the higher towing load limits of this vehicle When towing heavy loads with the mini spare tire vehicle handling may be diminished which could lead to loss of control and serious personal injury Note The temporary mobility kit sealant compound in the canister is to be used for one tire only See your authorized dealer for additional replacement sealant canisters 340 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Air compressor inside Diverter knob On Off button Air pressure gauge Deflation button Sealant bottle canister Sealant filling clear tube Sealant tube tire valve connector WE n SO EW MW FH 9 Yellow cap tool 10 Air compressor hose 11 Air hose tire valve connector 12 Accessory power plug 13 Casing housing General information WARNING Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control injury or death Do not attempt to repair punctures larger than 1 4 inch 6 4 mm or damage to the tire s sidewall The tire may not completely seal Note Do not use the temporary mobility kit if a tire has b
221. ed on A series of five beeps will be heard The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem and or light are repaired If any of these things happen even intermittently have the supplemental restraint system serviced at an authorized dealer immediately Unless serviced the system may not function properly in the event of a collision Seat mounted side airbag system 40 WARNING Do not place objects or mount eguipment on or near the airbag cover on the side of the seatbacks of the front seats or in front seat areas that may come into contact with a deploying airbag Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a collision WARNING Do not use accessory seat covers The use of accessory seat covers may prevent the deployment of the side airbags and increase the risk of injury in an accident WARNING Do not lean your head on the door The side airbag could injure you as it deploys from the side of the seatback WARNING Do not attempt to service repair or modify the airbag SRS its fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an airbag Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible WARNING All occupants of the vehicle should always wear their safety belts even when an airbag SRS is provided 216 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints How does the side airbag system work The design and development of the side
222. ed to locate your vehicle rather than using the panic alarm Sounding a panic alarm Press to activate the alarm The horn will sound and the turn lamps will flash for a maximum of three minutes Press again or turn the ignition on to deactivate or wait for the alarm to time out in three minutes 158 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Note The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is off Opening the power liftgate X5 Press 25 twice within three seconds to fully unlatch and open the liftgate WARNING Make sure all persons are clear of the liftgate area before using power liftgate control In order to fully lower and latch the liftgate press the control twice If the liftgate stops mid travel it may have detected an obstacle Check to ensure the liftgate swing zone is free from obstruction and reset the power assist by manually closing the liftgate Normal operation can then be resumed WARNING Make sure the liftgate is closed to prevent exhaust fumes from being drawn into the vehicle This will also prevent passengers and cargo from falling out If you must drive with the liftgate open keep the vents open so outside air comes into the vehicle Memory feature seat mirrors adjustable pedals and steering column The Integrated Keyhead Transmitter IKT allows you to recall the memory seat power mirrors adjustable pedals steering column feature Press C to auto
223. educe undesired odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle Recirculated air engages automatically when MAX A C is selected or can be engaged manually in any airflow mode except 447 defrost lt gt Recirculation may turn off automatically in all airflow selections except MAX A C 14 acy Passenger cooled seat Press to activate Refer to Front seating in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter for more information 89 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls TOUCHSCREEN FUNCTIONS CLIMATE Driver O Passenger gor WA BE oor A A Temperature Fan Speed Temperature CV Jbs4 JC ICV tat Temperature Press the A up and V down arrows on the left side of the screen to increase decrease the airflow temperature for the driver side of the vehicle This control also adjusts the passenger side temperature when dual zone operation is disengaged Press the A up and V down arrows on the right side of the screen to increase decrease the airflow temperature for the passenger side of the vehicle e i Distributes air through the instrument panel vents e JH Distributes air through the instrument panel vents floor vents rear seat floor vents and de mister vents e Distributes air through the floor vents rear seat floor vents e Y Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents de mister vents floor vents and rear seat floor
224. ee below Back up method of starting Your IA key uses a radio frequency signal to communicate with your vehicle and authorize your vehicle to start when you press the START STOP button and apply the brake pedal If excessive radio frequency interference is present in the area or if the battery in your IA key is low it may be necessary to start your car by inserting the IA key in the back up slot located in the rear of the center console utility compartment Insert the IA key into the slot with buttons facing out and with key ring up After inserting the IA key into the back up slot use the START STOP button and brake pedal to start your vehicle as usual The vehicle should respond normally as long as the IA key is in the back up slot in the center console utility compartment Once the vehicle is started the IA key can be removed from the back up slot if desired Fast restart feature The Fast Restart feature allows you to re start your vehicle within 20 seconds of switching the vehicle off if a valid IA key is not present when the vehicle is switched off When you switch your vehicle off without an IA key in the passenger compartment the message RESTART NOW OR KEY IS NEEDED will be displayed in the message center You can re start the vehicle by applying the brake pedal and pressing the START STOP button for up to 20 seconds even though the IA key is not present After 20 seconds have expired you can no longer start your vehicle wi
225. eering wheel movements 318 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving e If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another i e from concrete to gravel there will be a change in the way the vehicle responds to a maneuver steering acceleration or braking Again avoid these abrupt inputs AWD systems if equipped AWD uses all four wheels to power the vehicle This increases traction enabling you to drive over terrain and road conditions that a conventional two wheel drive vehicle cannot Sand When driving over sand try to keep all four wheels on the most solid area of the trail Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower gear and drive steadily through the terrain Apply the accelerator slowly and avoid spinning the wheels When driving at slow speeds in deep sand under high outside temperatures use a low gear when possible Lower gear operation will maximize the engine and transmission cooling capability Under severe operating conditions the A C may cycle on and off to protect overheating of the engine Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may be required from another vehicle Remember you may be able to back out the way you came if you proceed with caution Mud and water If you must drive through high water drive slowly Traction or brake capability may be limited When drivin
226. efer to the Warranty Guide for audio system warranty information If service is necessary see your dealer or qualified technician MP3 track and folder structure Your MP3 system recognizes MP3 individual tracks and folder structure as follows There are two different modes for MP3 disc playback MP3 track mode system default and MP3 folder mode For more information on track and folder mode refer to Sample MP3 structure in the following section MP3 track mode ignores any folder structure on the MP3 disc The player numbers each MP3 track on the disc noted by the mp3 file extension from T001 to a maximum of T255 Note The maximum number of playable MP3 files may be less depending on the structure of the CD and exact model of radio present MP3 folder mode represents a folder structure consisting of one level of folders The CD player numbers all MP3 tracks on the disc noted by the mp3 file extension and all folders containing MP3 files from F001 folder T001 track to F253 T255 Creating discs with only one level of folders will help with navigation through the disc files 63 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Sample MP3 structure If you are burning your own MP3 discs it is important to understand 0 how the system will read the structures you create While various DR J3 mp3 1 files may be present files with mp3 extensions other than mp3 only files wit
227. electrical components as grounding points WARNING Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative terminal of the battery to be jumped A spark may cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades belts moving parts of both engines or any fuel delivery system parts Jump starting 1 Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at moderately increased speed 2 Start the engine of the disabled vehicle 351 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies 3 Once the disabled vehicle has been started run both engines for an additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables Removing the jumper cables Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were connected Note In the illustration the vehicle on the bottom is used to designate the assisting boosting battery 1 Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface 2 Remove the jumper cable on the negative terminal of the booster vehicle s battery 3 Remove the jumper cable from the positive terminal of the booster vehicle s battery 4 Remove the jumper cable from the positive terminal of the disabled vehicle s battery After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables removed allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can relearn its idle condition
228. emo if equipped Select this tab to activate the THX audio demonstration You may press X to stop the demonstration FCC Compliance Changes or modifications not approved by Ford Lincoln Mercury could void user s authority to operate the equipment This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits with the Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help 55 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Gracenote copyright CD and music related data from Gracenote Inc copyright 2000 2007 Gracenote Gracenote Software copyright 2000 2007 Gracenote This product and service may practice one or more of the following U S Patents 5 987 525 6 061 680 6 154 773 6 161 132 6 230 192 6 230 207 6 240 459 6 330 593
229. en backing up Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the interior rear view mirror since this may impair proper mirror performance Note A rear center passenger and or raised rear center headrest if equipped may also block the light from reaching the sensor Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh abrasives fuel or other petroleum based cleaning products EXTERIOR MIRRORS Power side view mirrors WARNING Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in motion 118 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls To adjust your mirrors E A 1 Rotate the control clockwise to adjust the right mirror and rotate the control counterclockwise to adjust the left mirror 2 Move the control in the direction you wish to tilt the mirror 3 Return to the center position to lock mirrors in place Memory mirrors if equipped The power side view mirror positions are saved when doing a memory set and can be recalled using the memory feature Refer to Seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter Automatic dimming feature The driver s side view mirror has an auto dimming function For more information refer to Automatic dimming interior rear view mirror in this chapter Heated outside mirrors 441 Both mirrors are heated automatically to remove ice mist and fog when the rear window defrost is activated Do not remove ice from the mirrors with a
230. encore Saec make adjustments to your current playing media o Gd Reverse Press for reverse play e gt VI Play Pause Press to play or pause the DVD e PP Fast forward Press for advance play SEEK You may press the SEEK hard button on the system to access the next or previous chapter e Media Press to select the desired media in the selected headset A or B e Rear Controls Enabled Disabled Press to turn the Rear Controls if equipped on off e Headphones On Off Press to turn the headphones on off Rear zone climate control Your mobile media system allows you to access and make adjustments to the front and rear zone climate controls To access press the CLIMATE hard button Refer to the Climate Controls chapter for further information Calendar e Press the I button and then select the Calendar tab You can then select which month you would like to view by pressing lt q gt or you can also select Go to Today INFORMATION Cah e You are able to view calendars from one previous year and the next 10 years Note Not all tab selections shown here will be available in all markets Check with your authorized dealer for availability 51 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems System information e Press the I hard button i INFORMATION and then select the System Information tab on the touchscreen In this screen you can vi
231. eplaced if either damage or improper operation is noted For proper care of soiled safety belts refer to Interior in the Cleaning chapter WARNING Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the safety belt assembly or child restraint system under the above conditions could result in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision 239 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading NOTICE TO CROSSOVER VEHICLE OWNERS Crossover vehicles handle differently than passenger cars in the various driving conditions that are encountered on streets highways and off road Crossover vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off road conditions WARNING Crossover vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles To reduce the risk of serious injury or death from a rollover or other crash you must e Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers e Drive at safe speeds for the conditions e Keep tires properly inflated e Never overload or improperly load your vehicle and e Make sure every passenger is properly restrained WARNING In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt All occupants must wear seat belts and children infants must use appropriate restraints to minimize the risk of in
232. eps 297 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving The RSS detects obstacles up to six feet two meters from the rear bumper with a decreased coverage area at the outer corners of the bumper refer to the figures for approximate zone coverage areas As you move closer to the obstacle the rate of the tone increases When the obstacle is less than 10 inches 25 0 cm away the tone will sound continuously If the RSS detects a stationary or receding object further than 10 inches 25 0 cm from the side of the vehicle the tone will sound for only three seconds Once the system detects an object approaching the tone will sound again While receiving a warning the radio volume will be reduced to a predetermined level After the warning goes away the radio will return to the previous value The RSS automatically turns on when the gearshift lever is placed in R Reverse and the ignition is on A control in the message center allows the driver to disable the system refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information Note If the system cannot be turned off refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information Keep the RSS sensors located on the rear bumper fascia free from snow ice and large accumulations of dirt do not clean the sensors with sharp objects If the sensors are covered it will affect the accuracy of the RSS If your vehicle sustain
233. equipped with an Electric Power Steering EPS system There is no fluid reservoir to check or fill If your vehicle loses electrical power while you are driving or if the ignition is turned off you can steer the vehicle manually but it takes more effort Extreme continuous steering may increase the effort it takes for you to steer This occurs to prevent internal overheating and permanent damage to your steering system If this should occur you will neither lose the ability to steer the vehicle manually nor will it cause permanent damage Typical steering and driving maneuvers will allow the system to cool and steering assist will return to normal The EPS system has diagnostic checks that continuously monitor the EPS system to ensure proper operation When a system error is detected the following message SERVICE POWER STEERING SERVICE POWER STEERING NOW or POWER STEERING ASSIST FAULT may display in the message center refer to the Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information 290 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving WARNING The EPS system has diagnostics checks that continuously monitor the EPS system to ensure proper operation of the electronic system When an electronic error is detected the message POWER STEERING ASSIST FAULT will be displayed in the message center If this happens stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the engine After at least 10 seconds reset the
234. er The key codes need to be erased from your vehicle and new keys will need to be programmed Replacing intelligent access keys can be very costly Store an extra programmed key away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any inconveniences Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase additional spare or replacement keys Programming spare intelligent access keys You must have two previously programmed intelligent access keys inside the vehicle and the new unprogrammed intelligent access keys readily accessible If two previously programmed keys are not available you must take your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the spare key s programmed Note A maximum of four intelligent access keys can be programmed to your vehicle If you would like to replace a previously programmed access key with a new access key or if you already have four access keys programmed to your vehicle you must take your vehicle and all access keys to your authorized dealer to be erased and reprogrammed Ensure that the vehicle is off before beginning this procedure Ensure that all doors are closed before beginning this procedure and that all doors remain closed throughout the procedure Perform this procedure exactly as described below and perform all steps within 30 seconds of starting the sequence If any steps are performed out of sequence stop and wait for at least one minute before starting again Please read and understand the entire p
235. er FL 500 S FL 500 S Spark Plugs SP 411 SP 512 A For spark plug replacement see your authorized dealer Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for changing the spark plugs Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and design specifications for your vehicle such as Motorcraft or equivalent replacement parts The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not used 413 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications V c61OCN ISM TO OVIMGLAX V L6TOCWdSM T 06M0SAX AT eNOOYAN NID OT LX T E69TW VSYH qu peamb 10 GTX 10 7 DX TV S999W SSM 10 W G909IN SSM O T Wd uoneIyn d s pIo JogumN Jed PIOA JUBOTIQN T KV qeay ONAYMKS OPT MSL CIETO seouno gT AVS SYLIIN TUe9LgJ xy Jeoy unruerg CIOTTI stud pg 06 M108 AVS 17191010 AMY PME Ld yun I JSULIL IaMog amv pmp Tenuaroy p y 10T S949 pmy LLV AT oNOOYAN syzenb 9 TT UOJSSTUSURI OTYRUIOINY JJeII10 O W 1 1 0D OG49 PME send 6 0T UOTSSTUISUBI OT BUIOINY queoliqn y Yoo pue s9Yy9 TeJ oyesyyy 9s2913 UMUT pue yun syoe1 yeas 9se910 9sod ng UMIN yoyel pooy Arene uoyel pooy Yo LOOT pm ayelg spe 1070W 0419591 UO NIN LOC 99ueuL0jlod pue XVIN Usemjog USI E1J219109ON MAD Ayroedey sulo 10 9WEN Med PIOA ri sJILI9VdY ANY SNOILVOISIDAdS LONGOYd AONVNALNIVIN p
236. er equipment while towing Follow these guidelines to ensure safe towing procedure e Do not tow a trailer until your vehicle has been driven at least 1 000 miles 1 600 km Consult your local motor vehicle laws for towing a trailer Refer to the instructions included with towing accessories for the proper installation and adjustment specifications Thoroughly prepare your vehicle for towing Refer to Preparing to tow in this chapter e Stay within your vehicle s load limits e Use extra caution when driving while trailer towing Refer to Driving while you tow in this section e Service your vehicle more frequently if you tow a trailer Refer to Special operating conditions in the Scheduled Maintenance Guide chapter For load specification terms found on the label refer to Vehicle loading with and without a trailer in this chapter Remember to figure in the tongue load of your loaded vehicle when figuring the total weight 270 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading kg Weight lb kg For towing trailers up to 3500 Ib 1588 kg use a weight carrying hitch and ball which uniformly spreads the trailer tongue loads through the vehicle s underbody structure For towing trailers over 3500 Ib 1588 kg up to 4500 Ib 2042 kg it is recommended to use a weight distributing hitch to increase front axle load while towing For towing trailers up to 4500 Ib 2042 kg use a
237. er seat module Driver door module Keypad Rear entertainment panel Navigation display ALM Auxiliary climate control 20 15A Data link connector OBD 2 2nd row power fold seat motors pt a ee Park lamps License plate lamps Muminated liftgate applique Demand lamps Interior lamps 2nd row power fold seats Powertrain control module GTDI wake up 3rd row seat relay 328 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Location Rating Heads up display 31 10A Steering angle sensor Heads up display 37 10A Powertrain control module Le eee 43 10A Auxiliary blower Rear wiper Rain sensor Trailer tow backup lamps 45 5A Front wiper Front blower Wiper relay 46 7 5A Occupant classification sensor OCS Passenger airbag deactivation indicator PADD Front control interface module Breaker 329 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Power distribution box The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment The power distribution box contains high current fuses that protect your vehicle s main electrical systems from overloads WARNING Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current fuses WARNING To reduce risk of electrical shock always replace the cover to the power distribution box before reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid reservoirs If the battery has been disconnected and recon
238. eration of the vehicle We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving and that you comply with all applicable laws Your vehicle may be equipped with a Family Entertainment System FES which allows you to listen to audio CDs MP3 discs watch DVDs and to plug in and play a variety of standard video game systems The headrest mounted DVD players are capable of playing standard DVDs CDs MP3s and are compatible with Video CD HDCD Hybrid SACD play CD layer only SVCD DVD video JPEGs up to MPEG 4 files MP3 files and WMA media Please review this material to become familiar with the FES features and controls as well as the very important safety information Quick start Your family entertainment system includes two headrest mounted DVD player screens two sets of wireless infrared IR headphones and a wireless infrared IR remote control capable of controlling either DVD player Both DVD players are capable of playing their own independent media or they can both watch the same media When in single play mode the headrest video sources that have been selected at each headrest will play through the speakers but no audio is available through the headphones To play a DVD 1 Insert a DVD into the system label side facing the rear passengers The disc slot indicator lights will illuminate The system will automatically load the disc and it will begin to play LOADING will appear in the screen 2 If there is alrea
239. erienced SLOW DOWN Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the tongue weight recommendations Refer to Trailer towing in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for more information on towing a trailer with your vehicle TCS During trailer sway control events the stability control light in the instrument cluster will flash momentarily The cluster message center will also display TRAILER SWAY REDUCE SPEED In some cases 289 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving when trailer sway is detected the vehicle speed is too high and may be at or above a speed at which trailer sway will grow continuously This may cause the system to activate multiple times causing a gradual reduction in speed Disabling trailer sway control Trailer sway control can be disabled during any key cycle To disable trailer sway control refer to the Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter Note that regardless of chosen enable state trailer sway control will be re enabled each new key cycle WARNING Turning off trailer sway control increases the risk of loss of vehicle control serious injury or death Ford does not recommend disabling this feature except in situations where speed reduction may be detrimental e g hill climbing the driver has significant trailer towing experience and can control trailer sway and maintain safe operation STEERING 3 5L EcoBoost engine if equipped Your vehicle is
240. ering Do not use ACC in these with the radar signals conditions because it may not detect warn or respond to potential collisions Swirling water or snow or ice on Do not use ACC in these the surface of the road may conditions because it may not interfere with the radar signals detect warn or respond to potential collisions WARNING Do not use ACC when towing a trailer with brake controls Aftermarket trailer brakes will not function properly when ACC is activated because the brakes are electronically controlled Failing to do so may result in loss of vehicle control which could result in serious injury 130 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls WARNING Do not use tires sizes other than those recommended because this can affect the normal operation of ACC Failing to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control which could result in serious injury STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS Radio control features VOL Volume Press to decrease or increase the volume EE bb Seek Press to select the previous next radio station preset CD track or satellite radio station preset depending on which media mode you are in MEDIA Press repeatedly to scroll through available audio modes SYNC system hands free control feature Press ng briefly to use the voice command feature You will hear a tone and LISTENING will appear in the radio display Press and hold ug to
241. ers Guide 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls DUAL ZONE AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL CLIMATE 990000 Okr Tre OE aC Climate system without navigation system shown with navigation similar Temperature conversion To switch between Fahrenheit and Celsius refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter 1 Climate Press to control the climate control system through the touch display screen See Touchscreen functions later in this section 2 Passenger temperature Press to activate separate passenger temperature control and turn the knob to increase decrease the air temperature on the passenger side of the vehicle O00 oo0 000 O00 3 g Passenger heated seat Press to activate Refer to Front seating in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter for more information 4 A C Press to activate deactivate air conditioning Use with gt recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency A C engages automatically in MAX A C 447 defrost and GA floor defrost 5 7G Rear defroster Press to activate deactivate the rear window defroster Refer to Rear window defroster later in this chapter for more information This button will also activate the heated mirrors 88 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls 6 U7 Defrost Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and de mister vents Can be used to cle
242. ess entry keypad code will still function the same way but the driver s door will also unlock with each keypad button press To lock all doors press and hold the 7 e 8 and the 9 e 0 at the same time with the driver s door closed for one second will lock all doors You do not need to enter the keypad code first SECURILOCK PASSIVE ANTI THEFT SYSTEM SecuriLock passive anti theft system is an engine immobilization system This system is designed to help prevent the engine from being started unless a coded intelligent access keys programmed to your vehicle is used The use of the wrong type of coded key may lead to a no start condition Your vehicle comes with two coded intelligent access keys additional coded transmitters may be purchased from your authorized dealer The authorized dealer can program your spare transmitters to your vehicle or you can program then yourself Refer to Programming spare intelligent access keys for instructions on how to program the coded key Note The SecuriLock passive anti theft system is not compatible with non Ford aftermarket remote start systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection Note Large metallic objects electronic devices that are used to purchase gasoline or similar items or a second coded key on the same key chain may cause vehicle starting issues You need to prevent these objects from touching the coded key while starting
243. ess the accelerator before or during starting Only use the accelerator when you have difficulty starting the engine For more information on starting the vehicle refer to Starting the engine in this chapter To avoid potential transmission damage at extremely cold temperatures below 20 F 30 C it is recommended that the vehicle be warmed up to normal operating temperature before driving at highway speeds above 50 mph 80 km h Normal operating temperature is normally reached after 10 minutes of moderate driving or idling WARNING Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system creating the risk of fire or other damage 276 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving WARNING Do not park idle or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system which can start a fire WARNING Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed areas Exhaust fumes can be toxic Always open the garage door before you start the engine See Guarding against exhaust fumes in this chapter for more instructions WARNING If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes Important safety precautions When the engine starts the idle RPM runs higher than normal in order to warm the en
244. essary to maintain the coolant concentration above 40 e NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40 e A coolant concentration of 40 will provide freeze point protection down to 12 F 24 C Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40 will decrease the corrosion freeze protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage e If available refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate protection at the temperatures in which you drive Vehicles driven year round in non extreme climates should use a 50 50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system and engine protection Engine fluid temperature management EcoBoost engine only Your vehicle has been designed to pull a trailer but because of the added load the vehicle s engine may temporarily reach higher temperatures during severe operating conditions such as ascending a long or steep grade while pulling a trailer in hot ambient temperatures At this time you may notice your engine coolant temperature gauge needle move toward the H and the POWER REDUCED TO LOWER TEMP message may appear on the message center 388 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications You may notice a reduction in the vehicle s speed caused by reduced engine power Your vehicle has been designed to enter this mode if ce
245. etchup mustard orange juice or oil based products on the leather as they may permanently stain the leather e Do not use household cleaning products alcohol solutions solvents or cleaners intended for rubber vinyl or plastics Scratches Natural Markings Because the leather in the seat comes from genuine steer hides there will be evidence of naturally occurring markings such as small scars These markings give character to the seating covers and should be considered as proof of a genuine leather product In order to lessen the appearance of certain scratches and other wear marks apply conditioner on the affected area following the same instructions as in the Conditioning section Conditioning Bottles of King Ranch Leather Conditioner are available at the King Ranch Saddle Shop Visit the website at www krsaddleshop com or telephone in the United States 1 800 282 KING 5464 If you are unable to obtain King Ranch Leather Conditioner use another premium leather conditioner e Clean the surfaces using the steps outlined in the Cleaning section e Ensure the leather is dry then apply a nickel sized amount of conditioner to a clean dry cloth e Rub the conditioner into leather until it disappears Allow the conditioner to dry and repeat the process for the entire interior If a film appears wipe off film with a dry clean cloth UNDERBODY Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently Keep body and door
246. ew the following options e Phone number for your Customer Service Center e Current SIRIUS Radio ESN Help The Help screen allows you to view basic information about controls and driving restrictions as well as traffic legend information and basic voice commands available in various modes To access e Press the I hard button i and then select the Help tab Select Basic Operation at the top of EEY the screen to view the hard buttons Calendar on your mobile media system Press nfo Press 8 button below To receve basic hek corresponding feature the desired icon to view the button s MENL RADIO ET description m ETT POWER 1 6 SEEK SCAN SHUFFLE OSP CUMATE Cimete OFF 52 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Select Driving Restriction at the top of the screen to view the system s driving restriction Select SYNC Voice Commands at the top of the screen When selected the system will show you a brief listing of possible voice commands in that specific mode Sound features Entertainment Systems Due to driver restriction and safety concerns certain features of the systern are restricted from use while the vehicle is in motion User Device USB Bluetooth Audio Line In Cimete OFF The sound menu allows you to access and adjust settings such as Bass Treble Fade Balance Digital Signal Processing DSP Speed compensated volume SCV and the visualize
247. exit voice command Press f to activate phone mode or answer a phone call Press and hold f to end call or exit phone mode For further information on the SYNC system refer to the SYNC supplement 131 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Navigation system SYNC hands free control features if equipped Press We control briefly until the voice ue icon appears on the Navigation display to use the voice command feature Press f to activate phone mode or answer a phone call Press and hold f to exit phone mode or end call For further information on the Navigation system SYNC system refer to the Navigation System and SYNC supplements POWER PANORAMIC VISTA ROOF IF EQUIPPED AND POWER SUNSHADES The panoramic Vista Roof and power sunshade controls are located on the overhead console WARNING Do not let children play with the panoramic Vista Roof and power sunshade or leave children unattended in the vehicle They may seriously hurt themselves WARNING When closing the panoramic Vista Roof and power sunshade you should verify that it is free of obstructions and ensure that children and or pets are not in the proximity of the panoramic Vista Roof and power sunshade opening Note Do not attempt to move the panoramic power sunshades manually or sunshade damage or malfunction may occur The sunshade track clips are designed to release the su
248. f use load speed inflation pressure etc the tires experience throughout their lives In general tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread wear However heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be replaced more frequently You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or after six years due to aging even if it has not been used U S DOT Tire Identification Number TIN Both U S and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U S DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards The next two numbers or letters are the plant code 247 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading designating where it was manufactured the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built For example the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997 After 2000 the numbers go to four digits For example 2501 means the 25th week of 2001 The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability This information is used to conta
249. fatal crashes occur within 25 miles 40 km of home Belts are uncomfortable We design our safety belts to enhance comfort If you are uncomfortable try different positions for the safety belt upper anchorage and seatback which should be as upright as possible this can improve comfort T was in a hurry Prime time for an accident Belt Minder reminds us to take a few seconds to buckle up Safety belts don t work Safety belts when used properly reduce risk of death to front seat occupants by 45 in cars and by 60 in light trucks Traffic is light Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in single vehicle crashes many when no other vehicles are around Belts wrinkle my clothes Possibly but a serious crash can do much more than wrinkle your clothes particularly if you are unbelted The people Im with don t Set the example teen deaths occur 4 wear belts times more often in vehicles with TWO or MORE people Children and younger brothers sisters imitate behavior they see 204 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints T have an airbag Airbags offer greater protection when used with safety belts Frontal airbags are not designed to inflate in rear and side crashes or rollovers Td rather be thrown clear Not a good idea People who are ejected are 40 times more likely to DIE Safety belts help prevent ejection WE GAN T PICK OUR CRASH
250. ffic directions and Information privacy below However parties such as law enforcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have such special equipment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do not access event data recorder information without obtaining consent unless pursuant to court order or where required by law enforcement other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful authority Other parties may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada Note Including to the extent that any law pertaining to Event Data Recorders applies to SYNC or its features please note the following Once 911 Assist if equipped is enabled set ON 911 Assist may through any paired and connected cell phone disclose to emergency services that the vehicle has been in a crash 1 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction involving the deployment of an airbag or in certain vehicles the activation of the fuel pump shut off Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable of being used to electronicall
251. following e A slight deceleration of the vehicle e The stability control light will flash e If your foot is on the brake pedal a vibration in the pedal e If the driving condition is severe and your foot is not on the brake the brake pedal may move as the systems applies higher brake forces You may also hear a whoosh of air from under the instrument panel during this severe condition e The brake pedal may feel stiffer than usual Traction control system TCS Traction control is a driver aid feature that helps your vehicle maintain traction of the wheels typically when driving on slippery and or hilly road surfaces by detecting and controlling wheel spin Excessive wheel spin is controlled in two ways which may work separately or in tandem engine traction control and brake traction control Engine traction control works to limit drive wheel spin by 286 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving momentarily reducing engine power Brake traction control works to limit wheel spin by momentarily applying the brakes to the wheel that is slipping Traction control is most active at low speeds During TCS events the stability control light in the instrument cluster will flash If the TCS is activated excessively in a short period of time the braking portion of the system may become temporarily disabled to allow the brakes to cool down In this situation TCS will use only engine power reduction or transfe
252. for more information VEHICLE NEAR TOP SPEED Displayed when a MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed is approaching 80 mph 130 km h Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information TOP SPEED MYKEY SETTING Displayed when a MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed is 80 mph 130 km h Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information BUCKLE UP TO UNMUTE AUDIO Displayed when a MyKey is in use and Belt Minder is activated Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information ADVTRAC ON MYKEY SETTING Displayed when a MyKey is in use when trying to disable the AdvanceTrac system and the optional setting is on Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information 28 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster BLIND SPOT SYSTEM FAULT if equipped Displayed when a fault with the blind spot information system has occurred Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible CROSS TRAFFIC SYSTEM FAULT if equipped Displayed when a fault with the cross traffic alert system has occurred Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible BLIND SPOT NOT AVAILABLE if equipped Displayed when blind spot information system is not available See Blind Spot Information System BLIS with Cross Traffic Alert in the Drivin
253. g chapter CROSS TRAFFIC NOT AVAILABLE if equipped Displayed when cross traffic alert is not available See Blind Spot Information System BLIS with Cross Traffic Alert in the Driving chapter SENSOR BLOCKED SEE MANUAL if equipped Displayed when the blind spot information system cross traffic alert system sensors are blocked See Blind Spot Information System BLIS with Cross Traffic Alert in the Driving chapter VEHICLE COMING FROM LEFT if equipped Displayed when the blind spot information system with cross traffic alert CTA system is operating and senses a vehicle See Blind Spot Information System BLIS with Cross Traffic Alert in the Driving chapter VEHICLE COMING FROM RIGHT if equipped Displayed when the blind spot information system with cross traffic alert CTA system is operating and senses a vehicle See Blind Spot Information System BLIS with Cross Traffic Alert in the Driving chapter ACTIVE PARK FAULT if equipped Displayed when a fault has occurred with the active park assist system Refer to Active park assist in the Driving chapter for more information ACTIVE PARK CANCELLED if equipped Displayed when the active park assist feature has been canceled when it is in use Refer to Active park assist in the Driving chapter for more information CANCELLED BY OVER SPEED if equipped Displayed when the active park assist feature self cancels due to vehicle speed over the preset limi
254. g an improperly fitted vehicle safety belt could increase the risk of serious injury in a crash To improve the fit of both the lap and shoulder belt on children who have outgrown child safety seats Ford Motor Company recommends use of a belt positioning booster Booster seats position a child so that vehicle lap shoulder safety belts fit better They lift the child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips and the knees bend comfortably at the edge of the cushion while 235 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints minimizing slouching Booster seats may also make the shoulder belt fit better and more comfortably Try to keep the belt near the middle of the shoulder and across the center of the chest Moving the child closer a few centimeters or inches to the center of the vehicle but remaining in the same seating position may help provide a good shoulder belt fit When children should use booster seats Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and lap shoulder belt to fit properly Generally this is when they reach a height of at least 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters tall around age eight to age twelve and between 40 Ib 18 kg and 80 Ib 86 kg or upward to 100 Ib 45 kg if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer Many state and provincial laws require that children use approved booster se
255. g column 131 Coolant checking and adding 384 refill capacities 387 414 Specifications 414 G 0ler sami lm ai iin 112 Creatingaplaylist 49 Cross Traffic Alert 310 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Index Cruise control see Speed CONT OI e yi AY 120 Customer Assistance 323 Ford Extended Service Pla 24 eme ee li 423 426 Getting assistance outside the U S and Canada 359 Getting roadside assistance 0 s002ccssccsenssseseos scene 323 Getting the service youneed 355 Ordering additional owner s literature 361 Utilizing the Mediation Arbitration 02 Ng srren ece 359 D Daytime running lamps see MAMAS sarreria nnn 100 Defrost rear window and rearview IMITON e aE acd 88 windshield isyeen 88 Dipstick automatic transmission ANI AET ET 404 engine ME 378 Doors central unlocking 151 Driving restrictions 35 Driving under special CONGILIONS elemi seren 318 320 SANG KE Oem ep e a fee 319 SNOW and ICE ssi cesdeccdwcescasecsees 321 through water 319 322 DVD if equipped 50 IDV D S YSTCIN 2 akay seksin 67 449 Index E Electronic message center Emergencie
256. g through water determine the depth avoid water higher than the bottom of the wheel rims if possible and proceed slowly If the ignition system gets wet the vehicle may stall Once through water always try the brakes Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as effectively as dry brakes Drying can be improved by moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you are driving in mud Even AWD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud As when you are driving over sand apply the accelerator slowly and avoid spinning your wheels If the vehicle does slide steer in the direction of the slide until you regain control of the vehicle If the engine transmission AWD system components or axles are submerged in water their fluids should be checked and changed if necessary 319 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Driving through deep water may damage the engine or transmission If the front or rear axle is submerged in water the axle lubricant and PTU Power Transfer Unit lubricant should be checked and changed if necessary After driving through mud clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an imbalance that could damage drive components Tread Lightly is an educational program designed to increase public awareness of land use regulati
257. ge of the driver s door The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label When weather temperature changes occur tire inflation pressures also change A 10 F 6 C temperature drop can cause a corresponding drop of 1 psi 7 kPa in inflation pressure Check your tire pressures frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label To check the pressure in your tire s 1 Make sure the tires are cool meaning they are not hot from driving even a mile If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot G e driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km never bleed or reduce air pressure The tires are hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above recommended cold pressures A hot tire at or below recommended cold inflation pressure could be significantly under inflated Note If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire s check and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure 245 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading when you get to the pump It is normal for tires to heat up and the air pressure inside to go up as you drive 2 Remove the cap from the valve on one tire then firmly press the tire gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure 3 Add enough air to
258. ge procedure WARNING When one of the front wheels is off the ground the transaxle alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping off the jack even if the vehicle is in P Park 336 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies WARNING To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire be sure to place the transmission in P Park set the parking brake and block Gn both directions the wheel that is diagonally opposite other side and end of the vehicle to the tire being changed WARNING If the vehicle slips off the jack you or someone else could be seriously injured WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel Note Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked 1 Block the diagonally opposite wheel gL 9 ia 2 Remove wheel cover if eguipped with the lug wrench tip and loosen each wheel lug nut one half turn counterclockwise but do not remove them until the wheel is raised off the ground 337 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies 3 Put the jack in the jack notch next to the tire you are changing Turn the jack handle clockwise until the wheel is completely off the ground 4 Remove the lug nuts with the l
259. gine If the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically have the vehicle checked Before starting the vehicle 1 Make sure all vehicle occupants have buckled their safety belts For more information on safety belts and their proper usage refer to the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter 2 Make sure vehicle accessories are off e Make sure the parking brake is set 277 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving e Make sure the gearshift lever is in P Park Push button start system Your vehicle is equipped with the push button start system you can start your vehicle by pressing the start button in combination with the brake pedal The start button is located on the instrument panel to the right of the steering wheel Note To start your vehicle your intelligent access key IA key must be present inside the vehicle Starting the engine 1 Press the START STOP button for any length of time while applying the brake pedal Your vehicle has a computer assisted cranking system that assists in starting the engine After releasing the button from the 4 start position the engine may continue cranking for up to 10 seconds or until the vehicle starts Note You cannot immediately start your vehicle from the on mode you must first switch the vehicle off Note The indicator light on the start button will illuminate when the vehicle is in on mode and when the engine is started 2
260. gine to relearn its idle trim the idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle trim is eventually relearned 383 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed the clock and radio settings must be reset once the battery is reconnected e Always dispose of automotive a batteries in a responsible manner s S Follow your local authorized Y G standards for disposal Call your 4 local authorized recycling center to find out more about recycling automotive batteries RECYCLE ENGINE COOLANT Checking engine coolant The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the intervals listed in scheduled maintenance information The coolant concentration should be maintained at 50 50 coolant and distilled water which equates to a freeze point of 34 F 36 C Coolant concentration testing is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester The level of coolant should be maintained at the FULL COLD level or within the COLD FILL RANGE in the coolant reservoir If the level falls below add coolant per the instructions in the Adding engine coolant section Your vehicle was factory filled with a 50 50 engine coolant and water concentration If the concentration of coolant falls below 40 or above 60 the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly A 50 50 mixture of coolant
261. h the mp3 extension will be played Other files will be ignored T nme by the system This enables you to use the same MP3 disc for a variety L Si mps of tasks on your work computer L mp3 home computer and your in vehicle system Fr Si mp3 6 L mp3 0 LF PE doc E ppt Z xls In track mode the system will display and play the structure as if it were only one level deep all mp3 files will be played regardless of being in a specific folder In folder mode the system will only play the mp3 files in the current folder Satellite radio if activated SIRIUS satellite radio service SIRIUS satellite radio is a subscription based satellite radio service that broadcasts a variety of music sports news weather traffic and entertainment programming Your factory installed SIRIUS satellite radio system includes hardware and a limited subscription term which begins on the date of sale or lease of the vehicle Refer to your authorized dealer for availability For more information on extended subscription terms a service fee is required the online media player and a complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels and other features please visit www sirius com in the United States www sirius canada ca in Canada or call SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474 64 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Satellite radio reception fac
262. hat are non adjustable Note Please read the warnings listed at the beginning of this chapter Six passenger second row outboard head restraints The non adjustable head restraints consist of e a trimmed energy absorbing foam and structure 1 e two steel stems 2 e and two guide sleeve unlock remove buttons 8 178 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints To remove the non adjustable head restraint do the following 1 Simultaneously press and hold both unlock remove buttons then pull up on the head restraint A C2 lt gt A To reinstall the non adjustable head restraint do the following 1 Insert the two stems into the guide sleeve collars 2 Push the head restraint down until it locks Seven passenger second row outboard head restraints The non adjustable head restraints consist of e a trimmed energy absorbing foam and structure 1 e two steel stems 2 e and one guide sleeve unlock remove button 8 179 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints To remove the non adjustable head restraint do the following 1 Press and hold the unlock remove button then pull up on the head restraint 4 To reinstall the non adjustable head restraint do the following 1 Insert the two stems into the guide sleeve collars 2 Push the head restraint down until it locks
263. hat children and or pets are not in the proximity of the window openings Press and pull the switches to open and close windows e Press down to the first detent gt and hold the switch to open AUTO AUTO e Pull up to the first detent and hold the switch to close Rear window buffeting When one or both of the rear windows are open the vehicle may demonstrate a wind throb or buffeting noise This noise can be alleviated by lowering a front window approximately two to three inches One touch up or down all windows This feature allows the windows to open or close fully without holding the control down To operate one touch down press the switch completely down to the second detent and release quickly The window will open fully Momentarily press the switch to any position to stop the window operation To operate one touch up pull the switch completely up to the second detent and release quickly The window will close fully Momentarily press the switch to any position to stop the window operation Global open windows You can open the vehicle s windows by using the C control on the remote transmitter Press and hold the C control on the transmitter to begin to open the windows For the transmitter pressing either the or control on the transmitter will stop all motion Note The ignition must be off and the accessory delay feature must not be activated in order for this feature to opera
264. he liftgate with the a A transmitter or power door unlock control If the Intelligent Access transmitter is within 3 feet 1 meter of the liftgate the liftgate will unlock automatically 2 Press the control button located on the surface above the license plate Note For the best performance allow the power system to open the liftgate after pressing the control Manually pushing or pulling the liftgate may activate the system s obstacle detection feature and stop the power operation To power close the liftgate with the rear cargo area control button Press and release the control on the left rear quarter panel to close the liftgate Note The rear cargo area control button is disabled when the liftgate is latched WARNING Keep clear of the liftgate when activating the rear switch Note The liftgate movement direction can be reversed with a second press of the instrument panel or the rear cargo area control button or a second double press of the transmitter button To manually operate the liftgate 1 Disable the liftgate power function Refer to the Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter 2 Open and close the liftgate as you would a standard liftgate Note In case of operation in extreme cold 40 F 40 C or on extreme inclines manual operation of the liftgate is suggested 140 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Obstacle detection
265. headlamps are turned on 2 D Heads up display if equipped se A red bar will illuminate on the windshield in certain instances when using adaptive cruise control and or O N the collision warning system It will also illuminate momentarily when you start your vehicle to make sure the display works See the Driving chapter for more information Key in ignition warning chime Sounds when the key is left in the ignition in the off or accessory position and the driver s door is opened Headlamps on warning chime Sounds when the headlamps or parking lamps are on the ignition is off the key is not in the ignition and the driver s door is opened Parking brake on chime Sounds when the parking brake is left on and the vehicle is driven If the warning stays on after the park brake is off contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible 16 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Message center activation chime Sounds when some warning messages appear in the message center display for the first time GAUGES OOOO00000 OOOOOOo00 00000 oo000 Speedometer Indicates the current vehicle speed OOOO00000 OOO000000 OOOO OO000 Engine coolant temperature gauge Indicates engine coolant aE temperature At normal operating A temperature the needle will be in the normal range between H and J
266. hich allows you to save desired tracks or CDs to the hard drive for later access The hard drive can store up to 10 GB 164 hours approximately 2 472 tracks of music The system contains a Gracenote media database that allows for display of song title album title and album cover art After saving music to the hard drive you can access and play your music by specific tracks artists albums or genres You can even choose to create and access your own playlists 46 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Note 1 GB equals one billion bytes 1 000 000 000B Recording saving music to your jukebox 1 Ensure that the system is on 2 Insert a CD into the system The CD tab will appear 3 Select Record on the touchscreen 4 Select either individual tracks or press Select All to record the entire CD Note The system will default to selecting all tracks if none are selected 5 Press Start Recording The progress will show at the bottom of the screen When the recording process is finished the system will save your track s CD to the Jukebox Note If you are not actively listening to the disc being recorded the record rate is much quicker as fast as five minutes Accessing the music in your jukebox Once you have saved music to your jukebox you can then choose several ways to play your favorite music To access 1 Press the MEDIA hard button
267. hill to avoid excessive brake application and brake overheating Do not descend in neutral instead disengage overdrive or manually shift to a lower gear When descending a steep hill avoid sudden hard braking as you could lose control The front wheels have to be turning in order to steer the vehicle Your vehicle has anti lock brakes therefore apply the brakes steadily Do not pump the brakes Driving on snow and ice Note Excessive tire slippage can cause transmission damage AWD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but can skid like any other vehicle Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads turn the steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on snow and ice Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting from a full stop Avoid sudden braking as well Although an AWD vehicle may accelerate better than a two wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice it won t stop any faster because as in other vehicles braking occurs at all four wheels Do not become overconfident as to road conditions Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles for stopping Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower gears In emergency stopping situations apply the brake steadily Since your vehicle is equipped with a four wheel anti lock brake system ABS do not p
268. ht position e Have the person sit upright in the seat centered on the seat cushion with the person s legs comfortably extended e Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for about two minutes This will allow the system to detect that person and enable the passenger s frontal airbag 212 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints e If the indicator lamp remains lit even after this the person should be advised to ride in the rear seat Pass Airbag Off 5 Occupant Tndiciton Vicht Passenger Airbag Empty seat Disabled Small child in child Lit Disabled safety seat or booster Small child with safety Lit Disabled belt buckled or unbuckled WARNING Even with Advanced Restraints Systems children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts it s very important that they continue to sit properly A properly seated occupant sits upright leaning against the seat back and centered on the seat cushion with their feet comfortably extended on the floor Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event For example if an occupant slouches lies down turns sideways sits forward leans forward or sideways or puts one or both feet up the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased WARNING Sitting improperly out of position or with
269. ications and capacities in this chapter for the proper fluid type 403 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications BRAKE FLUID The fluid level will drop slowly as the brakes wear and will rise when the brake components are replaced Fluid levels between the MIN and MAX lines are within the normal operating range there is no need to add fluid If the fluid levels are outside of the normal operating range the performance of the system could be compromised seek service from your authorized dealer immediately TRANSMISSION FLUID Checking automatic transmission fluid Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled intervals for fluid checks and changes Your transmission does not consume fluid However the fluid level should be checked if the transmission is not working properly i e if the transmission slips or shifts slowly or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed To obtain an accurate fluid check drive the vehicle until it is warmed up approximately 20 miles 30 km If your vehicle has been operated for an extended period at high speeds in city traffic during hot weather or pulling a trailer the vehicle should be turned off until normal operating temperatures are reached to allow the fluid to cool before checking Depending on vehicle use cooling times could take up to 30 minutes or longer Ce WARNI
270. ice on the window or seals Window lock The window lock feature allows only ee the driver to operate the power E windows To lock out all the window controls except for the driver s press the right side of the control Press the left side to restore the window controls Accessory delay With accessory delay the radio power windows and moon roof if equipped operate for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned from on to off or until one of the front doors are opened 117 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls INTERIOR MIRROR The interior rear view mirror has two pivot points on the support arm which lets you adjust the mirror up or down and from side to side WARNING Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in motion Automatic dimming interior rear view mirror The interior rear view mirror and a driver s side exterior mirror have an auto dimming function The electronic day night mirrors will change from the normal high reflective state to the non glare darkened state when bright lights glare reach the interior mirror When the interior mirror detects bright light from behind the vehicle the interior rear view mirror and the driver s side exterior mirror will automatically adjust darken to minimize glare The mirrors will automatically return to the normal state whenever the vehicle is placed in R Reverse to ensure a bright clear view wh
271. icle approaches its image will transition from the main mirror and begin to appear in the blind spot mirror 2 As the vehicle leaves the blind spot mirror it will transition to the driver s peripheral field of view 8 WARNING Objects in the blind spot mirror are closer than they appear 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus 309 Driving BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM BLIS WITH CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT CTA IF EQUIPPED The BLIS is a convenience feature that aids the driver in assessing whether a vehicle is within an area on either side of the vehicle extending rearward from the outside mirrors to approximately 10 feet 3 meters beyond the bumper This area is referred to as the blind zone The BLIS will alert the driver to the presence of motorized vehicles in these areas while driving on roads and freeways The system is not designed to prevent contact with other vehicles ee eee eee or objects The system is designed to provide a warning to assist the driver in detecting vehicles in the blind zones The system will not detect infrastructure pedestrians or cyclists WARNING To help avoid injuries NEVER use the BLIS as a replacement for using the side and rear view mirrors and looking over your shoulder before changing lanes BLIS is not a replacement for careful driving and only an assist The BLIS and CTA has a yellow indicator also referred t
272. icle with the compact spare tire installed or if the system is overheating The AWD system will resume normal function and clear this message after driving a short distance with the road tire re installed or after the system is allowed to cool CHECK AWD if equipped Displayed in conjunction with the Throttle Control Transmission AWD ee light when the AWD system is not operating properly If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible ENGINE OIL CHANGE SOON Displayed when the engine oil life remaining is 5 to 1 OIL CHANGE REQUIRED Displayed when the oil life left reaches 0 TRAILER SWAY REDUCE SPEED if equipped Displayed when the trailer sway control has detected trailer sway For more information refer to the Driving chapter for more information INTKEY COULD NOT PROGRAM Displayed when an attempt is made to program a fifth integrated key to the remote keyless entry system For more information on integrated key refer to the Locks and Security chapter in this manual CRUISE ON RADAR READY if equipped Displayed when the driver pressed the cruise On Off control and ACC was off CRUISE OFF if equipped Displayed when the driver pressed the Cruise On Off control and ACC was on SET XXX MPH GAP ACC GAP if equipped Displayed when ACC is active and driver has selected a GAP setting using the steering wheel control lt gt button CRUISE OV
273. ides for six passenger vehicles Press the control located at the back of the rear door opening one time to fold the seat back down and tumble the seat forward for access to the 3rd row Exiting the third row seat 1 Stow the second row center head restraint Gf equipped by pressing the head restraint release button while sliding the head restraint fully down 185 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 2 Pull on the strap located on the back of the second row seat This will fold the seatback forward Pull the strap a second time to tumble the seat forward allowing easy exit from the 3rd row seat 3 To return the seatback to the floor from tumbled position rotate the seat down until you hear it latching to the floor 4 To return the seatback to the upright position e Lift the seatback toward the rear of the vehicle and e Rotate the seatback until you ee hear a click locking it in the Q upright position ee Note The seatback will not raise if the rear latch hooks are not properly engaged to the floor striker If the seatback does not raise then repeat Steps 3 and 4 5 If the seat has a head restraint pull the head restraint back up to its normal adjusted position 186 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Ensure that the rear latch hooks are properly engaged with the floor striker
274. if activated 15 MEDIA Press MEDIA to access mea the media menu Press while the media menu is active to step through the available media sources of CD DVD Jukebox User Device Rear DVD Gf equipped and Rear AUX if equipped 16 SOUND Press SOUND to access the sound menu Press while the sound menu is active to step through the sound menu tabs of Bass Treble Balance Fade SCV Speed compensated volume DSP Digital Signal Processing Visualizer and THX Demo if equipped 17 CD DVD slot Insert a CD or DVD label side up After the system initializes the screen will be divided in two sections e Status bars This is the top and bottom portion of screen that displays the clock or date and useful information depending on the current mode 34 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems e Display area The interactive screen that is activated by finger touch and changes depending on current system operation Graphical buttons are displayed in this area depending on the current screen for you to make choices Driving restrictions In order to prevent the system from distracting you while driving access to certain functions are restricted when the vehicle is traveling above 5 mph 8 km h Restricted functions include e Scrolling of long lists e Jukebox restrictions such as creating editing playlists sorting playlists editing track artist and album names e Uploading photogr
275. if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Switch the ignition off and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle WARNING If the parking brake is fully released but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated the brakes may not be working properly See your authorized dealer WARNING Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph 56 km h The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander Emergency maneuvers e In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn must be made remember to avoid over driving your vehicle i e turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid the emergency Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control not more Additionally smooth variations of the accelerator and or brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are called for Avoid abrupt steering acceleration or braking which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover and or personal injury Use all available road surface to return the vehicle to a safe direction of travel e In the event of an emergency stop avoid skidding the tires and do not attempt any sharp st
276. igh back booster seat would be a better choice 237 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Children and booster seats vary in size and shape Choose a booster that keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips never up across the stomach and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and rest snugly near the center of the shoulder The drawings below compare the ideal fit center to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to the neck and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder The drawings below also show how the lap belt should be low and snug across the child s hips If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat placing a rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this condition Do not introduce any item thicker than this under the booster seat Check with the booster seat manufacturer s instructions The importance of shoulder belts Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child s head hitting a hard surface in a collision For this reason you should never use a booster seat with a lap belt only It is generally best to use a booster seat with lap shoulder belts in the back seat Move a child to a different seating location if the shoulder belt does not stay positioned on the shoulder during use 238 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints
277. ight In R Reverse ABS and the engine traction control and brake traction control features will continue to function however ESC and RSC are disabled 288 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving AdvanceTrac Features Control SB OU control Message switch off center dis functions light 8 play Turns on Default at System during Nothing start up Initialization bulb displayed Enabled Enabled check Traction con TRACTION CONTROL Enabled Disabled trol OFF OFF Control icon ao ADVANCE A E again after Trac fully TRAC ON Enabled Enabled d i enabled eactiva tion Trailer sway control if equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with trailer sway control When properly equipped trailer sway control will use the vehicle s AdvanceTrac with RSC system to detect and mitigate trailer sway by applying brake force at individual wheels and if necessary by reducing engine power Note Trailer sway control does not prevent a trailer from swaying it mitigates the sway from increasing once it has occurred TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying If you are experiencing trailer sway it is likely that the trailer is improperly loaded for the correct tongue weight or the speed of the vehicle and trailer is too high Pull the vehicle trailer over to a safe location to check the trailer weight distribution and tongue load and reduce speed to a safe level while towing If trailer sway is exp
278. imultaneously on the front audio controls The control level will cycle each time the buttons are pressed simultaneously The three states are described as FULL enabled The FES has control over the primary speaker and secondary headphone audio sources LOCKED disabled The FES buttons are locked and all FES button presses are ignored by the radio and the FES except for load When the DVD system is ON you can then press the memory preset controls 2 and 4 simultaneously to toggle between Single Play and Dual Play In Single Play mode all speakers listen to the same media In Dual Play mode rear seat passengers can use the infrared wireless or wired not included headphones to listen to a different playing media than the front seat passengers 83 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems General information Note DVDs are formatted by regions US and Canada systems can only play region 1 DVDs and Mexico systems can only play region 4 DVDs Systems sold in vehicles targeted for other parts of the world would have different regions If a playback problem is encountered please ensure that you are using a disc designed for your vehicle The region coding can be found stamped on the disc or on the box and can say region 1 or region 4 etc They may also be marked by a numerical symbol Macrovision This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected
279. imum benefit from them Glossary of tire terminology e Tire label A label showing the OE Original Equipment tire sizes recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle can carry e Tire Identification Number TIN A number on the sidewall of each tire providing information about the tire brand and manufacturing plant tire size and date of manufacture Also referred to as DOT code e Inflation pressure A measure of the amount of air in a tire e Standard load A class of P metric or Metric tires designed to carry a maximum load at 35 psi 87 psi 2 5 bar for Metric tires Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire s load carrying capability 243 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading e Extra load A class of P metric or Metric tires designed to carry a heavier maximum load at 41 psi 43 psi 2 9 bar for Metric tires Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire s load carrying capability e kPa Kilopascal a metric unit of air pressure e PSI Pounds per square inch a standard unit of air pressure e Cold inflation pressure The tire pressure when the vehicle has been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile 1 6 km e Recommended inflation pressure The cold inflation pressure found on the Safety Compliance Certificati
280. in the message center WARNING Make sure that the liftgate is closed to prevent exhaust fumes from being drawn into the vehicle This will also prevent passengers and cargo from falling out If you must drive with the liftgate door open keep the vehicle well ventilated so outside air comes into the vehicle 141 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls CARGO AREA FEATURES Cargo net if equipped The cargo pouch net secures lightweight objects in the cargo area Attach the net to the anchors provided Do not put more than 50 Ib 22 kg in the net WARNING The cargo net is not designed to restrain objects during a collision or heavy braking Cargo shade if eguipped If your vehicle has a cargo shade you can use it to cover items in the cargo area of your vehicle Note Both of the third row outboard safety belts must be placed in the stowage clips to prevent potential wrinkling of the cargo shade Refer to Safety restraints in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter To install the shade e Insert the ends of the cargo shade into the mounting features located behind the rear seat on the rear trim panels To operate the shade 1 Grasp the rear edge of the cargo shade and pull rearward 2 Secure both ends of the support rod into the retention slots located on the rear quarter trim panels 142 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing U
281. ine can be re started Take your vehicle to a service facility as soon as possible to minimize engine damage When fail safe mode is activated You have limited engine power when in the fail safe mode so drive the vehicle with caution The vehicle will not be able to maintain high speed operation and the engine will run rough Remember that the engine is capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine damage therefore 1 Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine 2 Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to a service facility 3 If this is not possible wait a short period for the engine to cool 4 Check the coolant level and replenish if low 390 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications WARNING Fail safe mode is for use during emergencies only Operate the vehicle in fail safe mode only as long as necessary to bring the vehicle to rest in a safe location and seek immediate repairs When in fail safe mode the vehicle will have limited power will not be able to maintain high speed operation and may completely shut down without warning potentially losing engine power power steering assist and power brake assist which may increase the possibility of a crash resulting in serious injury WARNING Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot 5 Re start the engine and take your vehicle to a service facility
282. ing and possible engine damage Recycled engine coolant Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine coolant since a Ford approved recycling process is not yet available Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate manner Follow your community s regulations and standards for recycling and disposing of automotive fluids Coolant refill capacity To find out how much fluid your vehicle s cooling system can hold refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant in this section 387 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Severe climates If you drive in extremely cold climates less than 34 F 36 C e It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration above 50 e NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60 e A coolant concentration of 60 will provide freeze point protection down to 62 F 52 C Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60 will decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage e If available refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the winter months If you drive in extremely hot climates e It is still nec
283. ing capability e All Wheel driving capability Gf applicable e Load leveling adjustment if applicable When driving with the full size dissimilar spare tire wheel additional caution should be given to e Towing a trailer e Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body e Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack Drive cautiously when using a full size dissimilar spare tire wheel and seek service as soon as possible 335 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Stopping and securing the vehicle 1 Park on a level surface set the parking brake and activate hazard flashers 2 Place gearshift lever in P Park and turn engine off Removing the spare tire and jack If the 3rd row seat is stowed in the floor you will need to unstow it to access the spare tire and jack Refer to Unstowing the third row seat in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter for this procedure 1 Remove the carpeted floor panel located in the rear of the vehicle remove the wing nut that secures the spare tire by turning it counterclockwise 2 Lift and remove the spare tire from the trunk 3 Remove the second wing nut that secures the jack retention bracket by turning it counterclockwise remove the jack kit from the vehicle 4 Remove the jack L shaped bolt and the wrench from the felt bag Fold down the wrench socket to use to loosen the lug nuts and to operate the jack Tire chan
284. ing indicates service is due Example 1 The OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message comes on at 28 751 miles 46 270 km perform the 30 000 mile 48 000 km automatic transmission fluid replacement Example 2 The OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message has not come on but the odometer reads 30 000 miles 48 000 km perform the engine air filter replacement i e Intelligent Oil Life Monitor was reset at 25 000 miles 40 000 km Replace cabin air filter if equipped 32 000 km 48 000 km equipped Every 100 000 miles 160 000 km Every 150 000 miles Change automatic transmission fluid and filter 240 000 km filter not required on 6F35 6F50 DPS6 and AWF 21 transmissions consult dealer for requirements RWD vehicles Replace accessory drive belt s if not replaced Replace timing belt Fiesta Failure to replace timing belt can cause internal engine damage Mnitial replacement at 100 000 miles 160 000 km or 72 months every 50 000 miles 80 000 km or 36 months thereafter Perform a follow up inspection at 120 000 miles 192 000 km 436 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance schedule log DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace 2011 MKT mkt O
285. ing with the seat e Remove the obstruction s Gf found e Restart the vehicle e Wait at least two minutes and verify that the airbag readiness lamp is no longer illuminated e If the airbag readiness lamp remains illuminated this may or may not be a problem due to the front passenger sensing system DO NOT attempt to repair or service the system take your vehicle immediately to an authorized dealer If it is necessary to modify an advanced front airbag system to accommodate a person with disabilities contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center at the phone number shown in the Customer Assistance chapter of this Owner s Guide WARNING Any alteration modification to the front passenger seat may affect the performance of the front passenger sensing system Determining if the system is operational The supplemental restraint system uses a warning indicator light in the instrument cluster or a backup tone to indicate the condition of the system Refer to the Warning lights and chimes section in the Instrument Cluster chapter Routine maintenance of the airbag is not required 215 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following e The readiness light same light e for front and side airbag system will either flash or stay lit IN e The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is turn
286. install the valve cap on the tire valve place the tube cap on the metal connector and return the kit to the stowage area 10 Immediately and cautiously drive the vehicle 4 miles 6 km to distribute the sealant evenly inside the tire Do not exceed 50 mph 80 km h Note If you experience any unusual vibration ride disturbance or noise while driving reduce your speed until you can safely pull off to the side of the road to call for roadside assistance Do not proceed to the second stage of this operation 11 After 4 miles 6 km stop and check the tire pressure See Second stage Checking tire pressure Second stage Checking tire pressure Check the air pressure of your tires as follows 1 Remove the valve cap from the tire valve 2 Unhook the black hose from the side of the compressor and fasten firmly on the valve stem by turning clockwise WARNING If you are proceeding from the First stage Reinflating the tire with sealing compound and air section and have injected sealant in the tire and the pressure is below 20 psi 1 4 bar stop and call roadside assistance If tire pressure is above 20 psi 1 4 bar continue to the next step 3 Turn the dial clockwise to the air position Turn on the kit by pressing the on off button 345 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies 4 Adjust the tire to the recommended inflation pressure from the tire label located on the driver s door or door
287. into the guide sleeve collars ee 2 Push the head restraint down until it locks Properly adjust the head restraint so that the top of the head restraint is even with the top of your head and positioned as close as possible to the back of your head For occupants of extremely tall stature adjust the head restraint to its full up position Adjusting second row bucket and bench seat back Lift the handle to adjust seatback Using same control will fold the seatback flat Note For the bench seat only make sure the center safety belt is unbuckled before folding the seatback Adjusting second row seats six passenger vehicles only Lift the control to adjust the seat forward or backward gt gt N 182 2011 MKT mki Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Using the second row power lumbar support six passenger vehicles only The power lumbar control is located on the outboard side of the seat Press the forward side of the control A to adjust firmness A Press the rearward side of the control to adjust softness r r Accessing the third row seats Fold and tumble the second row seat to access the third row Remove items from the second row seat and ensure that no bulky objects such as purses or briefcases are on the floor in front of the second row seats before tumbling them For second row bench seats make sure the center safety belt is unbuc
288. ion The fact that the airbags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the system Rather it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation Side airbags are designed to inflate in side impact collisions not roll over rear impact frontal or near frontal collisions unless the collision causes sufficient lateral deceleration 217 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Several air bag system components get hot after inflation Do not touch them after inflation WARNING If the side airbag has deployed the airbag will not function again The side airbag system including the seat must be inspected and serviced by an authorized dealer If the airbag is not replaced the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a collision Safety Canopy System 40 WARNING Do not place objects or mount eguipment on or near the headliner at the siderail that may come into contact with a deploying Safety Canopy Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a collision WARNING Do not lean your head on the door The Safety Canopy could injure you as it deploys from the headliner WARNING Do not attempt to service repair or modify the Safety Canopy System its fuses the A B C or D pillar trim or the headliner on a vehicle containing a Safety Cano
289. ion and 225 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints training to ensure that all children ages 0 to 16 are properly restrained in the correct restraint system Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician CPST and your pediatrician to make sure your seat is appropriate for your child and properly installed in the vehicle To locate a child seat fitting station and CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1 888 327 4236 or on the internet at http Wwww nhtsa dot gov In Canada check with your local St John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further information contact your provincial ministry of transportation your local St John Ambulance office at http Awww sfa ca or Transport Canada at 1 800 333 0371 Chttp www tc gc ca Follow all the safety restraint and airbag precautions that apply to adult passengers in your vehicle If the child is the proper height age and weight as specified by your child safety seat or booster manufacturer fits the restraint and can be restrained properly then restrain the child in the child safety seat or with the belt positioning booster Remember that child seats and belt positioning boosters vary and may be designed to fit children of different heights ages and weights Children who are too large for child safety seats or belt positioning boosters as specified by your child safety seat manufacturer shoul
290. ions on how to use refer to Front row heated and cooled seats earlier in this chapter Second row climate controlled seats air filter replacement The climate controlled seat system includes air filters that must be replaced periodically Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for more information There is an air filter located under the rear of each second row seat You can tumble the seat forward to access the filter For instructions on how to remove and install the air filter see Climate controlled seats air filter replacement earlier in this chapter Stowing the third row seat 1 Remove all objects from the seat and stowage tub 2 From the rear of the vehicle stow the head restraints by pulling the strap located on the middle of the seatback just below the head restraint then fold seatback by pulling and holding the number 1 strap while pushing the seatback forward Release strap once seatback starts rotating forward 3 Release the cushion latches by pulling the number 2 strap while pulling on the strap located at the top of the seatback to tumble the seat all the way into the tub in the floor Note Do not use the seat anchors as cargo tie downs 188 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Note Do not use the third row seatback as a load floor when the eS seatback is folded d N Note In order to allow the seat to latch in the stowed po
291. iring brake lines or fuel lines e Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h with tire cables on your vehicle Drive cautiously If you hear the cables rub or bang against your vehicle stop and retighten the cables If this does not work remove the cables to prevent damage to your vehicle 262 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading e Remove the tire cables when they are no longer needed Do not use tire cables on dry roads VEHICLE LOADING WITH AND WITHOUT A TRAILER This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and or trailer to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating capability with or without a trailer Properly loading your vehicle will provide maximum return of vehicle design performance Before loading your vehicle familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining your vehicle s weight ratings with or without a trailer from the vehicle s Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label Base Curb Weight is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all standard equipment It does not include passengers cargo or optional equipment Vehicle Curb Weight is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket equipment 263 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading PAYLOAD Payload is the combined weigh
292. is condition may occur if the vehicle was operated in extreme conditions with excessive wheel slip such as deep sand To resume normal AWD function as soon as possible stop the vehicle in a safe 316 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving location and allow it to idle The AWD OFF message will turn off when the system cools and normal AWD function returns Note Your AWD vehicle is not intended for off road use The AWD feature gives your vehicle some limited off road capabilities in which driving surfaces are relatively level obstruction free and otherwise similar to normal on road driving conditions Operating your vehicle under other than those conditions could subject the vehicle to excessive stress which might result in damage which is not covered under your warranty Driving on slippery surfaces with AWD vehicles AWD vehicles are specially equipped for driving on sand snow mud and rough roads and have operating characteristics that are somewhat different from conventional vehicles both on and off the highway When driving at slow speeds off highway under high outside temperatures use a low gear when possible Lower gear operation will maximize the engine and transmission cooling capability Under severe operating conditions the A C may cycle on and off to protect overheating of the engine Basic operating principles e Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering charac
293. isted on the Roadside Assistance Card included in your Owner Guide portfolio Roadside assistance will cover e a flat tire change with a good spare except vehicles that have been supplied with a tire inflation kit e battery jump start e lock out assistance key replacement cost is the customer s responsibility fuel delivery Independent Service Contractors if not prohibited by state local or municipal law shall deliver up to 2 0 gallons 7 5L of gasoline or 5 0 gallons 18 9L of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle Fuel delivery service is limited to two no charge occurrences within a 12 month period e winch out available within 100 feet 80 5 meters of a paved or county maintained road no recoveries e towing Ford Mercury Lincoln eligible vehicle towed to an authorized dealer within 35 miles 56 km of the disablement location or to the nearest authorized dealer If a member requests to be towed to an authorized dealer more than 35 miles 56 km from the disablement location the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs in excess of 35 miles 56 km Trailers shall be covered up to 200 if the disabled eligible vehicle requires service at the nearest authorized dealer If the trailer is disabled but the towing vehicle is operational the trailer does not qualify for any roadside services Canadian customers refer to your Warranty Guide or visit our website at www ford ca for information on 323
294. it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation The safety canopy is designed to inflate in certain side impact collisions or rollover events not in rear impact frontal or near frontal collisions unless the collision causes sufficient lateral deceleration or rollover WARNING If the Safety Canopy System has deployed the safety canopy will not function again unless replaced The Safety Canopy System including the A B C and D pillar trim and headliner must be inspected and serviced by an authorized dealer If the safety canopy is not replaced it will not function again which will increase the risk of injury in a future collision 220 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Determining if the system is operational The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to indicate the condition of the system Refer to the Airbag readiness section in the Instrument Cluster chapter Routine maintenance of the airbag is not required Any difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following e The readiness airbag light same light as for front airbag system will either flash or stay lit e The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is turned on e A series of five beeps will be heard The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem and light are repaired If any of these thi
295. ith extended use the flasher may run down your battery FUEL PUMP SHUT OFF In the event of a moderate to severe collision this vehicle is equipped with a fuel pump shut off feature that stops the flow of fuel to the engine Not every impact will cause a shut off 324 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Should your vehicle shut off after a collision due to this feature you may restart your vehicle by doing the following 1 Turn the ignition switch to the off position 2 Turn the ignition switch to the on position In some instances the vehicle may not restart the first time you try to restart and may take one additional attempt WARNING Failure to inspect and if necessary repair fuel leaks after a collision may increase the risk of fire and serious injury Ford Motor Company recommends that the fuel system be inspected by an authorized dealer after any collision FUSES AND RELAYS Fuses If electrical components in the vehicle are not working a fuse may have blown Blown fuses are identified by a broken wire within the fuse Check the appropriate fuses before replacing any electrical components Note Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage rating Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a fire 325 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roa
296. itter if desired Replacing the battery The intelligent access key IA key uses one coin type three volt lithium battery CR2032 or equivalent 160 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security To replace the battery 1 Remove the backup key from the transmitter then twist a thin coin in the slot hidden behind the backup key slot to remove the battery cover Note Do not wipe off any grease on the battery terminals or on the back surface of the circuit board 2 Remove the old battery Note Please refer to local regulations when disposing of transmitter batteries 3 Insert the new battery Refer to the instructions inside the TA key for the correct orientation of the battery Press the battery down to ensure that the battery is fully seated in the battery housing cavity 4 Snap the battery cover back onto the transmitter and install the backup key Note Replacement of the battery will not cause the IA key to become de programmed from your vehicle They should operate normally after battery replacement Replacing lost intelligent access keys IA keys If you would like to have your IA keys reprogrammed because you lost one or would like to buy additional transmitters you can either reprogram them yourself or take all transmitters to your authorized dealer for reprogramming How to reprogram your intelligent access keys IA keys To program a new IA keys yourself refer to SecuriL
297. iving city or highway This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle s fuel 398 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications economy under current driving conditions Additionally keeping records during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel economy In general lower temperatures give lower fuel economy Driving style good driving and fuel economy habits Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change a number of variables and improve your fuel economy Habits e Smooth moderate operation can yield up to 10 savings in fuel e Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel economy e Idling for long periods of time greater than one minute may waste fuel e Anticipate stopping slowing down may eliminate the need to stop e Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy e Slow down gradually e Driving at reasonable speeds traveling at 55 mph 88 km h uses 15 less fuel than traveling at 65 mph 105 km h e Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy e Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy e You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if unnecessary shifting between the top gears occurs Unnecessary shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel economy e Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may reduce fuel
298. jamb area Pressing the deflation button near the sealant canister removes air from the tire Note The tire pressure has to be checked with the compressor in the OFF position to get the correct tire pressure reading 5 Turn the compressor off by pressing the on off button 6 Unplug the hoses re install the valve cap on the tire and return the kit to the stowage area WARNING The power plug may get hot after use and should be handled carefully while unplugging What to do after the tire has been sealed After using the temporary mobility kit to seal your tire you will need to replace the sealant canister and clear tube hose Sealing compound and spare parts can be obtained and replaced at an authorized Ford Motor Company dealership or tire dealer Empty sealant bottles may be disposed of at home however liquid residue from the sealing compound should be disposed by your local Ford Motor Company dealership or tire dealer or in accordance with local waste disposal regulations Note After the sealing compound has been used the maximum vehicle speed is 50 mph 80 km h and the maximum driving distance is 120 miles 200 km The sealed tire should be inspected immediately Note After sealant use the TPMS sensor and valve stem on the wheel must be replaced by an authorized Ford dealer You can check the tire pressure any time within the 120 miles 200 km by performing the procedure from Second stage Checking tire press
299. jury or ejection Study your Owner s Guide for specific information about equipment features instructions for safe driving and additional precautions to reduce the risk of an accident or serious injury VEHICLE CHARACTERISTICS All wheel drive AWD system if equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a full time all wheel drive AWD system With the AWD option power will be delivered to the front wheels and distributed to the rear wheels as needed This increases traction which may enable you to safely drive over terrain and road conditions that a conventional two wheel drive vehicle cannot The AWD system is active all the time and requires no input from the operator Note Your AWD vehicle is not intended for off road use The AWD feature gives your vehicle some limited off road capabilities in which 240 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading driving surfaces are relatively level obstruction free and otherwise similar to normal on road driving conditions Operating your vehicle under other than those conditions could subject the vehicle to excessive stress which might result in damage which is not covered under your warranty For AWD vehicles a spare tire of a different size other than the tire provided should never be used A dissimilar spare tire size other than the spare tire provided or major dissimilar tire sized between the front and rear axles could cause the AWD system to s
300. keyless entry keypad or memory switch on the driver s door if equipped with memory feature Refer to Front seating in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter SPEED CONTROL With speed control set you can maintain a set speed without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal WARNING Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding slippery or unpaved 120 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Using speed control The speed controls are located on the steering wheel The following buttons work with speed control RESUME Press to resume a set speed SET Press to increase the set speed SET Press to decrease the set speed OFF ON Press to turn speed control off or on Setting speed control To set speed control 1 Press and release ON 2 Accelerate to the desired speed 3 Press and release SET or SET 4 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal 5 The indicator light on the instrument cluster will turn on Note e Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down a steep hill e If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill you may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed e If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph 16 km h below your set speed on an uphill your speed control will disengage Disengaging speed conirol Press the brake pedal to disengage the speed contro
301. kg or Use a child safety seat less generally age four or younger sometimes called an infant carrier convertible seat or toddler seat Small Children who have outgrown or no Use a belt positioning children longer properly fit in a child safety booster seat seat generally children who are less than 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters tall are greater than age four 4 and less than age twelve 12 and between 40 Ib 18 kg and 80 lb 86 kg and upward to 100 Ib 45 kg if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer Larger Children who have outgrown or no Use a vehicle safety children longer properly fit in a belt having the lap belt positioning booster seat belt snug and low generally children who are at least across the hips 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters tall or shoulder belt centered greater than 80 Ib 86 kg or 100 Ib across the shoulder 45 kg if recommended by child and chest and restraint manufacturer seatback upright e You are required by law to properly use safety seats for infants and toddlers in the U S and Canada e Many states and provinces require that small children use approved booster seats until they reach age eight a height of 4 ft 9 in 1 45 meters tall or 80 lb 86 kg Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safety of children in your vehicle e When possible always properly restrain children twelve 12 years of age and under in a
302. kled before folding the seatback Note You may have to move the front row seat forward to allow the 2nd row seat to be fully tumbled 1 Lift the handle located on the side of the seat 183 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The seatback will fold flat 2 Lift the handle all the way up until the seat releases from the floor Rotate the seat forward to allow access to the third row 3 To return the seatback to the floor from tumbled position rotate the seat down until you hear it latching to the floor 184 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 4 To return the seatback to the am upright position e Lift the seatback toward the rear oD of the vehicle and e Rotate the seatback until you E hear a click locking it in the Qa upright position S Note The seatback will not raise if the rear latch hooks are not properly engaged to the floor striker If the seatback does not raise then repeat Steps 3 and 4 5 If the seat has a head restraint pull the head restraint back up to its normal adjusted position 2nd row PowerFold and tumble seat WARNING Ensure that the seat is unoccupied when folding it down Folding the seat while occupied could result in occupant injury or damage to the seat This feature is available for the right hand seat on seven passenger vehicles and on both s
303. l Disengaging the speed control will not erase the previous set speed Resuming a set speed Press and release RESUME This will automatically return the vehicle to the previously set speed 121 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Increasing speed while using speed conirol To set a higher speed e Press and hold SET until you get to the desired speed then release You can also use SET to operate the tap up function Press and release SET to increase the vehicle set speed in 1 mph 1 6 km h increments e Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed then press and release SET Reducing speed while using speed control To reduce a set speed e Press and hold SET until you get to the desired speed then release You can also use SET to operate the tap down function Press and release SET to decrease the vehicle set speed in 1 mph 1 6 km h increments Press the brake pedal until the desired vehicle speed is reached then press SET Turning off speed control To turn off the speed control press OFF or turn off the ignition Note When you turn off the speed control or the ignition your speed control set speed memory is erased ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL ACC IF EQUIPPED Adaptive cruise control is much like speed control only this system is designed to automatically adjust your speed to maintain a proper distance between you and the vehicle in front of
304. l Refer to Engine coolant in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter WARNING Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot Low fuel RTT Illuminates when the fuel level in the fuel tank is at FN or near empty Refer to Fuel gauge in this chapter Low washer fluid RTT sen Illuminates when the washer level in the washer fluid reservoir is low Door ajar RTT Illuminates when the ignition is in the run position and any door is open RTT Iluminates when a powertrain or an AWD fault has been detected Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Service engine soon The service engine soon indicator light illuminates when the ignition is first turned on to check the bulb and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for Inspection Maintenance I M testing Normally the service engine soon light will stay on until the engine is cranked then turn itself off if no malfunctions are present However if after 15 seconds the service engine soon light blinks eight times it means that the vehicle is not ready for I M testing See the Readiness for Inspection Maintenance I M testing in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter ef 4 Throttle control transmission gt 13 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the on board diagnostics system OBD II has detected a malfunction Refe
305. l and adjust the tension in the weight distributing bars so that the height of the front fender is approximately halfway between HI and H2 6 Check that the trailer is level If not level adjust the ball height accordingly and repeat Steps 3 6 WARNING Do not adjust a weight distributing hitch to any position where the rear bumper of the vehicle is higher than it was before attaching the trailer Doing so will defeat the function of the weight distributing hitch which may cause unpredictable handling and could result in serious personal injury Safety chains Always connect the trailer s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch To connect the trailer s safety chains cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners If you use a rental trailer follow the instructions that the rental agency gives to you Do not attach safety chains to the bumper Trailer brakes Electric brakes and manual automatic or surge type trailer brakes are safe if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer s specifications The trailer brakes must meet local and Federal regulations 272 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading WARNING Do not connect a trailer s hydraulic brake system directly to your vehicle s brake system Your vehicle may not have enough braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase The b
306. l still function normally if you enter your personal entry code or factory set code However if your transmitter is within range of the driver s door an Intelligent Access unlock will also occur each time you press any number on the keypad Note that this additional unlock will not impact keypad functionality and you can still enter your code and perform all keypad functions unlock lock liftgate release Programming a personal entry code and keypad association to memory seats mirrors and adjustable pedals To create your own personal entry code 1 Enter the factory set code 2 Within five seconds touch the 1 e 2 on the keypad 3 Enter your personal 5 digit code Each number must be entered within five seconds of each other 4 For memory recall feature enter the sixth digit 1 e 2 to store driver 1 settings or 3 e 4 to store driver 2 settings 163 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Note Touching 5 e 6 7 e 8 or 9 e 0 keypad numbers as a sixth digit will not recall a driver memory setting Note The factory set code cannot be associated with a memory setting 5 The doors will lock then unlock to confirm that your personal entry code has been programmed to the module Tips e Do not set a code that uses five of the same number e Do not use five numbers in sequential order e The factory set code will work even if you have set your own personal code Erasing personal code
307. lamps 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus 103 Lights Your vehicle has second row lamps located within the grab handles Press the lens to turn on the lamps G59 Cargo lamp The cargo lamp has a switch with three positions on off and center Cy Le With the switch in the on position the lamp will stay on all the time In the off position the lamp will stay off even when the doors are opened With the switch in the center position the lamp will turn on when the doors are opened and the top of the panel dimmer control is pressed to the full on position Ambient lighting Illuminates footwells and cupholders with a choice of several colors The ambient lighting control is located on the instrument panel To cycle through the color choices or to turn off press and release this control 104 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights Press and release this control to cycle through the intensity settings The lights come on whenever the ignition is in either on or in the accessory position and the parking lamps or headlamps are on Note The ambient lights will stay on until the ignition is placed in the off position and either of the front doors are opened or the accessory delay timer expires BULB REPLACEMENT Lamp assembly condensation Exterior lamps are vented to accommodate normal changes in pressure Con
308. lant level is normal you may restart your engine and continue on 5 If the coolant is low add coolant restart the engine and take your vehicle to an authorized dealer See Adding engine coolant in this chapter for more information Refer to fail safe cooling for additional information 389 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications What you should know about fail safe cooling If the engine coolant supply is depleted this feature allows the vehicle to be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred The fail safe distance depends on ambient temperatures vehicle load and terrain How fail safe cooling works If the engine begins to overheat e The engine coolant temperature gauge will move to the red hot area e The coolant temperature warning light will illuminate The service engine soon K indicator will illuminate If the engine reaches a preset over temperature condition the engine will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation Each disabled cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine When this occurs the vehicle will still operate However e The engine power will be limited e The air conditioning system will be disabled Continued operation will increase the engine temperature and the engine will completely shut down causing steering and braking effort to increase Once the engine temperature cools the eng
309. lder eRear bumper protector e Conversation mirror e Cargo net eCargo organization and management 421 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Accessories Peace of mind eRemote start e Vehicle tracking and recovery eCargo area protector e Protective seat covers e Wheel locks e Windshield wiper shaker e Locking fuel plug for capless fuel systems Ford Licensed Accessories FLA are warranted by the accessory manufacturer s warranty Ford Licensed Accessories are fully designed and developed by the accessory manufacturer and have not been designed or tested to Ford Motor Company engineering requirements Contact your Ford dealer for details regarding the manufacturer s limited warranty and or a copy of the FLA product limited warranty offered by the accessory manufacturer For maximum vehicle performance keep the following information in mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle e When adding accessories equipment passengers and luggage to your vehicle do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of the front or rear axle GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety Compliance Certification label Consult your authorized dealer for specific weight information e The Federal Communications Commission FCC and Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission CRTC regulate the use of mobile communications systems such as two way radios telephones and theft alarms that are eq
310. le Children and airbags Children must always be properly restrained Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of injury in a collision WARNING Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in front of an active Y airbag If you must use a NN forward facing child seat in the front seat move the seat all the way back How does the airbag supplemental restraint system work The airbag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains longitudinal deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to close an electrical circuit that initiates airbag inflation The fact that the airbags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the system Rather it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation Front airbags are designed to inflate in 209 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints frontal and near frontal collisions not rollover side impact or rear impacts unless the collision causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon activation After airbag deployment it is normal to notice a smoke like powdery residue or smell the burnt propellant This
311. le play Dual play later in this section Note Each headrest monitor is labeled with an identifier either A or B found in the upper right corner of the system 16 MUTE Press to mute the volume of the active media source headphone and speakers where applicable Press again to restore volume 17 EJECT Press to eject a disc from the system OPEN will display on the screen 18 Fast reverse Previous When a DVD is playing press and hold for a quick reverse within the DVD Press and release for the previous chapter Press PLAY to resume normal playback speed and volume In CD MP3 mode press to access the previous track When using a flash thumb drive press to access the next track 19 MENU Press to access the DVD or CD disc menu for selections Press again to return to DVD play Note For certain discs you may need to press ENTER to return to DVD play 20 SUBTITLE DVD dependent Press to turn the subtitle feature ON or OFF 21 LANGUAGE DVD dependent Press to select the desired language 22 ENTER Press to select the highlighted menu option 23 ILLUMINATION Press to illuminate the remote control and backlight all of the buttons for night use 74 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Battery replacement Batteries are supplied with the remote control unit Since all batteries have a limited shelf life replace them when the unit fails to control the DVD player
312. led it is possible to program all real keys as MyKeys in which case you will need to use your remote start system to reset all MyKeys as admin keys by doing the following 1 Enter the vehicle close all doors 2 Remote start the vehicle using your remote start fob 3 Follow Steps 1 4 in the Clear MyKey section 148 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Troubleshooting Potential Causes Can t create a MyKey e Key in the ignition is already a MyKey e Key in the ignition is the last remaining admin key there always has to be at least one admin key e Intelligent access key if equipped not in the backup slot for vehicles with push button start eSecuriLock Passive Anti Theft System is disabled or in unlimited mode e Vehicle has been started using a remote start system that is programmed as MyKey Refer to Using MyKey with remote start systems section Cannot program the e Key in the ignition is a MyKey MyKey optional settings e No MyKeys are programmed to the vehicle Refer to Create a MyKey section e Vehicle has been started using a remote start system that is programmed as a MyKey Refer to Using MyKey with remote start systems section Cannot clear MyKey e Key in the ignition is a MyKey e No MyKeys are programmed to the vehicle Refer to Create a MyKey section e Vehicle has been started using a remote start system that
313. ler An overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and or engagement concerns and or possible damage Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives treatments or cleaning agents The use of these materials may affect transmission operation and result in damage to internal transmission components For vehicles equipped with the EcoBoost engine reinstall the air filter assembly After the fluid level has been checked and adjusted as necessary do the following A Shut the engine off B Loosen the clamp holding the air filter assembly to the rubber hose C Rotate the air filter assembly 90 degrees clockwise without disconnecting the sensor D Seat the air filter assembly back into the grommets by pushing down on the air filter assembly E Tighten the clamp F Install and tighten two bolts that attach air filter assembly to the front of the vehicle G Install the bolt cover if equipped H Reinstall the harness retaining clip into the front of the air filter assembly 408 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications AIR FILTER Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for changing the air filter element When changing the air filter element use only the air filter element listed Refer to Motorcraft part numbers in this chapter WARNING To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and or personal burn injuries d
314. leration accelerator pedal brake pedal and vehicle speed This will increase RPM during engine braking e The grade assist indicator in the instrument cluster is illuminated L2 Grade assist is designed to aid the IA driver with optimal gear selection in hilly terrain or mountainous areas but is not intended for normal operation It is recommended that you return to O D overdrive mode on flat terrain to provide the best fuel economy and transmission function To return to normal D Drive position with O D do one of the following e Move the shift lever back from M Manual to D Drive e Press the paddle shifters to exit grade assist and enable control of selecting the gear you desire using the paddle shifters on the steering wheel This is called SelectShift Automatic Transmission SST mode 294 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving The grade assist indicator in the instrument cluster will not be illuminated The transmission will operate in gears one through six Understanding your SelectShift Automatic Transmission SST This vehicle is equipped with a SelectShift Automatic transmission SST gearshift lever SST is an automatic transmission with the ability for the driver to change gears up or down without a clutch as desired By moving the gearshift lever from drive position D Drive to M Manual you now have control of selecting the gear you desire using
315. licy THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE EACH ITEM OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED TO YOU AS IS NEITHER GRACENOTE MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE CONTENT GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT TO DELETE DATA AND OR CONTENT FROM THE COMPANIES RESPECTIVE SERVERS OR IN THE CASE OF GRACENOTE CHANGE DATA CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT NO WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR FREE OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED GRACENOTE IS NOT OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES AT ANY TIME GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TITLE AND NON INFRINGEMENT NEITHER GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON WHATSOEVER Gracenote 2007 57 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertai
316. liftgate is not completely closed Press RESET to reset display CHECK PARK AID if equipped Displayed when the transmission is in R Reverse and the reverse sensing system park aid is disabled FUEL LEVEL LOW Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel condition CHECK FUEL FILL INLET Displayed when the fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed Refer to Easy Fuel no cap fuel system in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter 24 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM Displayed when the brake system needs servicing If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible PARK BRAKE ENGAGED Displayed when the parking brake is set the engine is running and the vehicle is driven more than 3 mph 5 km h If the warning stays on after the parking brake is released contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible BRAKE FLUID LEVEL LOW Indicates the brake fluid level is low and the brake system should be inspected immediately Refer to Brake fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter WASHER FLUID LEVEL LOW Indicates the washer fluid reservoir is less than one quarter full Check the washer fluid level Refer to Windshield washer fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter LOW TIRE PRESSURE Displayed when one or more tires on your vehicle has low tire pressure Refer to
317. llow this practice See figure below Pregnant women should always wear their safety belt The lap belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt should be positioned low across the hips below the belly and worn as tight as comfort will allow The shoulder belt should be positioned to cross the middle of the shoulder and the center of the chest Third row safety belt stowage To stow the safety belt grasp both portions of shoulder belt together in one hand and slide into the safety belt stowage clip as shown 197 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Both the outer and inner shoulder belts must be kept in the stowage clip together to prevent the potential of wrinkling the cargo shade WARNING Do not stow only one portion of the shoulder belt in the stowage clip Wearing the shoulder belt in this condition increases the amount of belt slack and may reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in the event of a collision Safety belt locking modes All safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts The driver safety belt has the first locking mode and the front outboard passenger and rear seat safety belts have both types of locking modes described as follows Vehicle sensitive mode This is the normal retractor mode which allows free shoulder belt length adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle movement For exa
318. located on the driver side instrument panel The Vehicle Identification Number VIN contains the following information 1 World manufacturer identifier XXX X XXX X X X X XXXXXX 2 Brake system Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Restraint Devices and their location O 3 Make vehicle line series body type 4 Engine type 5 Check digit 6 Model year 7 Assembly plant 8 Production sequence number 419 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications TRANSMISSION CODE DESIGNATIONS You can find a transmission code on the Safety Compliance Certification MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO 1 DATE XX XX GVWR XXXXXLB XXXXXKG Label The follo wing table tells you FRONT GAWR XXXXL REARGAWR XXXL which transmission each code XXXXKG WITH XXXXKG WITH XXXX XXXXXXX TIRES XXXX XXXAXXXX TIRES represents XXXX KX RIMS XXXX XX RIMS AT XXX kPa XX PSLCOLD 4f AT XXX KPaXX PSI COLD THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MO VEHICLE SAFETY AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE V N XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX TYPE XXX EXT PNT XX RC XX DSO WB BRK TINTTR TPPS R TAXLE SPR XXXXX XXX X XX X Xx XX XXX XXXXXXXXXXXXX XNA XXXX XXXXXXX XX 6F50 6 Speed Automatic Transmission 6F55 6 Speed Automatic Transmission with G EcoBoost 420 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Acces
319. lution In Canada use Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner CXC 93 Dry the area with a soft cloth If the leather cannot be completely cleaned using a mild soap and water solution the leather may be cleaned using a commercially available leather cleaning product designed for automotive interiors e To check for compatibility first test any cleaner or stain remover on an inconspicuous part of the leather e Do not use household cleaning products alcohol solutions solvents or cleaners intended for rubber vinyl and plastics or oil petroleum based leather conditioners These products may cause premature wearing or damage to the leather LEATHER SEATS FOR THE KING RANCH EDITION ONLY IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle is equipped with seating covered in premium top grain leather which is extremely durable but still requires special care and maintenance in order to ensure longevity and comfort Regular cleaning and conditioning will maintain the appearance of the leather Cleaning For dirt use a vacuum cleaner then use a clean damp cloth or soft brush For routine cleaning wipe the surface with a soft damp cloth For more thorough cleaning wipe the surface with a mild soap and water solution e Clean spills as quickly as possible 369 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning Test any cleaner or stain remover on an inconspicuous part of the leather as cleaners may darken the leather Do not spill coffee k
320. ly exceed the price of your Ford ESP Service Contract With Ford ESP you minimize your risk for unexpected repair bills and rising repair costs Avoid the rising cost of properly maintaining your vehicle Ford ESP also offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that covers items that routinely wear out The coverage is prepaid so you never have to worry about affording your vehicle maintenance It covers regular checkups routine inspections preventive care and replacement of items that require periodic attention for normal wear e Wiper blades e Brake pads and linings Spark plugs except e Shock absorbers California e Clutch disc e Belts and hoses Contact your selling Ford Lincoln or Mercury dealership today so they can customize a Ford Extended Service Plan that fits your driving lifestyle and budget Interest free finance options available Take advantage of our installment payment plan just a 10 down payment will provide you with an affordable no interest no fee payment opportunity 424 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Ford Extended Service Plan IWATA diz JIVIS ALIO ON 1dV ssayqqv LNIdd 3SYI 1d SINVN 66 8908r IN 20 ekoy cZ08 xog O d dS P4104 0 SIU pew pue mojaq UO EWJOJUI BU 9J9Jdu109 aow usea oL idSJ P404 YUM PUIN 40 3983d BUINUAY Jag 425 Owners Guide 1st Printing 2011 MKT mkt USA fus Ford Extended Service Plan FORD ESP EXT
321. m the possible media sources Monitor A Monitor B AM FM1 FM2 SR1 SR2 SR3 satellite radio if equipped Disc Jukebox if equipped and SYNC if equipped The selected media type will display on the screen When Monitor A is chosen you can also use the auxiliary inputs and the USB port on the headrest system MEDIA for Monitor B In Dual Play mode press MEDIA repeatedly to select from the possible media sources Monitor A Monitor B The selected media type will display on the screen When Monitor B is chosen you can also use the auxiliary inputs and USB port on the headrest system For further information please refer to Single play Dual play later in this section Note Each headrest monitor is labeled with an identifier either A or B found in the upper right corner of the system 7 On Off Press to turn the system on off Power for headrest A is separate from headrest B Note This also disables dual play When both headrest systems are turned off the system will return to single play mode 8 Infrared receiver IR System sensor which reads the signals from the remote control and also sends audio signals to the infrared wireless headphones 9 LCD screen This seven inch liquid crystal display LCD screen can be adjusted for easier viewing by children Pull the top of the screen panel toward the viewer at the IR receiver transmitter cover for a better viewing angle The screen is hinged at the bottom and pivot
322. matic OVETONIVE sisi ae 293 Accessing your calendar 51 PIG adding oses reisi 404 Accessory delay 117 fluid checking its la rl 404 Active Park Assist 303 ul eo pokes A 295 Adaptive Cruise Control 120 Sean nu ee Van jase Advance IraG 284 B Air cleaner filter 409 413 2 a eee ALLEIN aa EE E a Air conditioning 88 acid treating emergencies 382 Airbag supplemental restraint jumping a disabled battery 350 SYSTEM pisii ias 207 216 218 maintenance free 382 and child safety seats 209 replacement specifications 413 description 207 216 218 SETV C NE yaa arsa a aran 382 disposal recta ee e 221 Mi driver airbag o 209 217 219 Del Minder ea 202 indicator light 215 221 Blind Spot Information System 310 operation sess 209 217 219 Blind Spot Spotter Mirror 308 passenger airbag 209 217 219 B 236 Side airba 216 OOS T SEALS verememe p Brake Messe tese Madam basa isler 282 e Sata m sanini 282 283 i e antilock brake system ABS Ambient mood lighting 104 warning light 283 AM FM NN NANA 41 fluid checking and adding 404 fluid refill capacities 414 oF see Engine 3gq fuid specifications 414 COOIAING Hastam lubricant specifications 41
323. matically move the seat power mirrors adjustable pedals and steering column to the desired memory position The mirrors will move to the programmed position and the seat will move to the easy entry position The seat will move to the final position when the key is in the ignition if easy entry feature is enabled Programming memory feature to transmitter To activate this feature 1 Move the driver seat power mirrors adjustable pedal and steering column to the desired positions using the associated controls 159 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security 2 Press and hold the control button 1 for five seconds A tone will be heard after about two seconds Ly confirming memory position has been set Continue to hold until a second tone is heard after five seconds 2 3 Within three seconds press the 4 A tone will be heard when the transmitter programming is complete 5 Press the 2 N 6 Repeat this procedure for memory 2 and another transmitter if desired Deprogramming memory feature from transmitter To deactivate this feature 1 Press and hold either the 1 or 2 control on the driver s door for five seconds A tone will be heard after 142 seconds when the memory store is done continue to hold until a second tone is heard after five seconds 2 Within three seconds press the 3 A tone will be heard when the deactivation is complete 4 Repeat this procedure for transm
324. matically turn off the passenger front airbag The system is designed to help protect small child size occupants from airbag deployments when they are improperly seated or restrained in the front passenger seat contrary to proper child seating or restraint usage recommendations Even with this technology parents are STRONGLY encouraged to always properly restrain children in the rear seat The sensor also turns off the passenger front airbag and seat mounted side airbag when the passenger seat is empty to prevent unnecessary replacement of airbag s after a collision For warnings about properly restraining children refer to Important SRS precautions later in this chapter Front safety belt usage sensors The front safety belt usage sensors detect whether or not the driver and front outboard passenger safety belts are fastened This information allows your Personal Safety System to tailor the airbag deployment and safety belt pretensioner activation depending upon safety belt usage Front safety belt pretensioners The safety belt pretensioners at the front outboard seating positions are designed to tighten the safety belts firmly against the occupant s body during frontal collisions and in side collisions and rollovers This helps increase the effectiveness of the safety belts In frontal collisions the safety belt pretensioners can be activated alone or if the collision is of sufficient severity together with the front airbags Fro
325. mation and warnings 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle Vehicle Symbol Glossary Safety Alert Fasten Safety Belt Airbag Side Child Seat Tether Anchor Anti Lock Brake System Brake Fluid Non Petroleum Based Stability Control System Master Lighting Switch Fog Lamps Front Fuel Pump Reset Windshield Defrost Demist 10 AN A xe il a O CA See Owner s Guide Airbag Front Child Seat Lower Anchor Brake System Parking Brake System Parking Aid System Speed Control Hazard Warning Flasher Fuse Compartment Windshield Wash Wipe Rear Window Defrost Demist E O Q gt DFO en E 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction Vehicle Symbol Glossary Payee WONS a Power Window Lockout BAY Front Rear Child Safety Door Interior Luggage i Lock Unlock Compartment Release Panic Alarm s Engine Oil TEA Engine Coolant Temperature E yr Engine Coolant Da DOPO Do Not Open When Hot Battery Avoid Smoking Flames or Sparks Battery Acid Explosive Gas Fan Warning Power Steering Fluid Maintain Correct Fluid Bi Level Service Engine Soon Engine Air Filter DE pee Compartment a Jack lt gt Check Fuel Cap Ri ri m 0 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus 11 Instrument
326. maximum pressure indicated re lubricate and try again When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi 1 38 bar greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall the following precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire 1 Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size 2 Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again 3 Stand at a minimum of 12 ft 8 66 m away from the tire wheel assembly 4 Use both eye and ear protection For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi 1 38 bar greater than the maximum pressure a Ford dealer or other tire service professional should do the mounting Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft 8 66 m away from the tire wheel assembly Important Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road tires are replaced on your vehicle It is recommended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally be replaced as a pair The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels originally installed on your vehicle are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company may affect the operation of your tire pressure monitoring system If the TPMS indicator is flashing your TPMS is malfunctioning Your replacement tire might be incompatible with your TPMS or some component of the TPMS may be damaged Safety
327. may consist of cornstarch talcum powder to lubricate the bag or sodium compounds e g baking soda that result from the combustion process that inflates the airbag Small amounts of sodium hydroxide may be present which may irritate the skin and eyes but none of the residue is toxic While the system is designed to help reduce serious injuries contact with a deploying airbag may also cause abrasions or swelling Temporary hearing loss is also a possibility as a result of the noise associated with a deploying airbag Because airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable force there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures facial and eye injuries or internal injuries particularly to occupants who are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of airbag deployment Thus it is extremely important that occupants be properly restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible while maintaining vehicle control WARNING Several air bag system components get hot after inflation Do not touch them after inflation WARNING If the air bag has deployed the air bag will not function again and must be replaced immediately If the air bag is not replaced the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a collision The SRS consists of e driver and passenger airbag modules which include the inflators and airbags e side airbags and Safety Canopy Refer to Seat mounted side
328. mited Warranty For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by your vehicle s New Vehicle Limited Warranty refer to the Warranty Guide that is provided to you along with your Owner s Guide Special instructions For your added safety your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic controls WARNING Please read the section Airbag Supplemental Restraint System SRS in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal injury WARNING Front seat mounted rear facing child or infant seats should NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag DATA RECORDING Service Data Recording Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and storing diagnostic information about your vehicle This potentially includes information about the performance or status of various systems and modules in the vehicle such as engine throttle steering or brake systems In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle Ford Motor Company Ford of Canada and service and repair facilities may access or share among them vehicle diagnostic information received through a direct connection to your vehicle when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle For U S only Gf equipped if you choose to use the SYNC Vehicle Health Report you consent that certain diagnostic information may also be accessed electronically by Ford Motor Comp
329. mple if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner sharply or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph 8 km h or more the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce forward movement of the driver and passengers In addition the retractor is designed to lock if the webbing is pulled out too quickly If this occurs let the belt retract slightly and pull webbing out again in a slow and controlled manner Automatic locking mode In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt When to use the automatic locking mode This mode should be used any time a child safety seat except a booster is installed in passenger front or rear seating positions Children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating 198 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints position whenever possible Refer to Safety restraints for children or Safety seats for children later in this chapter How to use the automatic locking mode e Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt e Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is pulled out e Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking mode
330. n that allows the seat to stop and reverse direction if it hits an obstacle so that the obstacle can be removed The third row power seat buttons are located behind the third row seats on the left hand quarter trim panel Note The power fold seats work only when the vehicle is in P Park and the tailgate is open If the ignition is in the off position and the feature is still running the battery saver will turn it off after 10 minutes You can reactivate the power seats by pressing on the remote entry key fob or by using the unlock procedure on the keyless entry keypad Refer to SecuriCode keyless entry system in the Locks and Security chapter Keeping the key in accessory or run positions will prevent the feature from timing out 190 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Cc G gt FOLD RH L SS G BOTH NORMAL STOW TAILGATE LH 5 c gt Press the seat selection button 4 to select either right hand seat the left hand seat or both First select the seat you would like to adjust then select one of the following e Press the NORMAL button 1 to return the seat to the normal seating position e Press the STOW button 2 to stow the seat into the tub floor e Press the FOLD button 8 the top portion of the button to fold down the seatback e Press the TAILGATE button 8 the bottom portion of the button to put the seat into the
331. n that artist is played again the system will alert you with a pop up e Alert On Off Press to enable disable the audio and visual song and artists alerts Show Presets Press to display presets at the bottom of the screen Playing a CD or MP3 disc If you press CD and there is not a disc loaded into the system NO DISC will appear in the status bar and you will not be able to access the CD screen Insert a disc into the slot and it will begin to play You can access the following CD MP3 options Scan Press for a brief sampling of all listenable tracks Compress Compression Press to engage disengage the compression feature Compression boosts more quiet music and lowers louder music to minimize the need for volume adjustments Repeat Press to engage disengage the repeat feature The system will keep playing the same track continually Shuffle Press to engage disengage the shuffle feature The system will play all tracks on the disc randomly Track List Available in CD mode only Press to view a list of tracks on the CD Record Available in CD mode only Press to record and save the CD or any track s on the CD to the Jukebox You can then later access play the saved tracks CD Folder mode Available in MP3 mode only Press to activate folder mode When activated song play and seeking stays within the current folder Folder List Available in MP3 mode only Press to access view a list of folders on the disc Select th
332. n the garage locate the learn or smart button usually near where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the unit 5 Firmly press and release the learn or smart button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer Note There are 30 seconds in which to initiate Step 6 6 Return to the vehicle and firmly press hold for two seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button Repeat the press hold release sequence again and depending on the brand of the garage door opener or other rolling code equipped device repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming HomeLink should now activate your rolling code equipped device To program additional HomeLink buttons begin with Step 1 in this section For questions or comments please contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 135 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Gate Operator amp Canadian Programming During programming your hand held transmitter may Tx automatically stop transmitting not allowing enough time for HomeLink to accept the signal from the hand held transmitter After completing Step 1 outlined in the Programming section replace Step 2 with the following Note If programming a garage door opener or gate operator it is advised to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent overheating e Continue to press and hold the
333. n the windshield is dry This may scratch the glass damage the wiper blades and cause the wiper motor to burn out Before operating the wiper on a dry windshield always use the windshield washer In freezing weather be sure the wiper blades are not frozen to the windshield before operating the wipers Windshield wiper rainlamp feature When the windshield wipers are turned on during daylight and the headlamp control is in the autolamp position the exterior lamps will turn on after a brief delay and will remain on until the wipers are turned off Rear window wiper washer controls For rear wiper operation rotate the rear window wiper and washer control to the desired position Select 2 Normal speed operation of rear wiper 1 Intermittent operation of rear wiper 0 off Rear wiper and washer off For rear wash cycle rotate and hold as desired the rear wiper washer control to either CJ position From either position the control will automatically return to the 2 or 0 off position POWER TILT TELESCOPE STEERING COLUMN The steering column can be adjusted manually by moving the four way rocker adjustment control located below the turn signal wiper control stalk Hold the control to adjust The telescope function is adjusted by moving the control toward the driver to telescope out and toward the instrument panel to telescope in 109 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fu
334. n wearing a seat belt WARNING Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that are designed to be used as a pair 1 Use the shoulder belt on the outside shoulder only Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm 2 Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside shoulder 3 Never use a single belt for more than one person WARNING When possible all children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position WARNING Front and rear seat occupants including pregnant women should wear safety belts for optimum protection in an accident Combination lap and shoulder belts 1 Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle the buckle closest to P di the direction the tongue is coming from until you hear a snap and feel EL it latch Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle 196 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 2 To unfasten press the release button and remove the tongue from the buckl a e buckle gt ne _ Restraint of pregnant women WARNING Always ride and drive with your seatback upright and the safety belt properly fastened The lap portion of the safety belt should fit snug and be positioned low across the hips The shoulder portion of the safety belt should be positioned across the chest Pregnant women should also fo
335. nada www ford ca e In Mexico www ford com mx e In Australia www ford com au Additional owner information is given in separate publications This vehicle s Owner s Guide describes every option and model variant available and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your particular vehicle Furthermore due to printing cycles it may describe options before they are generally available Remember to pass on this vehicle s Owner s Guide when reselling the vehicle It is an integral part of the vehicle SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION A Warning symbols in this guide How can you reduce the risk of personal injury to yourself or others In this guide answers to such questions are contained in comments highlighted by the warning triangle symbol These comments should be read and observed A Warning symbols on your vehicle When you see this symbol it is imperative that you consult the relevant section of this guide before Lil touching or attempting adjustment of any kind 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction Protecting the environment We must all play our part in protecting the environment Correct vehicle usage and the authorized disposal of waste cleaning and lubrication materials are significant steps towards this aim Information in this respect is highlighted in this guide with the tree symbol CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning WARNING Engine exhaust some
336. nal Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee ILSAC comprised of U S and Japanese automobile manufacturers To protect your engine and engine s warranty use Motorcraft SAE 5W 30 or an equivalent SAE 5W 30 oil meeting Ford specification WSS M2C929 A Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities later in this section for more information Do not use supplemental engine oil additives cleaners or other engine treatments They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that is not covered by Ford warranty 381 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Change your engine oil according to the appropriate schedule listed in the scheduled maintenance information Ford production and Motorcraft replacement oil filters are designed for added engine protection and long life If a replacement oil filter is used that does not meet Ford material and design specifications start up engine noises or knock may be experienced It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft oil filter or another with equivalent performance for your engine application BATTERY Your vehicle is equipped with a Motorcraft maintenance free battery which normally does not require additional water during its life of service If your battery has a cover shield make sure it is reinstalled after the battery has been cleaned or replaced For longer trouble free operation keep th
337. nd others 11 Maximum Load Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire Refer to the Safety Compliance Certification Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle 253 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading 12 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades e Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 114 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 e Traction The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C The grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance e Temperature The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel 13 Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure Indicates the tire manufacturers maximum permissible pressure and or the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire This pressure
338. nd relatively speedy alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a settlement have failed This procedure is without cost to you and is designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal proceedings In the CAMVAP program impartial third party arbitrators conduct hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal environment These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the parties make decisions and when appropriate render awards to resolve disputes CAMVAP decisions are fast fair and final as the arbitrator s award is binding on both you and Ford of Canada CAMVAP services are available in all Canadian territories and provinces For more information without charge or obligation call your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator directly at 1 800 207 0685 or visit www camvap ca GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U S AND CANADA Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country contact the appropriate foreign embassy or consulate These officials can inform you of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti knock index lower than is recommended for your vehicle contact a regional office or owner relations customer relationship office The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause engine knocking
339. nd repairs may not be covered under warranty 394 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Octane recommendations 3 7L V6 engine Your vehicle will run normally on 87 octane regular fuel Premium fuel will provide improved performance 3 5L V6 EcoBoost engine Your vehicle is designed to run on regular fuel with an octane rating of 87 or higher For best overall performance premium fuel with an octane rating of 91 or higher is recommended The performance gained by using premium fuel will be most noticeable in hot weather or in severe duty applications such as towing a trailer Some stations offer fuels posted as Regular with an octane rating below 87 particularly in high altitude areas Fuels with octane levels below 87 are not recommended for either engine Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly However if it knocks heavily while you are using fuel with the recommended octane rating see your authorized dealer to prevent any engine damage Fuel quality If you are experiencing starting rough idle or hesitation driveability problems during a cold start try a different brand of unleaded gasoline If the problems persist see your authorized dealer Do not add aftermarket fuel additive products to your fuel tank It should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended oc
340. nected refer to the Battery section of the Maintenance and Specifications chapter ofa 28 29 30 31 32 330 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Fuse Relay Fuse Amp Protected Circuits Anti lock brake system ABS pump Powertrain control module PCM vehicle power ABS valve PS Oo 6 O OOo T Ooo 8 O PO P 2 O HID headlamp Adaptive cruise relay cruise control oo o 6 O PT PS P19 i P20 i Pt o A O o 5 O oo 6 20A 10a 30A 20A 40A 20A 40A Trailer tow battery charge Trailer tow stop turn lamps fuse 45 power 10A PCM keep alive power Canister vent Relay coil 30A 30A 30A 30A 40A 30A 30A 20A 0 0 0 0 10A A C clutch 20A Rear power point 15A Backup lamps 2 15A Fuel relay Fuel pump driver module Fuel pump 331 5 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 T 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Fuse Relay Fuse Amp Protected Circuits Rating Left rear smart window Panoramic roof module Power sunshade module Left front smart window Auxiliary blower motor Power liftgate Front A C blower AR Rear wiper module secondary fuse BT asa Washer pump lt lt pt GEY rel
341. nes will lock into position when being used and they can also fold flat feature for ease of storage Simply rotate each earpiece until they lock into position or fold flat To operate the headphones e Press POWER on the ear piece to turn on the headphones A red indicator light will illuminate indicating the headphones are ON Press POWER again to turn the headphones off Adjust the headphones to comfortably fit your head using the headband adjustment e Select the desired audio source Channel Monitor A or B for each set of wireless headphones by using the A B selection switch on the ear piece e Adjust the volume control to the desired listening level 76 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Ensure that the headphones are turned off when not in use After approximately one minute of not being in use no infrared signal is received the wireless headphones will automatically turn off They will also turn off after two hours of continuous use as a power save feature If this happens simply turn the headphones on again and continue use Wired headphones WARNING Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let children operate the system while unsupervised If wired headphones or auxiliary systems are used children may become entangled in the cords and seriously injure themselves WARNING The driver should never use the headphones while driving the vehicle U
342. ng A complete check may take several days If the vehicle is not ready for I M testing the following driving cycle consisting of mixed city and highway driving may be performed 15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway highway followed by 20 minutes of stop and go driving with at least four 30 second idle periods Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the engine Then start the engine and complete the above driving cycle The engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature Once started do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete If the vehicle is still not ready for I M testing the above driving cycle will have to be repeated POWER STEERING FLUID EXCEPT ECOBOOST ENGINE Refer to scheduled maintenance information 1 Start the engine and let it run until it reaches normal operating temperature the engine coolant temperature gauge indicator will be near the center of the normal area between H and C 2 While the engine idles turn the steering wheel left and right several times 3 Turn the engine off 4 Check the fluid level in the reservoir It should be between the MIN and MAX lines Do not add fluid if the level is in this range 5 If the fluid is low add fluid in small amounts continuously checking the level until it reaches the range between the MIN and MAX lines Be sure to put the cap back on the reservoir Refer to Maintenance product specif
343. nge is needed The engine oil change service needs to be completed within two weeks or 500 miles 800 km after the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message is displayed Your oil change service interval can be up to one year or 10 000 miles 16 000 km Reset your Intelligent Oil Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter change refer to the Instrument Cluster chapter If your message center is prematurely reset or becomes inoperative you should perform the oil change interval at six months or 5 000 miles 8 000 km from your last oil change Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built with multiple complex performance systems Every manufacturer develops these systems using 427 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide different specifications and performance features That s why it s important to rely upon your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealership to properly diagnose and repair your vehicle Ford Motor Company has recommended maintenance intervals for various parts and component systems based upon engineering testing Ford Motor Company relies upon this testing to determine the most appropriate mileage for replacement of oils and fluids to protect your vehicle at the lowest overall cost to you and recommends against maintenance schedules that deviate from the scheduled maintenance information Ford strongly recommends the use of genuine Ford replacement parts Parts other than Ford Motorcraft
344. ngs happen even intermittently have the SRS serviced at your an authorized dealer immediately Unless serviced the system may not function properly in the event of a collision or rollover event SOS Post Crash Alert System The system automatically flashes the turn signal lamps and sounds the horn three times at four second intervals in the event of a serious impact that deploys an airbag front side side curtain or Safety Canopy or the safety belt pretensioners The system can be turned off when any one of the following actions are taken by the driver or any other person e pressing the hazard control button e or pressing the panic button on the remote entry transmitter The feature will continue to operate until the vehicle runs out of power Disposal of airbags and airbag equipped vehicles including pretensioners Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Airbags MUST BE disposed of by qualified personnel 221 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety restraints for children Also see Airbag supplemental restraint system SRS in this chapter for special instructions about using airbags Important child restraint precautions WARNING Always make sure your child is secured properly in a device that is appropriate for their height age and weight Child safety
345. nment Systems System limitations Cold temperature start When operating the system below 32 F 0 C the display screen requires a 2 3 minutes warm up time to achieve maximum brightness Cleaning the touchscreen Clean the touchscreen with a clean soft cloth such as one used for cleaning glasses If dirt or finger prints are still visible apply a small amount of alcohol to the cloth Do not pour spray alcohol onto the touchscreen Do not use detergent or any type of solvent to clean the touchscreen Frequently asked questions FAQs How do I turn off the system Press and hold the volume control for at least three seconds How do I recover after accidental language re set 1 Press the MENU hard button 2 Select the Feedback settings Retour Reaccion tab on the touchscreen 3 Press the English Anglais Ingles button to reset language to English 4 Press the Spanish Espanol Espanol button to reset language to Spanish 5 Press the French Francais Frances button to reset language to French Or you can also turn vehicle off to restart system Then from the DISCLAIMER screen select the desired language before pressing Agree Troubleshooting Symptoms Possible Cause Focus Error System unable to play Contact your reproduced disc authorized dealer Bad Disc Disc was inserted The mechanism will upside down or the automatically eject system is unable to disc read the information in the dis
346. ns 244 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading WARNING Under inflation is the most common cause of tire failures and may result in severe tire cracking tread separation or blowout with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury Under inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire It also may result in unnecessary tire stress irregular wear loss of vehicle control and accidents A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not appear to be flat Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found on the tire The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door Failure to follow the tire pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and adversely affect the way your vehicle handles Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer s maximum permissible pressure and or the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire This pressure is normally higher than the manufacturer s recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the ed
347. nsert the nozzle of portable fuel containers or any type of aftermarket funnels into 349 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies the Easy Fuel no cap fuel system as it can be damaged You must use the included funnel in such circumstances WARNING Do not insert the nozzle of portable fuel containers or aftermarket funnels into the Easy Fuel system This could damage the fuel system and its seal and may cause fuel to run onto the ground instead of filling the tank all of which could result in serious personal injury JUMP STARTING WARNING The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames sparks or lit cigarettes An explosion could result in injury or vehicle damage WARNING Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin eyes and clothing if contacted Do not attempt to push start your automatic transmission vehicle Automatic transmissions do not have push start capability Attempting to push start a vehicle with an automatic transmission may cause transmission damage Preparing your vehicle When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed the automatic transmission must relearn its shift strategy As a result the transmission may have firm and or soft shifts This operation is considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the transmission Over time the adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operati
348. nshade crossbar in order to prevent damage to the system If this occurs the sunshade crossbar ends may just need to be slid back into position to regain proper function See your authorized dealer for proper panoramic Vista Roof or sunshade operating diagnostic or repair instructions Note The same ats control operates both the sunshades and the panoramic Vista Roof If the vehicle has a fixed glass roof there will only be the control in the center position 132 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls The panoramic Vista Roof and power sunshade are equipped with an automatic one touch express opening feature To stop motion at any time during the one touch operation press the control a second time To open power sunshades and panoramic Vista Roof Press and release the ggigg control to open the sunshade The front and rear sunshades open simultaneously Note Vista Roof will only open after power sunshades are completely open Power sunshades will only close after Vista Roof is completely closed To open the panoramic Vista Roof press and release the ws control The panoramic Vista Roof will open to the comfort position Press and release the control again to fully open To stop the one touch open feature press the control again Note The comfort position helps to alleviate rumbling wind noise which may happen in the vehicle with
349. nstrument Cluster Waiting four seconds or pressing the RESET button cycles the message center through each of the language choices Press and hold RESET for two seconds to set the language choice System warnings System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your vehicle s operating systems In the event of a multiple warning situation the message center will cycle the display to show all warnings by displaying each one for four seconds The message center will display the last selected feature if there are no more warning messages Types of messages and warnings e Some messages will appear briefly to inform you of something you may need to take action on or be informed of e Some messages will appear once and then again when the vehicle is restarted e Some messages will reappear after clearing or being reset if a problem or condition is still present and needs your attention e Some messages can be acknowledged and reset by pressing RESET This allows you to use the full message center functionality by clearing the message DRIVER DOOR AJAR Displayed when the driver s door is not completely closed PASSENGER DOOR AJAR Displayed when the passenger side door is not completely closed REAR LEFT DOOR AJAR Displayed when the rear left door is not completely closed REAR RIGHT DOOR AJAR Displayed when the rear right door is not completely closed LIFTGATE AJAR Displayed when the
350. nt The climate controlled seat system includes air filters that must be replaced periodically Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for more information e There is a filter located under the rear of each front seat which can be accessed from the second row seat Move the front seats all the way forward and up to ease access 176 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints To remove the air filter 1 Remove key from ignition 2 Push up on the outside rigid edge of the filter and rotate toward the front of the vehicle once tabs are released 3 Remove filter To install the filter e Position the filter in itshousing making sure that the far forward end is all the way up in the housing then push in on the center of the outside edge of the filter and rotate up into the housing until it clips into position Memory seat power mirrors adjustable pedals steering column This system allows automatic positioning of the driver seat outside rearview mirrors steering 1 column and adjustable pedals to two programmable positions The memory seat control is located on the driver door 2 J e To program position one move the driver seat exterior mirrors and adjustable pedals to the desired positions using the associated controls Press and hold control button 1 for at least two seconds A tone will be heard when the memory save is complete e To program position two
351. nt safety belt energy management retractors The front outboard safety belt energy management retractors allow webbing to be pulled out of the retractor in a gradual and controlled manner in response to the occupant s forward momentum This helps reduce the risk of force related injuries to the occupant s chest by 194 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints limiting the load on the occupant Refer to Energy management Jeature front outboard section in this chapter Determining if the Personal Safety System is operational The Personal Safety System uses a warning light in the instrument cluster or a back up tone to indicate the condition of the system Refer to the Warning lights and chimes section in the Instrument Cluster chapter Routine maintenance of the Personal Safety System is not required The Restraints Control Module RCM monitors its own internal circuits and the circuits for the airbag supplemental restraints crash sensor s safety belt pretensioners front safety belt buckle sensors driver seat position sensor and front passenger sensing system In addition the RCM also monitors the restraints warning light in the instrument cluster A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following e The warning light will either flash or stay lit e The warning light will not iluminate immediately after ignition is turned on e A series of five beeps will
352. nutes have elapsed since the ignition switch has been turned to on The drivers or front The Belt Minder feature is activated passenger s safety belt is not the safety belt warning light buckled when the vehicle has illuminates and the warning chime reached at least 3 mph sounds for six seconds every km h and 1 2 minutes have 30 seconds repeating for elapsed since the ignition approximately five minutes or until switch has been turned to on the safety belts are buckled The driver s or front The Belt Minder feature is activated passenger s safety belt becomes the safety belt warning light unbuckled for approximately illuminates and the warning chime one minute while the vehicle is sounds for six seconds every traveling at least 3 mph 30 seconds repeating for 5 km h and more than approximately five minutes or until 1 2 minutes have elapsed since the safety belts are buckled the ignition switch has been turned to on 203 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts All statistics based on U S data Reasons given Consider Crashes are rare events 36700 crashes occur every day The more we drive the more we are exposed to rare events even for good drivers 1 in 4 of us will be seriously injured in a crash during our lifetime Tm not going far 3 of 4
353. nutes over 20 mph 82 km h before the light will turn off Spare tire in use Your temporary spare tire is in use Repair the damaged road wheel tire and reinstall it on the vehicle to restore system functionality For a description on how the system functions refer to When your temporary spare tire is installed in this section TPMS If your tires are properly malfunction inflated and your spare tire is not in use and the light remains on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible 260 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Low tire pressure Possible cause Customer action required warning light Flashing warning Spare tire in use Your temporary spare tire is in light use Repair the damaged road wheel and re mount it on the vehicle to restore system functionality For a description of how the system functions under these conditions refer to When your temporary spare tire is installed in this section TPMS If your tires are properly malfunction inflated and your spare tire is not in use and the TPMS warning light still flashes contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible When inflating your tires When putting air into your tires such as at a gas station or in your garage the tire pressure monitoring system may not respond immediately to the air added to your tires It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph 82 km h for the light
354. o as the alert located in the left and right exterior mirrors When the vehicle is started the BLIS automatically illuminates both indicators for several seconds indicating the system is operating The first time you place the transmission in D Drive after starting the engine and drive forward at a speed greater than 3 mph 5 km h the BLIS system becomes active Afterwards the BLIS remains active for all speeds including zero mph BLIS is also active if the transmission is placed in N Neutral If the transmission is shifted out of D Drive or N Neutral the system will enter the CTA mode see CTA operation below Once shifted back in to D Drive the BLIS mode will activate once driven above 3 mph 5 km h 310 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving The BLIS will trigger the alert for vehicles that enter your blind zone from the rear or merge in to the blind zone from the side Vehicles that you pass or a vehicle that enters the blind zone from the front will trigger the alert only after the vehicle is present in the blind zone for three seconds Note For vehicles that pass through the blind zone quickly typically less than two seconds the BLIS will not illuminate the alert The BLIS consists of two radar sensors each located rearward of the rear wheels hidden behind the bumper fascia Do not place any type of bumper sticker in this area Note The BLIS typically will n
355. o not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running For Ecoboost equipped vehicles when servicing the air cleaner it is important that no foreign material enter the air induction system The engine and turbocharger are susceptible to damage from even small particles Changing the air filter element 3 7L V6 engine 3 5L V6 EcoBoost engine 1 Release the clamps that secure the air filter housing cover 2 Carefully separate the two halves of the air filter housing 3 Remove the air filter element from the air filter housing 409 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 4 Wipe the air filter housing and cover clean to remove any dirt or debris and to ensure good sealing 5 Install a new air filter element Be careful not to crimp the filter element edges between the air filter housing and cover This could cause filter damage and allow unfiltered air to enter the engine if not properly seated 6 Replace the air filter housing cover and secure the clamps Be sure that the air cleaner cover tabs are engaged into the slots of the air cleaner housing Note Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe engine damage The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if the correct air filter element is not used VEHICLE STORAGE If you plan on storing your vehicle fo
356. o the driver via the message center If a condition is determined by the system the message center displays BLIND SPOT NOT AVAILABLE or CROSS TRAFFIC NOT AVAILABLE warning and the appropriate left and or right exterior mirror alert indicator will illuminate The message center warning may be cleared by the driver but the exterior mirror alert indicator will remain illuminated 314 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving WARNING Just prior to the system recognizing a blocked condition and alerting the driver the number of missed objects will increase To help avoid injuries NEVER use the BLIS as a replacement for using the side and rear view mirrors and looking over your shoulder before changing lanes BLIS is not a replacement for careful driving and only an assist Once the blockage is removed the system will require some driving time and detection of at least two vehicle objects prior to resetting or the driver can cycle the ignition key If however blockage is still present after the key cycle the system will sense again that it is blocked after driving in traffic The following table lists possible causes and actions for this message being displayed The surface of the radar is dirty or Clean the fascia area in front of obstructed in some way the radar either side or remove obstruction The surface of the radar is not Drive normally in traffic for a few dirty or obstructed minutes to allo
357. ock passive anti theft section of this chapter Note At least two already programmed transmitters are required to perform this procedure yourself Illuminated entry The interior lamps parking lamps and puddle lamps if equipped illuminate when the IA key or the keyless entry keypad is used to unlock the door s 161 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security The illuminated entry system will turn off the lights if e the ignition is turned on or e the amp control on the transmitter is pressed or e the vehicle is locked using the keyless entry keypad or e the vehicle is locked using the key in the driver door cylinder or e after 25 seconds of illumination The lights will not turn off if e they have been turned on with the dimmer control or e any door is open Illuminated exit e When all vehicle doors are closed the ignition is turned off the interior dome lamps parking lamps and puddle lamps if equipped will illuminate The lights will turn off if all the doors remain closed and e 25 seconds elapse or e the start button is pressed Battery saver The battery saver will shut off the lamps 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned off e If the dome lamps were turned on using the panel dimmer control the battery saver will shut them off 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned off e If the courtesy lamps were turned on because one of the vehicle doors
358. of personal injury continues to flash a malfunction has been detected have the system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer Normal braking is still functional unless the brake warning light also is illuminated 14 Anti lock brake system If the ABS light stays illuminated or ABs 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Airbag readiness If this light fails e to illuminate when the ignition is turned on continues to flash or IN remains on have the system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer A chime will sound if there is a malfunction in the indicator light Safety belt Reminds you to fasten your safety belt A Belt Minder chime will also sound to remind you to fasten your safety belt Refer to the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter to activate deactivate the Belt Minder chime feature AdvanceTrac traction control Illuminates when the AdvanceTrac traction control is active If the light remains on have the system serviced immediately refer to the Driving chapter for more information AdvanceTrac traction Control off light Illuminates when the fa AdvanceTrac traction control has y been disabled by the driver Refer to OFF the Driving chapter for more information Overdrive cancel and grade assist RTT Cif equipped Illuminates when the overdrive g2 function of the transmission has been turned off and the g
359. oid rotating the wiper blade 3 structure and trapping your left hand between the arm and blade 4 Attach the new wiper to the wiper arm and press it into place until a click is heard If you find this procedure too difficult please see your dealer ENGINE OIL 577 Checking the engine oil Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for checking the engine oil 1 Make sure the vehicle is on level ground 2 Turn the engine off and wait 15 minutes for the oil to drain into the oil pan 3 Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P Park 4 Open the hood Protect yourself from engine heat 378 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus 5 engine oil level dipstick Maintenance and Specifications Locate and carefully remove the Wipe the dipstick clean Insert the dipstick fully then remove it again If the oil level is within this range the oil level is acceptable DO NOT ADD OIL m If the oil level is below this mark engine oil must be added to raise the level within the normal operating range If required add engine oil to the engine Refer to Adding engine oil in this chapter with oil Oil levels above this mark may cause engine damage If the engine is lt e overfilled some oil must be removed from the engine by an authorized dealer Do not overfill the engine Put the dipstick
360. on 1 Use only a 12 volt supply to start your vehicle 2 Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could damage the vehicle s electrical system 3 Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle making sure the two vehicles do not touch Set the parking brake on both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving parts 4 Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before you attach the battery cables Ensure that vent caps are tight and level 350 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies 5 Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical surges Turn all other accessories off Connecting the jumper cables Note In the illustration the vehicle on the bottom is used to designate the assisting boosting battery 1 Connect the positive jumper cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery 2 Connect the other end of the positive cable to the positive terminal of the assisting battery 3 Connect the negative cable to the negative terminal of the assisting battery 4 Make the final connection of the negative cable to an exposed metal part of the stalled vehicle s engine away from the battery and the carburetor fuel injection system Note Do not attach the negative cable to fuel lines engine rocker covers the intake manifold or
361. on Temporary malfunctions may cause the service engine soon tc indicator to illuminate Examples are 1 The vehicle has run out of fuel the engine may misfire or run poorly 2 Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel the engine may misfire or run poorly 3 The fuel fill inlet may not have been properly closed See Easy Fuel no cap fuel system in this chapter 401 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 4 Driving through deep water the electrical system may be wet These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank with good quality fuel properly closing the fuel fill inlet or letting the electrical system dry out After three driving cycles without these or any other temporary malfunctions present the service engine soon O indicator should stay off the next time the engine is started A driving cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed city highway driving No additional vehicle service is reguired If the service engine soon K indicator remains on have your vehicle serviced at the first available opportunity Although some malfunctions detected by the OBD II may not have symptoms that are apparent continued driving with the service engine soon tc indicator on can result in increased emissions lower fuel economy reduced engine and transmission smoothness and lead to more costly repairs Readiness for Inspection Maintenance I
362. on Label or Tire Label located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door e B pillar The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the front door e Bead area of the tire Area of the tire next to the rim e Sidewall of the tire Area between the bead area and the tread e Tread area of the tire Area of the perimeter of the tire that contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle e Rim The metal support wheel for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated INFLATING YOUR TIRES Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly inflated Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure without appearing flat Every day before you drive check your tires If one looks lower than the others use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if required At least once a month and before long trips inspect each tire and check the tire pressure with a tire gauge including spare if equipped Inflate all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge as automatic service station gauges may be inaccurate Ford recommends the use of a digital or dial type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick type tire pressure gauge Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire performance and wear Under inflation or over inflation may cause uneven treadwear patter
363. ons and responsibilities in our nations wilderness areas Ford Motor Company joins the U S Forest Service and the Bureau of Land Management in encouraging you to help preserve our national forest and other public and private lands by treading lightly Driving on hilly or sloping terrain Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up or down a hill or steep incline you should always try to drive straight up or straight down Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep slopes or hills A danger lies in losing traction slipping sideways and possibly rolling over Whenever driving on a hill determine beforehand the route you will use Do not drive over the crest of a hill without seeing what conditions are on the other side Do not drive in reverse over a hill without the aid of an observer When climbing a steep slope or hill start in a lower gear rather than downshifting to a lower gear from a higher gear once the ascent has started This reduces strain on the engine and the possibility of stalling If you do stall out Do not try to turn around because you might roll over It is better to back down to a safe location Apply just enough power to the wheels to climb the hill Too much power will cause the tires to slip spin or lose traction resulting in loss of vehicle control 320 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Descend a hill in the same gear you would use to climb up the
364. ont parking lamp Headlamp Tail brake turn signal lamp Rear sidemarker Backup lamp License plate lamp High mount brake lamp Fog lamp if equipped First row dome map lamp Second row dome map lamps gt Third row cargo lamp 211 2XB Visor vanity lamp To replace all instrument panel lights see your authorized dealer To replace these lamps see your authorized dealer Replacing interior bulbs Check the operation of all bulbs frequently Replacing exterior bulbs Check the operation of all bulbs frequently Replacing HID headlamp bulbs if equipped The headlamps on your vehicle use a high intensity discharge source These lamps operate at a high voltage When the bulb is burned out the bulb and starter capsule assembly must be replaced by your authorized dealer 106 Rear sidemarker JA 2011 MKT mki Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights Replacing front parking lamp turn signal bulbs For bulb replacement see your authorized dealer Replacing rear stop tail turn backup and side marker lamps Your vehicle is equipped with stop tail turn backup and side marker lamp assemblies containing integral multiple light emitting diodes LED If replacement is required see your authorized dealer Replacing license plate lamp bulbs 1 Make sure the headlamp switch is in the off position 2 Remove the two screws from the license plate lamp assembly and pull it down eS 3
365. ook up and towing procedures for your vehicle Emergency towing In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle without access to wheel dollies car hauling trailer or flatbed transport vehicle your vehicle regardless of transmission powertrain configuration can be flat towed all wheels on the ground under the following conditions e Vehicle is facing forward so that it is being towed in a forward direction e Place the transmission in N Neutral Refer to Brake shift interlock in the Driving chapter for specific instructions if you cannot move the gear shift lever into N Neutral e Maximum speed is not to exceed 35 mph 56 km h e Maximum distance is 50 miles 80 km 354 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be performed by an authorized Ford Lincoln or Mercury dealer While any authorized dealer handling your vehicle line will provide warranty service we recommend you return to your selling authorized dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training and or equipment so not all authorized dealers are authorized to perform all warranty repairs This means that depending on the warranty repair needed you may have to take your vehicle to another authorized dealer A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking y
366. or example e Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United States Department of Transportation has set Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires They do not apply to deep tread winter type snow tires space saver or temporary use spare tires light truck or LT type tires tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575 104 c 2 U S Department of Transportation Tire quality grades The U S Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you the following information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 114 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AA A B C The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C The grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
367. or an equivalent SAE 5W 20 oil meeting Ford specification WSS M2C930 A SAE 5W 20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and durability performance meeting all requirements for your 380 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications vehicle s engine Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities later in this section for more information Do not use supplemental engine oil additives cleaners or other engine treatments They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that is not covered by Ford warranty Change your engine oil according to the appropriate schedule listed in the scheduled maintenance information Ford production and Motorcraft replacement oil filters are designed for added engine protection and long life If a replacement oil filter is used that does not meet Ford material and design specifications start up engine noises or knock may be experienced It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft oil filter or another with equivalent performance for your engine application 3 5L V6 EcoBoost engine Look for this certification trademark PREMU SYNTHETIC BLEND MOTOR OIL Use SAE 5W 30 engine oil Only use oils Certified For Gasoline Engines by the American Petroleum Institute API An oil with this trademark symbol conforms to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel economy requirements of the Internatio
368. or controls decrease and increase the display brightness and the left and right 72 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems cursor controls advance to the next or previous station when accessing the radio tuner in dual play mode AM FM SR 3 DISPLAY Press to access the on screen display of title track chapter and time elapsed 4 RETURN Press to return to the previous menu screen 5 SETUP Press to access the setup menu for each monitor Refer to Setup Menu later in this section for more information 6 MON A B Press to select either monitor A or monitor B to be controlled by the remote control 7 VOL Volume When in Dual Play only press to increase A or decrease Vv the volume for the wired headphones for headrest media sources only DVD USB port and auxiliary inputs Wireless headphone volume is controlled with the rotary dial on the right ear piece 8 Fast Forward Next In DVD mode press and hold for a quick advance within the DVD Press and release to advance to the next chapter In CD MP3 mode press to access the next track When using a flash thumb drive press to access the next track 9 Play Pause Press to play or pause a DVD disc or flash thumb drive track 10 TITLE Press to access the on screen display of the root DVD disc menu 11 STOP Press to stop the current DVD disc or flash thumb drive track 12 q iy Speaker Headphone Single Dual Play P
369. or external a tongue load of 10 15 conventional trailer and driver only 150 lb 68 kg Consult your authorized dealer or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your authorized dealer for more detailed information WARNING Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the Safety Compliance Certification Label WARNING Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the original tires because they may lower the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limitations Replacement tires with a higher limit than the original tires do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations WARNING Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in serious damage to the vehicle and or personal injury 268 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Steps for determining the correct load limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 65
370. or in the event that the front passenger frontal airbag is enabled may inflate the indicator lamp will be unlit The front passenger sensing system is designed to disable will not inflate the front passenger s frontal airbag when a rear facing infant seat a forward facing child restraint or a booster seat is detected e When the front passenger sensing system disables will not inflate the front passenger frontal airbag the indicator lamp will illuminate and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is disabled e If the child restraint has been installed and the indicator lamp is not lit then turn the vehicle off remove the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the restraint following the child restraint manufacturer s instructions The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable may inflate the front passenger s frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger seat e When the front passenger sensing system enables the front passenger frontal airbag may inflate the indicator will be unlit and stay unlit If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger s seat but the passenger airbag off or pass airbag off indicator lamp is lit it is possible that the person isn t sitting properly in the seat If this happens e Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the full uprig
371. ormance of your vehicle which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death Additionally the use of non recommended tires and wheels could cause steering suspension axle or transfer case power transfer unit failure The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in rain and snow However in some climates you may need to use snow tires and cables If you need to use cables it is recommended that steel wheels of the same size and specifications be used as cables may chip aluminum wheels Note The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle damage Do not remove these components from your vehicle when using snow tires and chains Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains e If possible avoid fully loading your vehicle e Use only SAE Class S snow chains snow cables or equivalent on the front axle for P235 55R19 equipped vehicles The use of snow chains snow cables or other traction assist devices that are larger than SAE Class S may cause damage to your vehicle s wheel house suspension and or body e Do not install tire chains cables or optional traction devices on the rear tires This could cause damage to the vehicle s wheel house or body e Do not use tire chains cables or optional traction devices with optional 255 45R20 tires Install cable chains securely verifying that the cables do not touch any w
372. ot detect parked vehicles humans animals or infrastructure fences guard rails trees etc The BLIS does not function when the transmission is in R Reverse or P Park The BLIS does not provide any additional warning when your turn signal is activated BLIS detection limitations Due to the nature of radar technology there may be certain instances where vehicles entering and exiting the blind spot zones may not be detected Below is a list of circumstances that may cause non detection e Debris build up on the rear quarter panel fascias e Certain maneuvering of vehicles entering and exiting the blind zone e Vehicles passing through the blind zone at very fast rates e Severe weather conditions e When several vehicles forming a convoy pass through the blind zone BLIS False Alerts Due to the nature of radar technology there may be certain instances when the BLIS will alert with no object present in the blind zone This is known as a false alert Some level of false alerts are normal Circumstances that may cause a false alert are guardrails freeway concrete walls cyclone fencing sharp turns around a pole or building or coming to a stop with a vehicle directly behind but very close False alerts are temporary and self correct 311 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Cross traffic alert CTA system operation The CTA system warns the driver of approaching vehicles when R Reve
373. ote Start Systems section Note The MyKey can be cleared within the same key cycle that it was created otherwise a standard key administrator key is required to clear the MyKey programming To clear all MyKeys go to Step 2 in the Clear MyKey section Programming MyKey Optional Settings Turn the ignition on using an admin key To program the optional settings use the message center buttons to do the following 1 Press SETUP until RESET FOR MYKEY SETTINGS is displayed 2 Press and release the RESET button to display MyKey setup menus The first menu shown is MYKEY MAX MPH lt 80 MPH gt OFF 3 If you don t want to change the maximum speed setting press the SETUP button to display the next menu The remaining menus appear as follows with the default settings shown MYKEY MPH TONES 45 55 65 lt OFF gt MYKEY VOLUME LIMIT lt ON gt OFF MYKEY ADVTRAC CTRL ON lt OFF gt 4 On any of the menus press RESET to highlight your choice with the Sm 5 Press SETUP to enter your choice The next optional setting will be displayed 6 Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until you are done changing the optional settings Clear MyKey M To reset all MyKeys as admin keys do the following 1 Turn the vehicle on using the admin key 146 2011 MKT mki Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security 2 Press SETUP until PRESS RESET TO CLEAR MYKEY is displayed 3 Press and release the RESET button HOLD RESET TO
374. ould be changed prior to storage as used engine oil contain contaminates that may cause engine damage e Start the engine every 15 days Run at fast idle until it reaches normal operating temperature e With your foot on the brake shift through all the gears while the engine is running Fuel system e Fill the fuel tank with high quality fuel until the first automatic shutoff of the fuel pump nozzle Note During extended periods of vehicle storage 80 days or more fuel may deteriorate due to oxidation Add Motorcraft Gas Stabilizer or equivalent meeting Ford material specification ESE M99C112 A to the vehicle fuel system whenever actual or expected storage periods exceed 30 days Follow the instructions on the additive label The vehicle should then be operated at idle speed to circulate the additive throughout the fuel system Cooling system e Protect against freezing temperatures e When removing vehicle from storage check coolant fluid level Confirm there are no cooling system leaks and fluid is at the recommended level Battery e Check and recharge as necessary Keep connections clean e If storing your vehicle for more than 30 days without recharging the battery it may be advisable to disconnect the battery cables to ensure battery charge is maintained for quick starting Note If battery cables are disconnected it will be necessary to reset memory features 411 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fu
375. our vehicle to the authorized dealer Repairs will be made using Ford or Motorcraft parts or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized by Ford Away from home If you are away from home when your vehicle needs service contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center or use the online resources listed below to find the nearest authorized dealer In the United States Mailing address Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center P O Box 6248 Dearborn MI 48121 Telephone 1 800 392 3673 FORD TDD for the hearing impaired 1 800 232 5952 Online Additional information and resources are available online at www genuineservice com e U S dealer locator by Dealer Name City State or Zip Code e Owner Guides e Maintenance Schedules e Recalls e Ford Extended Service Plans e Ford Genuine Accessories 355 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance e Service specials and promotions In Canada Mailing address Ford vehicles Customer Relationship Centre Ford Motor Company of Canada Limited P O Box 2000 Oakville Ontario L6J 5E4 Telephone 1 800 565 3673 FORD Online www ford ca Mailing address Lincoln vehicles Lincoln Centre Ford Motor Company of Canada Limited P O Box 2000 Oakville Ontario L6J 5E4 Telephone 1 800 387 9333 Online www lincolncanada com Additional assistance If you have questions or concerns or are unsatisfied with the service you
376. p shoulder belts and seat latches for wear and function eck parking brake for proper operation eck safety warning lamps brake ABS airbag safety belt for operation eck cooling system fluid level and coolant strength eck battery connections and clean if necessary eck washer spray wiper operation and clean all wiper blades replace as necessary eck and lubricate all hinges latches and outside locks Inspect for correct operation eck and lubricate door rubber weatherstrips Inspect for excessive wear eck and clean body and door drain holes Inspect for clogs and obstructions mE mi mi mi mimi mimm Multi point inspection In order to keep your vehicle running right it is important to have the systems on your vehicle checked regularly This can help identify potential issues and prevent major problems Ford Motor Company recommends the following multi point inspection be performed at every scheduled maintenance interval to help ensure your vehicle keeps running great 430 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide Mutli point inspection Recommended at every visit Check and top up fluid levels brake coolant recovery reservoir manual and automatic transmission if equipped with an underhood dipstick power steering if equipped and window washer Inspect tires for wear and check air pressure including spare Check exhaust system for leaks damage loose parts and foreign materi
377. parking space length or parked objects position have changed after the vehicle has passed the parking space e The temperature around your vehicle changes quickly such as driving from a heated garage into the cold or after leaving a car wash As a result the outside air temperature displayed in the vehicle may not be close enough to the actual temperature APA relies on correctly sensing the temperature outside for precisely positioning the vehicle BLIND SPOT MIRRORS IF EQUIPPED Blind spot mirrors have an integrated convex spotter mirror built into the upper outboard corner of the outside mirrors They are designed to assist the driver by increasing visibility along the side of the vehicle For more information on your side view mirrors refer to Exterior mirrors in the Driver Controls chapter 308 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving with blind spot mirrors Before a lane change check the main mirror first then check the blind spot mirror If no vehicles are present in the blind spot mirror and the traffic in the adjacent lane is at a safe distance signal that you are going to change lanes Glance over your shoulder to verify traffic is clear and carefully change lanes When the approaching vehicle is at a distance its image is small and near the inboard edge of the main mirror As the vehicle approaches the image becomes larger and begins to move outboard across the main mirror 1 As the veh
378. plete Steps 1 5 within 30 seconds or the procedure will have to be repeated If the procedure needs to be repeated wait a minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again 1 Turn the ignition on 2 Press the power door unlock D control on the door panel three times 3 Turn the ignition off c gt 4 Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times 5 Turn the ignition back on The horn will chirp one time to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active 152 2011 MKT mki Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security 6 To enable disable the autolock feature press the unlock control then press the lock control The horn will chirp once if autolock was deactivated or twice one short and one long chirp if autolock was activated 7 Turn the ignition off The horn will chirp once to confirm the procedure is complete Keyless entry keypad autolock enable disable procedure 1 Turn the ignition off 2 Close all the doors 3 Enter factory set 5 digit entry code 4 Press and hold the 3 e 4 While holding the 3 e 4 press the 7 e 8 5 Release the 7 e 8 6 Release the 3 e 4 The user will receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been disabled or a chirp followed by a honk to indicate the system has been enabled Autounlock feature The autounlock feature will unlock all the doors when e the ignition is on all the doors are closed and the vehicle
379. plugs only Do not insert any other object in the power outlet as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty 113 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Auxiliary power points can be found in the following locations e Near the floor in the front console bin on the driver s side e In the center console utility compartment e On the rear of the center console inside the second row center console on vehicles equipped with that feature e In the rear cargo area on the driver s side trim panel Do not use the power point for operating the cigarette lighter element if equipped To prevent the fuse from being blown do not use the power point s over the vehicle capacity of 12V DC 180W If the power point or cigar lighter socket is not working a fuse may have blown Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter for information on checking and replacing fuses To have full capacity usage of your power point the engine is required to be running to avoid unintentional discharge of the battery To prevent the battery from being discharged e do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is not running e do not leave battery chargers video game adapters computers and other devices plugged in overnight or when the
380. py See your authorized dealer 218 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always wear their safety belts even when an airbag SRS and Safety Canopy System is provided WARNING To reduce risk of injury do not obstruct or place objects in the deployment path of the inflatable Safety Canopy How does the Safety Canopy System work The design and development of the Safety Canopy System included recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of injuries related to the deployment of side airbags including the Safety Canopy The Safety Canopy System consists of the following e An inflatable curtain with a gas generator concealed behind the headliner and above the doors one on each side of vehicle e A headliner designed to flex open above the side doors to allow safety canopy deployment e The same readiness airbag light electronic control and diagnostic unit as used for the front airbags e Two crash sensors mounted in the front doors one on each side of the vehicle e Two crash sensors located at the C pillar behind the rear doors one on each side of the vehicle e Rollover sensor in the restraints control module RCM
381. quipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Care and service of the DVD player Environmental extremes DVD players which are subjected to harsh environmental conditions may be damaged or perform at less than maximum capability To avoid these outcomes whenever possible avoid exposing your DVD player to e extremely hot or cold temperatures e direct sunlight e high humidity e a dusty environment e locations where strong magnetic fields are generated Temperature extremes When the vehicle is parked under direct sunlight or in an extremely cold place for a long period of time wait until the cabin temperature of the vehicle is at normal temperature before operating the system Humidity and moisture condensation Moisture in the air will condense in the DVD player under extremely humid conditions or when moving from a cold place to a warm one Moisture condensation may cause damage to the DVD and or player If moisture condensation occurs do not insert a CD or DVD into the player If one is already in the player remove it Turn the DVD player ON to dry the moisture before inserting a DVD This could take an hour or more 86 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Foreign substances Exercise care to
382. quipped The cross traffic alert CTA system is designed to assist and warn the driver when backing out of parking spaces Press RESET to turn it on or off POWER LIFTGATE if equipped This feature allows users to open close the rear liftgate at the touch of a button Press RESET to turn it off or on EASY ENTRY This feature automatically moves the driver s seat backwards for easy exit entry from the vehicle Press RESET to turn it off or on REAR PARK AID This feature sounds a tone to warn the driver of obstacles near the rear bumper and functions only when R Reverse gear is selected Press RESET to turn it off or on TRAILER SWAY CONTROL if equipped This feature uses the electronic stability control to mitigate trailer sway Press RESET to turn it off or on TIRE MOBILITY KIT EXP 1 2 3 4 YR if equipped Use this feature to set the expiration date that is listed on the tire mobility kit sealant canister See Temporary mobility kit in the Roadside Emergencieschapter for more information on the expiration date Press the RESET control to choose the proper expiration date in years CREATE MYKEY MYKEY SETUP CLEAR MYKEY For more information refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter LANGUAGE ENGLISH SPANISH FRENCH Allows you to choose which language the message center will display in Selectable languages are English Spanish or French 23 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus I
383. r To access 1 Press the SOUND hard button 2 Press the appropriate tab to select from Bass Treble Press to increase or to decrease the levels 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus f THX Demo a Cirata OFF Boyz Men ee Foo End Of The Roed 53 Entertainment Systems Balance Fade Press to adjust the sound between the left and right speakers Balance and to adjust the sound to the front and rear speakers Fade SCV Speed compensated volume 10 1 Sam With this feature on the radio volume changes automatically with ja Speed Compenested Volume SCV vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise Select a level of compensation between 1 and 7 by pressing the corresponding button DSP Digital Signal Processing Depending on your option package you may either select from Stereo Cars Sore rowers eas or Surround Sound Stereo Kenny Chesney Don t Blink Or you may choose to optimize the W 01 40 sound quality for All Seats Driver Seat or Rear Seat Digital Signal Processing DSP Driver Sest Poer Seer 54 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Visualizer Press to turn the audio visualizer display on or off Note Turning the visualizer setting to off will not remove the visualizer on the home screen You will need to select a different view in order to remove the visualizer THX D
384. r when the time mileage km reading indicates service is due Example 1 The OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message comes on at 28 751 miles 46 270 km perform the 30 000 mile 48 000 km automatic transmission fluid replacement Example 2 The OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message has not come on but the odometer reads 30 000 miles 48 000 km perform the engine air filter replacement i e Intelligent Oil Life Monitor was reset at 25 000 miles 40 000 km 441 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide Operating in dusty conditions such as unpaved or dusty roads Inspect frequently service as Replace cabin air filter if equipped required Replace engine air filter Every 5 000 miles 8 000 km Rotate tires inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise wear looseness or drag Every 5 000 miles 8 000 km or Change engine oil and replace oil filter 6 months Every 30 000 miles 48 000 km Change automatic transmission fluid not required on Fiesta or vehicles equipped with a 6R80 transmission Every 50 000 miles 80 000 km Change manual transmission fluid Reset your Intelligent Oil Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter change refer to the Instrument Cluster chapter Exclusive use of E85 Flex Fuel Vehicles only Every oil change interval If ran exclusively on E85 fill
385. r an extended period of time 30 days or more refer to the following maintenance recommendations to ensure your vehicle stays in good operating condition All motor vehicles and their components were engineered and tested for reliable regular driving Long term storage under various conditions may lead to component degradation or failure unless specific precautions are taken to preserve the components General e Store all vehicles in a dry ventilated place e Protect from sunlight if possible e If vehicles are stored outside they require regular maintenance to protect against rust and damage Body e Wash vehicle thoroughly to remove dirt grease oil tar or mud from exterior surfaces rear wheel housing and underside of front fenders See the Cleaning chapter for more information e Periodically wash vehicles stored in exposed locations 410 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications e Touch up raw or primed metal to prevent rust e Cover chrome and stainless steel parts with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent discoloration Re wax as necessary when the vehicle is washed See the Cleaning chapter for more information Lubricate all hood door and trunk lid hinges and latches with a light grade oil See the Cleaning chapter for more information e Cover interior trim to prevent fading e Keep all rubber parts free from oil and solvents Engine e The engine oil and filter sh
386. r filter amp cabin air filter replacement Engine air filter and cabin air filter life is dependent on exposure fo dusty and dirty conditions Vehicles operated in these conditions will require frequent inspection and replacement of the engine air filter and cabin air filter 445 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide COOLANT CHANGE RECORD Engine coolant change coolant whichever comes first 446 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Engine coolant change log DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide Deater VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace Deater VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace Index A Automatic transaxle fluid refill capacities 414 Accessing the help screen 52 fluid specification 414 Accessing the music in your Automatic transmission JUKEDOX sss dalarlar ii 47 driving an auto
387. r icon A disc will appear beneath the icon signifying it is the current selection 3 Press v to select and enter the TV display menu 4 When TV display is highlighted press gt to enter the menu 5 Press A IV to select from the following settings Normal P S Pan and Scan Displays the wide picture on the screen with a portion of the left and right sides removed Normal L B Letter Box Displays the wide picture with black bands on the upper and lower portions of the screen e Wide Displays the wide picture 6 When the desired selection is highlighted press ENTER on the remote control to confirm the selection OSD language This screen allows you to select the E 7 gt E language you would like for use with General Setup Page the DVD player commands and ee pila set up screens FR MS A Fran ais Deutsch italano Espa ol Portugues To access 1 Press SETUP on the remote to access the menu options 80 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 2 Press lt q gt to highlight the monitor icon A disc will appear beneath the icon signifying it is the current selection 3 Press vy to select and enter the OSD language menu 4 When OSD Lang is highlighted press to access the menu 5 Press A IV to select from all available languages 6 When the desired language is highlighted press ENTER on the remote to confirm the selection Note The default langu
388. r to On board diagnostics OBD II in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter If the light is blinking engine misfire is occurring which could damage your catalytic converter Drive in a moderate fashion avoid heavy acceleration and deceleration and have your vehicle serviced immediately by your authorized dealer WARNING Under engine misfire conditions excessive exhaust temperatures could damage the catalytic converter the fuel system interior floor coverings or other vehicle components possibly causing a fire Brake system warning light To confirm the brake system warning light is functional it will momentarily illuminate when the BRAKE ignition is turned on when the engine is not running or in a position between on and start or by applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned on If the brake system warning light does not illuminate at this time seek service immediately from your authorized dealer Illumination after releasing the parking brake indicates low brake fluid level or a brake system malfunction and the brake system should be inspected immediately by your authorized dealer WARNING Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning light on is dangerous A significant decrease in braking performance may occur It will take you longer to stop the vehicle Have the vehicle checked by your authorized dealer Driving extended distances with the parking brake engaged can cause brake failure and the risk
389. r to help control the wheels from over spinning When the brakes have cooled down the system will regain all features Anti lock braking RSC and ESC will continue to function during the cool down period The engine traction control and brake traction control system may be deactivated in certain situations See the Switching off traction control section following Electronic stability control ESC Electronic stability control ESC may enhance your vehicle s directional stability during adverse maneuvers for example when cornering severely or avoiding objects in the roadway ESC operates by applying brakes to one or more of the wheels individually and if necessary reducing engine power if the system detects that the vehicle is about to skid or slide laterally During ESC events the stability control light in the instrument cluster will flash Certain adverse driving maneuvers may activate the ESC system which include but are not limited to e Taking a turn too fast e Maneuvering quickly to avoid an accident pedestrian or obstacle e Driving over a patch of ice or other slippery surfaces e Changing lanes on a snow rutted road e Entering a snow free road from a snow covered side street or vice versa e Entering a paved road from a gravel road or vice versa e Cornering while towing a heavily loaded trailer refer to Trailer towing in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter 287 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Prin
390. rade assist function has been turned on refer to the Driving chapter Low tire pressure warning Illuminates when your tire pressure is low If the light remains on at O start up or while driving the tire pressure should be checked Refer to Inflating your tires in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter When the ignition is first turned to on the light will iluminate for three seconds to ensure the bulb is working If the light does not turn on or begins to flash have the system inspected by your authorized dealer For more information on this system refer to Tire pressure monitoring system TPMS in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter 15 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Adaptive cruise control ACC Cif equipped Illuminates when ACC is engaged while following a vehicle Refer to Adaptive cruise control in the Driver Controls chapter for more information Speed control Illuminates when the speed control is engaged or when the ACC is engaged without following a vehicle Turns off when the speed control system is disengaged or when the ACC is activated Anti theft system Flashes when the SecuriLock passive anti theft system has been activated Turn signal Illuminates when the left or right turn signal or the hazard lights are turned on If the indicators flash faster check for a burned out bulb High beams Illuminates when the high beam
391. rain the largest child in the front seat When installing a child safety seat with combination lap shoulder belts e Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position e Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap and feel it latch Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle e Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety seat with the tongue between the child seat and the release button to help prevent accidental unbuckling Place vehicle seat back in upright position e Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode Refer to Step 5 below This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip WARNING Depending on where you secure a child restraint and depending on the child restraint design you may block access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and or LATCH lower anchors rendering those features potentially unusable To avoid risk of injury occupants should only use seating positions where they are able to be properly restrained Perform the following steps when installing the child seat with combination lap shoulder belts Note Although the child seat illustrated is a forward facing child seat the steps are the same for installing a rear facing child seat 227 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 1 Position the child safety seat in a seat with a combination lap and shoulder belt
392. raking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the GVWR not GCWR Trailer brake controller connector if equipped The trailer brake controller connector is located under the it instrument panel above the brake NE W pedal za e Trailer lamps Trailer lamps are reguired on most towed vehicles Make sure all running lights brake lights turn signals and hazard lights are working Do not connect trailer lamps directly to your vehicle s tail lamps This can cause damage to your vehicle s electrical system Contact your authorized dealer or trailer rental agency for proper instructions and equipment for hooking up trailer lamps 273 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Driving while you tow When towing a trailer Turn off the speed control The speed control may shut off automatically when you are towing on long steep grades It is recommended to select the M gear position when additional engine braking is needed In situations such as prolonged downhill driving on steep grades e driving in mountainous areas additional engine braking is needed to reduce the load on the vehicle s regular brake system to prevent them from overheating For more information on transmission operation and gear positions see Automatic transmission operation in the Driving chapter Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached anticipate stop
393. ransmitters to operate garage doors entry gate operators security systems entry door locks and home or office lighting WARNING When programming your HomeLink Wireless Control System to a garage door or gate be sure that people and objects are out of the way to prevent potential injury or damage Do not use the HomeLink Wireless Control System with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by U S federal safety standards this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1 1982 A garage door which cannot detect an object signaling the door to stop and reverse does not meet current U S federal safety standards For more information contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 Retain the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future programming procedures i e new HomeLink equipped vehicle purchase It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle the programmed Homelink buttons be erased for security purposes refer to Programming in this section Programming Do not program HomeLink with the vehicle parked in the garage Note Your vehicle may require the ignition switch to be turned to the accessory position for programming and or operation of the HomeLink It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for quicker training and accurate
394. rear seating position of your vehicle Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in a front seating position 223 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children Use any attachment method as indicated below by X LATCH LATCH lower lower Restraint Child anchors anchors Type Weight Rear facing child seat Forward facing child seat WARNING Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the vehicle seat all the way back When possible all children age 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position If all children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating position properly restrain the largest child in the front seat 224 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Always carefully follow the instructions and warnings provided by the manufacturer of any child restraint to determine if the restraint device is appropriate for your child s size height weight or age Follow the child restraint manufacturer s instructions and warnings provided for installation and use in conjunction with the instructions an
395. recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust fumes from entering the vehicle Refer to the Climate Controls chapter for more information In case of roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle please refer to Wrecker towing in the Roadside Emergencies chapter These guidelines are designed to prevent damage to your vehicle Front wheel drive FWD vehicles Tow your FWD vehicle with all four wheels on the ground or with the front wheels off the ground by using a tow dolly If you are using a tow dolly follow the instructions specified by the equipment provider All wheel drive AWD vehicles Tow your AWD vehicle with all four wheels on the ground or with all four wheels off the ground using a vehicle transport trailer Do not tow your AWD vehicle with the front wheels off the ground by using a tow dolly and the rear wheels on the ground this will cause damage to your AWD system If you are using a vehicle transport trailer follow the instruction specified by the equipment provider Note If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground follow these instructions Tow only in the forward direction Release the parking brake Place the transmission shift lever in N Neutral Place the ignition in the accessory position refer to Starting in the Driving chapter Do not exceed 65 mph 105 km h Start the engine and allow it to run for five minutes at the beginning of each day and at each fuel stop 275 2011 MKT mkt
396. red ExtraCare Covers 113 components and includes many high tech items BaseCare Covers 84 components PowertrainCare Covers 29 critical components Ford ESP is honored by all Ford Lincoln and Mercury Dealers in the U S and Canada It s the only extended service plan authorized and backed by Ford Motor Company That means you get e Reliable quality service anywhere you go e Factory trained technicians e Genuine Ford and Motorcraft Parts Rental car reimbursement If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered repairs you are eligible for rental car coverage including Bumper to Bumper warranty repairs or manufacturer s recalls Transferable coverage If you sell your vehicle before your Ford ESP coverage expires you can transfer any remaining coverage to the new owner Whenever you re ready to sell your car prospective buyers may feel better about taking a risk on your used vehicle Ford ESP may add resale value Plus exclusive 24 7 roadside assistance including e Towing flat tire change and battery jump starts e Out of fuel and lock out assistance e Travel expense reimbursement for lodging meals and rental car e Destination assistance for taxi shuttle rental car coverage and emergency transportation 423 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Ford Extended Service Plan Ford ESP Can Quickly Pay for Itself One service bill the cost of parts and labor can easi
397. ress to switch between Single Play same media playing through all speakers and Dual Play headphone mode the rear speakers are muted You can also press the 2 and 4 memory presets on the audio system at the same time to perform the same function Note Whenever either headrest system presses this button both systems will automatically go into dual play mode In order to return to single play mode you must press this button on both headrest systems 13 Numeric Keypad Use the numeric controls to enter in a specific CD MP3 track or DVD chapter to be played 14 C Cancel Press to cancel clear the numeric input i e chapter number 73 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 15 MEDIA for Monitor A In Dual Play mode press MEDIA repeatedly to select from the possible media sources Monitor A Monitor B AM FMI FM2 SRI SR2 SR3 satellite radio if equipped Disc Jukebox if equipped and SYNC if equipped The selected media type will display on the screen When Monitor A is chosen you can also use the auxiliary inputs and the USB port on the headrest system MEDIA for Monitor B In Dual Play mode press MEDIA repeatedly to select from the possible media sources Monitor A Monitor B The selected media type will display on the screen When Monitor B is chosen you can also use the auxiliary inputs and USB port on the headrest system For further information please refer to Sing
398. rgency Since the parking brake applies only the rear brakes the vehicle s stopping distance will increase greatly and the handling of your vehicle will be adversely affected Press the parking brake pedal downward again to release the parking brake Driving with the parking brake on will cause the brakes to wear out quickly and reduce fuel economy Note If the vehicle is driven with the parking brake applied a chime will sound ADVANCETRAC WITH ROLL STABILITY CONTROL RSC STABILITY ENHANCEMENT SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with the AdvanceTrac with RSC system The AdvanceTrac with RSC system provides the following stability enhancement features for certain driving situations e Traction control system TCS which functions to help avoid drive wheel spin and loss of traction e Electronic stability control ESC which functions to help avoid skids or lateral slides e Roll Stability Control RSC which functions to help avoid a vehicle roll over 284 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving WARNING Vehicle modifications involving braking system aftermarket roof racks suspension steering system tire construction and or wheel tire size may change the handling characteristics of the vehicle and may adversely affect the performance of the AdvanceTrac with RSC system In addition installing any stereo loudspeakers may interfere with and adversely affect the Advanc
399. rocedure before you begin 1 Place the new unprogrammed intelligent access key in the pocket inside the center console utility compartment 166 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security 2 Press the driver or passenger power door unlock control three times 3 Press and release the brake pedal one time 4 Press the driver or passenger power door lock control three times 5 Press and release the brake pedal one time The indicator on the Start Stop button should begin to rapidly flash indicating that programming mode has been entered and two programmed intelligent access keys have been detected in the vehicle 6 Within one minute press the start stop button A message will be displayed on the message center indicating that the new intelligent access key was programmed If four intelligent access keys have already been programmed to your vehicle you cannot program anymore and the message MAX OF KEYS LEARNED will be displayed on the message center 7 Remove ere access key from utility compartment pocket and press the or control on the newly programmed intelligent access keys to exit programming mode 8 Verify that the remote entry functions operate Cock unlock and that the vehicle starts with new intelligent access key If the intelligent access key has been successfully programmed it can be used to activate the Intelligent Access with Push Button Start feature and can be used to start your
400. rs are listening to the radio the rear seat passengers can also listen to the radio however they will be limited to listening to the same radio channel e Once you have entered Dual play mode the Channel A or Channel B controls on the headphones are now active Both Channel A and Channel B can be listened to on the wired headphones not included or on the infrared IR wireless headphones e On the wireless headphones select the Channel A or Channel B buttons on each pair of wireless headphones Press MEDIA to change the audio source for the Channel A or Channel B headphones This information will display on the DVD system screen Note Channel B headphones can only listen to either the DVD media Monitor A or the DVD system auxiliary inputs Channel A headphones have access to all available media sources 78 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Radio interaction If your vehicle is equipped with a non touchscreen audio system you can press AUX on the radio repeatedly until DVD appears in the display Then press MENU to access HEADPHONES ON OFF REAR ZONE CONTROL ON OFF and other options Turn the TUNE control to select ON OFF for HEADPHONES ON will activate Dual Play and OFF will activate Single Play For the REAR ZONE CONTROL selecting ON will give the rear seat passengers control over the DVD system and selecting OFF will turn off control for the rear seat passengers Press the
401. rse is selected and the vehicle is backing out of a front in parking spot It sounds a series of tones and flashes the BLIS indicator found on the exterior mirror on the side of the approaching vehicle Additionally the message center will display either VEHICLE COMING FROM RIGHT or VEHICLE COMING FROM LEFT to warn the driver from which direction vehicles are approaching The system is not designed to prevent contact with other vehicles or objects The system is designed to provide a warning to assist the driver in detecting vehicles in the blind zones The system will not detect infrastructure pedestrians or bicyclists WARNING To help avoid personal injury NEVER use the CTA system as a replacement for using the side and rear view mirrors and looking over your shoulder before backing out of a parking space CTA is not a replacement for careful driving and only an assist The CTA system detects vehicles approaching up to 45 feet 14 meters away Coverage decreases when vehicles and objects in close proximity block the CTA sensors refer to figure for approximate zone coverage areas sensor obstructed for vehicle on left Backing slowly from the parking spot in these situations helps to increase the sensor coverage and effectiveness 312 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving CTA coverage also decreases when parking at shallow angles refer to figure for approximate zone coverage areas
402. rt 252 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Note You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law po 99 mph I eH OE PR 106 mph GT rh O Note For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph 240 km h tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR For those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph 299 km h tire manufacturers always use the letters ZR 8 U S DOT Tire Identification Number TIN This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built For example the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997 After 2000 the numbers go to four digits For example 2501 means the 25th week of 2001 The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall 9 M S or M S Mud and Snow or AT All Terrain or AS All Season 10 Tire Ply Composition and Material Used Indicates the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and the sidewall which include steel nylon polyester a
403. rtain high temperature high load conditions take place in order to manage the engine s fluid temperatures The amount of speed reduction will depend on the vehicle loading towing grade ambient temperature and other factors If this occurs there is no need to pull off the road The vehicle can continue to be driven while this message is active WARNING To reduce the risk of collision and injury be prepared that the vehicle speed may reduce and the vehicle may not be able to accelerate with full power until the fluid temperatures reduce The air conditioning may also cycle on and off during severe operating conditions to protect overheating of the engine When the engine coolant temperature decreases to a more normal operating temperature the air conditioning will turn on once again If you notice any of the following e the engine coolant temperature gauge moves fully into the red hot area e the coolant temperature warning light illuminates e the service engine soon indicator illuminates 1 Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and place the vehicle in P Park 2 Leave the engine running until the coolant temperature gauge needle moves away from the H range After several minutes if this does not happen follow the remaining steps 3 Turn the engine off and wait for it to cool before checking the coolant level WARNING Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot 4 If the coo
404. s 352 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies WRECKER TOWING If you need to have your vehicle towed contact a professional towing service or if you are a member of a roadside assistance program your roadside assistance service provider It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment Do not tow with a slingbelt Ford Motor Company has not approved a slingbelt towing procedure On FWD vehicles if your vehicle is to be towed from the front ensure proper wheel lift equipment is used to raise the front wheels off the ground The rear wheels can be left on the ground when towed in this fashion If your vehicle is to be towed from the rear using wheel lift equipment it is recommended that the front wheels drive wheels be placed on a dolly to prevent damage to the automatic transmission On AWD vehicles it is required that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the ground to prevent damage to the automatic transmission AWD system or vehicle 353 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly vehicle damage may occur Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow truck operators Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for proper h
405. s 84 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Read all of the safety and operating instructions before operating the system and retain for future reference Do not attempt to service repair or modify the Family Entertainment System FES See your dealer Do not insert foreign objects into the DVD compartment WARNING Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let children operate the system while unsupervised If wired headphones or auxiliary systems are used children may become entangled in the cords and seriously injure themselves WARNING The front glass on the liquid crystal display LCD flip down screen may break when hit with a hard surface If the glass breaks do not touch the liquid crystalline material In case of contact with skin wash immediately with soap and water WARNING The driver should not attempt to operate any function of the DVD system while the vehicle is in motion Give full attention to driving and to the road Pull off the road in a safe place before inserting or extracting DVDs from the system A remote control is included in the system to allow the rear seat occupants to operate the FES functions without distracting the driver Do not expose the liquid crystal display LCD flip down screen to direct sunlight or intensive ultraviolet rays for extensive periods of time Ultraviolet rays deteriorate the liquid crystal Be sure to review User M
406. s Driver Controls The tilt function is adjusted by moving the control up or down During easy exit when the ignition is switched off the column will move to the full in and up position When the ignition is put in accessory mode the column will return to the previous setting WARNING Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving ILLUMINATED VISOR MIRROR Lift the mirror cover to turn on the visor mirror lamp Slide on rod feature The visor will slide back and forth on the rod for increased sunlight coverage Rotate the visor toward the side window and extend it rearward for additional sunlight coverage Note To stow the visor back into the headliner visor must be retracted before moving it back toward the windshield OVERHEAD CONSOLE The appearance of your vehicle s overhead console will vary according to your option package 110 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Storage compartment The storage compartment may be used to store a pair of sunglasses Press the release area on the rear edge of the bin door to open the storage compartment The door will open to the full open position ELECTRONIC COMPASS The compass heading is displayed in the touchscreen CENTER CONSOLE Your vehicle may be equipped with a variety of console features These include 1 Cupholders 2 Utility compartment with coin holder
407. s Locks and Security POWER DOOR LOCKS e Press the control to unlock all doors a e Press the control to lock all doors a 5 Smart unlocks The smart unlock feature is intended to prevent you from unintentionally locking your IA key inside your vehicle s passenger compartment When you lock your vehicle using the driver or passenger power door lock control with the door open after you close the door the vehicle will search for an IA key in the passenger compartment If an IA key is found inside the vehicle all of the doors will immediately unlock and the horn will chirp indicating that the IA key is inside In order to override the smart unlock feature and intentionally lock the IA key inside the vehicle you can lock your vehicle using your keyless entry keypad or using the control on another IA key Refer to Keyless entry system in this chapter for more information on keyless entry keypad operation Global open close windows You can open and close the vehicle s windows by using the 2 and A controls on the transmitter Refer to Power windows in the Driver Controls chapter for more information Central locking two stage unlocking When unlocking the driver door with the key turn it once toward the rear of the vehicle to unlock that door only if the two stage unlocking is enabled Turn the key a second time to unlock all doors When locking turn the key toward the front of the vehicle to lock all
408. s Maintenance and Specifications Brakes e Make sure brakes and parking brake are fully released Tires e Maintain recommended air pressure Miscellaneous e Make sure all linkages cables levers and pins under vehicle are covered with grease to prevent rust e Move vehicles at least 25 feet 8 m every 15 days to lubricate working parts and prevent corrosion Removing vehicle from storage When your vehicle is ready to come out of storage do the following e Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt or grease film build up on window surfaces e Check windshield wipers for any deterioration e Check under the hood for any foreign material that may have collected during storage mice squirrel nests e Check the exhaust for any foreign material that may have collected during storage e Check tire pressures and set tire inflation per the Tire Label e Check brake pedal operation Drive the vehicle 15 ft 4 5 meters back and forth to remove rust build up e Check fluid levels including coolant oil and gas to make sure there are no leaks and fluids are at recommended levels e If the battery was removed clean the battery cable ends and inspect If you have any concerns or issues contact your authorized dealer 412 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS 3 7L V6 Engine 3 5L V6 EcoBoost Engine element BXT 65 750 BXT 65 750 Oil filt
409. s Seating and Safety Restraints FRONT SEATING WARNING Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the seat s safety belt resulting in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision WARNING Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to reduce the risk of injury in a collision or sudden stop WARNING Before returning the seatback to its original position make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback After returning the seatback to its original position pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched An unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision WARNING Never adjust the driver s seat or seatback when the vehicle is moving WARNING Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips First row adjustable head restraints Your vehicle is equipped with front row outboard head restraints that are vertically adjustable WARNING To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash the driver and passenger occupants should not sit in and or operate the vehicle until the head restraint is placed in its proper position The driver should never adjust the head restraint while the vehicle is in motion 170 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The adjustable head restraints consist of e a trimmed energy absorbing foam an
410. s etc If it is a supported file type it will play If it is not supported CAN T PLAY will appear in the monitor Scroll through the contents on the rest of the drive using the arrow keys on the DVD headrest or remote Press SEL to confirm a selection Each headrest system automatically recognizes the audio and video files that are stored and provides a menu from which to choose the desired selection Wired headphone jack 5 Use for dual play mode 2 Connect an auxiliary audio video source game systems personal camcorders video cassette recorders etc by connecting RCA cords not included to the RCA gt 71 jacks behind the cover panels on the m ORIO right corner of the system e Yellow 1 video input e White 2 left channel audio input e Red 8 right channel audio input 3 Whatever is plugged in will automatically begin to play on your screen If your auxiliary source does not have a video signal or if the DVD system does not detect a video signal from the auxiliary source the screen will remain black 69 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems DVD player controls T E 1 11 Play Pause Press to play or pause a CD DVD or flash thumb drive track 2 gi Stop Press to stop the current DVD CD MP3 or flash thumb drive track 3 A Eject Press to eject a disc from the DVD system
411. s smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control system is not working properly An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust to enter the vehicle Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust system inspected and repaired immediately WARNING Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine By law vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures repairs services sells leases trades vehicles or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent it from working Information about your vehicle s emission system is on the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the engine This decal also lists engine displacement Please consult your Warranty Guide for complete emission warranty information On board diagnostics OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine s emission control system This system is commonly known as the on board diagnostics system OBD II The OBD II system protects the environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet government emission standards The OBD II system also assists your authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle When the service engine soon indicator illuminates the OBD II system has detected a malfuncti
412. s roadside jump starting 350 running out of fuel 349 396 Emission control system fail safe cooling idle speedcontrol lubrication specifications refillcapacities service points 374 375 Engine block heater Engine Oil esmesi checking and adding dipstck filter specifications refillcapacities Specifications Eventdatarecording Exhaust fumes F Fail safe cooling Family entertainment system Fleet MyKey programming Floor MAS emmi 137 138 Fluid capacities POS TAMU neresnico Four Wheel Drive vehicles drivingoffroad Freezer 2011 MKT mki Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus calculating fuel ECONOMY siyer nz 20 397 CAD A SEENE 393 Capacity serisi beta aleme eldesi 414 choosing the right fuel 394 detergentinfuel 396 filler funnel sims mesane 396 filling your vehicle withfuel 391 393 397 filter specifications 391 413 fuel pump shut off 324 improving fuel economy 397 octane rating 395 41
413. s Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 2 Select the Rear DVD A tab on MEDIA peer ovo the touchscreen to access the li Monitor A headrest system badi Press to access the previous track Press and hold to reverse in the current track bb Press to access the next track Press and hold to advance within the current track gt il Play Pause Press to play or pause the current track 3 Select the Rear DVD B tab on the touchscreen to view the status of the Monitor B headrest system OVD Command Contra Rear Zone if equipped This screen allows front seat passengers to select listen to a different audio video source than the back seat passengers The only restriction is that the front and back seat passengers cannot both listen to a different frequency band AM FM1 FM2 The frequency band selected by the driver is the band accessible by the rear passenger To access 1 Ensure that the system is ON 2 Press the MEDIA or RADIO hard button on the system 3 Select the Rear Zone tab on the touchscreen 50 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems The screen will show you the MEDIA hasr zona selected playing media of both DVD Rear Zone Control headrest systems and headsets A Oo CNT and B To make adjustments Aa _ REAR DVD B ensure that the correct system A a or B is highlighted The appropriate controls will appear to allow you to
414. s and brake gradually Servicing after towing If you tow a trailer for long distances your vehicle will require more frequent service intervals Refer to Special operating conditions in the Scheduled Maintenance Guide chapter Trailer towing tips Practice turning stopping and backing up before starting on a trip to get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination When turning make wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached If you are driving down a long or steep hill shift into the lowest gear position Do not apply the brakes continuously as they may overheat and become less effective The trailer tongue weight should be 10 15 of the loaded trailer weight After you have traveled 50 miles 80 km thoroughly check your hitch electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts To aid in engine transmission cooling and A C efficiency during hot weather while stopped in traffic place the gearshift lever in P Park Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade If you must park on a grade place wheel chocks under the trailer s wheels 274 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading RECREATIONAL TOWING Follow these guidelines for your specific powertrain combination to tow your vehicle for personal travel such as behind a motor home or a truck Note Put your climate control system in
415. s damage to the rear bumper fascia leaving it misaligned or bent the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms 298 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving REARVIEW CAMERA SYSTEM The rearview camera system located on the liftgate provides a video image which appears on the navigation system screen of the area behind the vehicle It adds assistance to the driver while reversing or reverse parking the o vehicle in To use the camera system place the transmission in R Reverse an image will display on the navigation screen The area displayed on the screen may vary according to the vehicle orientation and or road condition e 1 Rear bumper e 2 Red zone e 3 Yellow zone e 4 Green zone e 5 Center line of vehicle Always use caution while backing Objects in the red zone are closest to your vehicle and objects in the green zone are further away Objects are getting closer to your vehicle as they move from the green zone to the yellow or red zones Use the side mirrors and rearview mirror to get better coverage on both sides and rear of the vehicle When shifting out of reverse and into any other gear the image will remain on for a few seconds before it shuts off to assist in parking or trailer hookup After shifting out of R Reverse and into any gear other than P Park the image will remain until the vehicle speed re
416. s for high speed driving EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM tC Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with applicable exhaust emission standards To make sure that the catalytic converter and other emission control components continue to work properly e Use only the specified fuel listed e Avoid running out of fuel e Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving especially at high speeds e Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance information performed according to the specified schedule The scheduled maintenance items listed in scheduled maintenance information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system If other than Ford Motorcraft or Ford authorized parts are used for maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting emission control such non Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability 400 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications WARNING Do not park idle or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system which can start a fire Illumination of the service engine soon eee indicator charging system warning light or the temperature warning light fluid leaks strange odor
417. s section The yellow ACC indicator light in the instrument cluster will be illuminated and the message center will temporarily display a preset GAP lt gt The vehicle will maintain a constant distance between the vehicle ahead until e The vehicle in front of you accelerates to a speed above the set speed e The vehicle in front of you moves out of your lane or out of view e The vehicle speed falls below 18 mph 80 km h e A new gap distance is set 124 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls The vehicle brakes will be automatically applied to slow the vehicle to maintain a safe distance between the vehicle in front The maximum braking which is applied by the ACC system is limited and can be overridden by the driver applying the brakes If the ACC system predicts that its maximum braking level will not be sufficient an audible warning will sound while the ACC continues to EN brake This is accompanied by the heads up display a red warning bar illuminating on the windshield The driver should take immediate action sit Cd b LL va Note The brakes may emit a sound when they are being modulated by the adaptive cruise control system WARNING Adaptive cruise control only warns of vehicles detected by the radar sensor In some cases there may be no warning or the warning may be delayed The driver should always apply the brakes when necessary Failing to do so may re
418. s to face downward Push the screen back in place until it latches to return it to a stowed position Note Ensure that you do not pull the LCD screen too far forward as it can cause damage 10 CD DVD slot Insert the disc label side facing the rear passengers 71 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Remote control Unless otherwise stated all operations can be carried out with the remote control Always point the remote control directly at the player Ensure that there are no obstructions between the remote and player Press the MON A B control to select either Monitor A or Monitor B Note Each headrest monitor is labeled with an identifier either A or B found in the upper right corner of the system Note Use the remote to adjust the volume levels for wired headphones for headrest media sources only DVD USB port and auxiliary inputs To adjust the volume levels on the infrared wireless headphones provided with your system first use the remote control volume controls to adjust volume settings to maximum then use the rotary volume control on the side of the headphones to adjust the volume to the desired listening level e 8 gt 61 1 ee Cv ISPLAY 1 Q On off Press to turn each monitor headrest system on or off 2 Cursor controls Use in various active menus to advance the cursor up down left right When not in a menu the left and right curs
419. sappear produce audio for shortly the selected channel SAT FAULT Internal module or If this message does not system failure clear within a short period present of time or with an ignition key cycle your receiver may have a fault See your authorized dealer for service available choose another preset UNSUBSCRIBED Subscription not Contact SIRIUS at CHANNEL available for this 1 888 539 7474 to channel subscribe to the channel or tune to another channel NO SIGNAL Loss of signal from You are in a location that is the SIRIUS satellite blocking the SIRIUS signal or SIRIUS tower to i e tunnel under an the vehicle antenna overpass dense foliage etc The system is working properly When you move into an open area the signal should return UPDATING Update of channel No action required The programming in process may take up to progress three minutes CALL SIRIUS Satellite service has Call SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474 been deactivated by 1 888 539 7474 to SIRIUS Satellite re activate or resolve Radio subscription issues 66 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems FAMILY ENTERTAINMENT DVD SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe op
420. shooting 1 Do not connect the audio input jack to a line level output Line level outputs are intended for connection to a home stereo and are not compatible with the AlJ The AIJ will only work correctly with devices that have a headphone output with a volume control 2 Do not set the portable music player s volume level higher than is necessary to match the volume of the CD or FM radio in your audio system as this will cause distortion and will reduce sound quality Many portable music players have different output levels so not all players should be set at the same levels Some players will sound best at full volume and others will need to be set at a lower volume 60 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 3 If the music sounds distorted at lower listening levels turn the portable music player volume down If the problems persists replace or recharge the batteries in the portable music player 4 The portable music player must be controlled in the same manner when it is used with headphones as the AIJ does not provide control play pause etc over the attached portable music player 5 For safety reasons connecting or adjusting the settings on your portable music player should not be attempted while the vehicle is moving Also the portable music player should be stored in a secure location such as the center console or the glove box when the vehicle is in motion The audio extension
421. side of the vehicle APA will park If the turn signal is not on the system will automatically search the passenger side For best performance the driver should drive the vehicle as parallel as possible while passing a parking space If driven too fast above 18 mph 30 km h for the system to measure parking spaces the message center will display ACTIVE PARK REDUCE SPEED Ea CE en GS gt 304 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving When the system has found a space the message center will display SPACE FOUND PULL FORWARD followed by a chime Drive forward until the message center displays SPACE FOUND STOP followed by a chime When you stop the vehicle in position to begin parking the message center displays REMOVE HANDS PUT IN REVERSE The driver should always come to a complete stop before changing gears Automatic steering into parking space Automatic steering is activated when you stop the vehicle remove your hands from the steering wheel and select the R Reverse gear Be sure the steering wheel motion is not obstructed by any objects The vehicle will steer itself from this point on as you follow the instructions in the message center to safely move the vehicle reverse and forward in the space You may cancel APA at anytime by grabbing the steering wheel or by pressing the APA control switch When the vehicle is in R Reverse the message center displays BACK UP USE CAUTION
422. sing a HomeLink button previously trained follow these steps 1 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button Do NOT release the button 2 The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds Without releasing the HomeLink button follow Step 1 in the Programming section For questions or comments contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 POSITIVE RETENTION FLOOR MAT WARNING Do not install additional floor mats on top of the factory installed floor mats as they may interfere with the accelerator or the brake pedals 137 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Position the floor mat so that the eyelet is over the retention post and A press down to lock in Make sure CO that the mat does not interfere with the operation of the accelerator or the brake pedal To remove the floor mat reverse the installation procedure n1 POWER LIFTGATE You can power open or close the liftgate with the following controls e Instrument panel control button e Transmitter button e Outside liftgate control button e Control button in the rear cargo area Opening and closing the power liftgate WARNING Make sure all persons are clear of the power liftgate area before using the power liftgate control WARNING To avoid injury to third row occupants when closing the liftgate ensure that the head of any occupant is not in the path of the closing liftgate WARNING Keep keys ou
423. sing headphones may prevent the driver from hearing audible warnings such as horns or emergency sirens which could result in a crash causing serious injury Give your full attention to driving and to the road Wired headphone jacks on the FES Family Entertainment System are universal so you may purchase and use additional wired headphones for your system Plug them into the 3 5 mm headphone jack s located behind the trim covers on the face of each monitor These headphones will be active when in Dual Play mode To listen to the audio on wired headphones not included connect the wired headphones into the monitor headphone jacks Available wired headphone sources are limited to the sources available to whichever monitor is being listened to Adjust the volume using the volume control on the DVD system remote control Operation Single play dual play Your DVD and audio system work together with the infrared headphones and wired headphones not included to allow the rear seat passengers to listen to the radio and other media sources over the headphones This enables the front and rear seat passengers to listen to a variety of sources a variety of ways Single Play Single play consists of all occupants in the vehicle listening to the same playing media over the front and rear speakers When the DVD system is on and in single play the same source will play through all vehicle speakers 77 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing
424. sing system will disable will not inflate the front passenger s frontal airbag if e the front passenger seat is unoccupied or has small medium objects in the front seat e the system determines that an infant is present in a rear facing infant seat that is installed according to the manufacturer s instructions e the system determines that a small child is present in a forward facing child restraint that is installed according to the manufacturer s instructions e the system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat e a front passenger takes his her weight off of the seat for a period of time e achild or a small person occupies the front passenger seat 211 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Note When the passenger airbag off light is illuminated the passenger seat mounted side airbag may be disabled to avoid the risk of airbag deployment injuries The front passenger sensing system uses a passenger airbag off or PASS AIRBAG OFF pass airbag off indicator which will illuminate and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is disabled The indicator lamp is located in the center of the instrument panel above the radio Note The indicator lamp will illuminate for a short period of time when the ignition is turned to the on position to confirm it is functional When the front passenger seat is not occupied empty seat
425. sition do not stow objects under the seat before stowing Unstowing the third row seat Note Ensure that there are no objects such as books purses or brief cases on the load floor before unstowing the seat Failure to remove all objects from the top of the load floor prior to unstowing it may cause damage to the seat Note Ensure the area under the forward portion of the load floor is free of objects before unstowing the third row seat 1 Unlatch and lift the seat out of the tub in the floor by squeezing y ey and pulling up on the handle Once the seat is at a vertical position push the seat over letting it fall onto the latches 4S A 2 To return the seatback to upright position pull the number 1 strap then while holding the number 1 strap pull the long strap located on the seatback to raise the seatback 3 Pull the head restraints up to their normal adjusted positions 189 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Ensure the seat is latched to vehicle floor by pushing pulling on seat If not latched the seat may cause injury during a sudden stop Third row power seats if equipped The Third Row Seat features a power one touch operation that allows you to adjust the Left Right or Both seats into a NORMAL STOW FOLD or TAILGATE position with just one touch of a button The third row seat also includes obstacle detectio
426. situations Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications equipment to avoid negating these benefits Mobile Communication Equipment includes but is not limited to cellular phones pagers portable email devices text messaging devices and portable two way radios WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that you use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take your focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving and that you comply with all applicable laws 8 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction EXPORT UNIQUE NON UNITED STATES CANADA VEHICLE SPECIFIC INFORMATION For your particular global region your vehicle may be equipped with features and options that are different from the features and options that are described in this Owner s Guide A market unique supplement may be supplied that complements this book By referring to the market unique supplement if provided you can properly identify those features recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle This Owner s Guide is written primarily for the U S and Canadian Markets Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built for Export Refer to this Owner s Guide for all other required infor
427. sories LINCOLN CUSTOM ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE A wide selection of Lincoln Custom Accessories are available for your vehicle through your local Lincoln or Ford of Canada dealer These quality accessories have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs they are custom designed to complement the style and aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle In addition each accessory is made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Lincoln s rigorous engineering and safety specifications Ford Motor Company will repair or replace any properly dealer installed Lincoln Custom Accessories found to be defective in factory supplied materials or workmanship during the warranty period as well as any component damaged by the defective accessories The accessories will be warranted for whichever provides you the greatest benefit e 12 months or 12 000 miles 20 000 km whichever occurs first or e the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty Contact your dealer for details and a copy of the warranty Following is a list of several Lincoln Custom Accessories Not all accessories are available for all models To find out what accessories are available for your vehicle please contact your dealer or visit our online store at www lincolnaccessories com Exterior style e Deflectors eCustom graphics Interior style e Floor mats e Subwoofer eRear seat entertainment eCustom seat covers Lifestyle e Ash cup coin ho
428. ssues with the detection of vehicles in front when driving into and coming out of a bend or curve in the road In these cases ACC may brake late or unexpectedly The driver should stay alert and intervene when necessary ACC not available Several conditions exist which can cause ACC to deactivate or prevent ACC from activating when requested These conditions include e The sensor is blocked refer to Blocked sensor in this section e Brake temperature is high refer to Hilly condition usage in this section e A failure has occurred in the ACC system or related system 129 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Blocked sensor If a message regarding a blocked sensor is displayed the radar signals from the sensor have been obstructed The sensor is located behind a fascia cover near the driver side of the lower grille When the radar signals are obstructed a vehicle ahead cannot be detected and the ACC will not function The following table lists possible causes and actions for this message being displayed The surface of the radar in the Clean the grille surface in front of grille is dirty or obstructed in the radar or remove the object some way causing the obstruction The surface of the radar in the Wait a short time It may take grille is clean but the message several minutes for the radar to remains in the display detect that it is no longer obstructed Heavy rain or snow is interf
429. stem automatically enables each time the engine is started All features of the AdvanceTrac with RSC system TCS ESC and RSC are active and monitor the vehicle from start up However the system will only intervene if the driving situation requires it 285 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving The AdvanceTrac with RSC TS system includes a traction control OFF off button located on the center of the instrument panel The button could look like either of the two fa graphics shown The stability control light and the stability control off light in the instrument cluster will illuminate temporarily during start up as part of a normal system self check The stability control light may illuminate flash during certain driving situations which cause the AdvanceTrac with RSC system to operate If the stability control light illuminates steadily have the system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately The message center will also indicate a failure with the AdvanceTrac with RSC system Note If the system cannot be turned off refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information When AdvanceTrac with RSC performs a normal system self check some drivers may notice a slight movement of the brake and or a rumble grunting or grinding noise after startup and when driving off When an event occurs that activates AdvanceTrac with RSC you may experience the
430. sult in a collision serious injury or death Setting the gap distance The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you can be decreased or increased by pressing lt gt control GAP lt gt will be displayed in the message center Three gap distance settings are available 125 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Message Following Following center display distance distance at 60 mph 96 km h 29 yards 26 m GAP lt gt 44 yards 40 m Each time the vehicle is restarted the last chosen gap will be automatically selected Note It is the driver s responsibility to select a gap appropriate to the driving conditions Disengaging adaptive cruise control Press the brake pedal to disengage the adaptive cruise control CRUISE CANCELLED will be displayed in the message center Disengaging the adaptive cruise control will not erase your previous set speed Overriding adaptive cruise control WARNING Whenever the driver is overriding the ACC by pressing the accelerator pedal the ACC will not automatically apply the brakes to maintain separation from any vehicle ahead The set speed and gap distance can be overridden by pressing the accelerator pedal When the driver is overriding ACC the green cruise indicator light is illuminated and CRUISE OVERRIDE is displayed in the message center When the accelerator is released the ACC function will
431. t allowed by the active park assist system Refer to Active park assist in the Driving chapter for more information CANCELLED BY DRIVER INPUT if equipped Displayed when the autopark feature has been canceled due to driver inputs Refer to Active park assist in the Driving chapter for more information 29 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster CANCELLED BY ADV TRAC EVENT if equipped Displayed when the active park feature has been canceled due to the AdvanceTrac system activating Refer to Active park assist in the Driving chapter for more information CANCELLED BY ABS EVENT if equipped Displayed when the active park feature has been canceled due to the ABS activating Refer to Active park assist in the Driving chapter for more information ACTIVE PARK REDUCE SPEED if equipped May display when using the active park assist system See Active park assist in the Driving chapter for more information ACTIVE PARK SEARCHING if equipped May display when using the active park assist system See Active park assist in the Driving chapter for more information SPACE FOUND PULL FORWARD if equipped May display when using the active park assist system See Active park assist in the Driving chapter for more information SPACE FOUND STOP if equipped May display when using the active park assist system See Active park assist in the Driving chapter for more information
432. t of a properly seated occupant to be incorrectly interpreted by the passenger sensing system The person in the front passenger seat may appear heavier or lighter due to the conditions described in the list above WARNING To reduce the risk of possible serious injury Do not stow objects in seat back map pocket if equipped or hang objects off seat back if a child is in the front passenger seat Do not place objects underneath the front passenger seat or between the seat and the center console Gf equipped Check the passenger airbag off or pass airbag off indicator lamp for proper airbag Status Failure to follow these instructions may interfere with the front passenger seat sensing system 214 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints In case there is a problem with the e i 7 front passenger sensing system the airbag readiness lamp in the IN instrument cluster will stay lit If the airbag readiness lamp is lit do the following The driver and or adult passengers should check for any objects that may be lodged underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering with the seat If objects are lodged and or cargo is interfering with the seat please take the following steps to remove the obstruction e Pull the vehicle over e Turn the vehicle off e Driver and or adult passengers should check for any objects lodged underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfer
433. t of cargo and passengers that the vehicle is carrying The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found on the Tire Label on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire Label Look for THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX Ib for maximum payload The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant If any aftermarket or authorized dealer installed equipment has been installed on the vehicle the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload WARNING The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can be limited either by volume capacity how much space is available or by payload capacity how much weight the vehicle should carry Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle do not add more cargo even if there is space available Overloading or improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover 264 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Example only SEATING CAPACITY TOTALS FRONT2 REAR3 The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs TIRE COLD TIRE PRESSURE me sat__ counme messin SEE OWNERS MANUAL FOR 200 KPA 29 Psi ADDITIONAL
434. t of reach of children Do not allow children to play near an open or moving power liftgate The liftgate will only operate with the vehicle in P Park When the liftgate is being power closed a chime will sound three times as the liftgate begins to power close A single chime indicates a problem with the close request caused by e the ignition is on and the transmission is not in P Park e or the battery voltage is below the minimum operating voltage e or the vehicle speed is at or above 3 mph 5 km h 138 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls If the liftgate reverses and starts to close after an open request a fast continuous chime indicates excessive load on the gate or a possible strut failure If any excessive load is removed and you still have a faster chime have the system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer Do not attempt to manually force the liftgate to travel faster than the power system will permit This will activate the obstacle detection feature Note Cycling the ignition prior to completely latching the liftgate could result in damage to the liftgate and or its power components Make sure the liftgate is fully latched before operating the vehicle Care should be exercised in starting the engine before the liftgate is fully closed latched If the ignition is cycled during a liftgate power close cycle and the liftgate is 6 10 inches 15 24 cm from being latched
435. t with skin eyes or clothing Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of acid solution In case of acid contact with skin or eyes flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention If acid is swallowed call a physician immediately WARNING Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling Because your vehicle s engine is electronically controlled by a computer some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed the engine must relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and performance To begin this process 1 With the vehicle at a complete stop set the parking brake 2 Put the gearshift in P Park turn off all accessories and start the engine 3 Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature 4 Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute 5 Turn the A C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute 6 Release the parking brake With your foot on the brake pedal and with the A C on put the vehicle in D Drive and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute 7 Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process e The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles 16 km or more to relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy e If you do not allow the en
436. tailgate position Note Pressing a different button while the power seat feature is already being performed may cause the first selected seat movement to be cancelled Allow the first seat movement to be completed before pressing a button for another function Note Ensure that there are no objects such as books purses or brief cases on the load floor before unstowing the seat Failure to remove all objects from the top of the load floor prior to unstowing it may cause damage to the seat Note In order to allow the seat to complete the stowed position do not place objects under the seat before stowing Remove all objects from the seat and stowage tub Note In the unlikely event that the third row power seat stops prematurely or travels to an unexpected position press the FOLD button 3 to reset the seat and return it to a normal position 191 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Do not drive the vehicle when the third row seat is rotated backwards During a sudden stop the safety belts are not functional in this position and during a sudden stop the third row seat can rapidly tip back to the forward position all of which may result in serious injury Closing the liftgate WARNING To avoid injury to third row occupants when closing the liftgate ensure that the head of any occupant is not in the path of the closing liftgate SAFE
437. tane rating These products have not been approved for your engine and could cause damage to the fuel system Repairs to correct the effects of using an aftermarket product in your fuel may not be covered by your warranty Many of the world s automakers approved the World Wide Fuel Charter that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle Gasolines that meet the World Wide Fuel Charter should be used when available Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the World Wide Fuel Charter 395 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Cleaner air Ford endorses the use of reformulated cleaner burning gasolines to improve air quality per the recommendations in the Choosing the right fuel section Running out of fuel Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse effect on powertrain components If you have run out of fuel e You may need to cycle the ignition from off to on several times after refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to the engine On restarting cranking time will take a few seconds longer than normal e Normally adding 1 gallon 3 8L of fuel is enough to restart the engine If the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade more than 1 gallon 8 8L may be required e The service engine soon indicator may come on For more
438. tart the engine SHIFT TO PARK if equipped Displayed when the start stop button is pressed to shut off the engine with the shift select lever in any position other than P Park Refer to Fast restart feature in Push button start system in the Driving chapter for more information NO KEY DETECTED if equipped Displayed if the intelligent access key is not detected by the system in the following three scenarios e When the start stop button is pressed in an attempt to either start the engine or cycle through the ignition states e When the engine is running and a door is opened then closed e When the vehicle s speed exceeds 10 mph 16 km h for the first time after starting Refer to Push button start system in the Driving chapter for more information RESTART NOW OR KEY IS NEEDED if equipped Displayed when the start stop button is pressed to shut off the engine and a intelligent access key is not detected inside the vehicle Refer to Push button start system in the Driving chapter for more information ACCESSORY POWER ACTIVE if equipped Displayed when the vehicle is in the accessory ignition state STARTING SYSTEM FAULT if equipped Displayed when there is a problem with your vehicle s starting security system your vehicle will not be able to start See your authorized dealer for service KEY PROGRAMMED 3 KEYS TOTAL if equipped Displayed during spare key programming when a third intelligent access key
439. tates THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR TEMPORARY USE ONLY When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above do not e Exceed 50 mph 80 km h e Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the Safety Compliance Label e Tow a trailer e Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire e Use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time e Use commercial car washing equipment e Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire 334 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel location can lead to impairment of the following e Handling stability and braking performance e Comfort and noise e Ground clearance and parking at curbs e Winter weather driving capability e Wet weather driving capability 3 Full size dissimilar spare without label on wheel When driving with the full size dissimilar spare tire wheel do not e Exceed 70 mph 113 km h e Use more than one dissimilar spare tire wheel at a time e Use commercial car washing equipment e Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire wheel The usage of a full size dissimilar spare tire wheel can lead to impairment of the following e Handling stability and braking performance e Comfort and noise e Ground clearance and parking at curbs e Winter weather driving capability e Wet weather driv
440. te Note This feature can be disabled or enabled by your authorized dealer 116 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Global close windows You can close the vehicle s windows by using the control on the remote transmitter Press and hold the control on the transmitter to close the windows Note The ignition must be off and the accessory delay feature must not be activated in order for this feature to operate Note This feature can be disabled or enabled by your authorized dealer WARNING To avoid personal injury and vehicle damage verify that windows are free of obstructions before operating and ensure that children and or pets are not in the proximity of window openings Bounce back When an obstacle has been detected in the window opening as the window is moving upward the window will automatically reverse direction and move down This is known as bounce back If the ignition is turned off without accessory delay being active during bounce back the window will move down until the bounce back position is reached Security override To override a bounce back condition within two seconds after the window reaches the bounce back position pull and hold the switch up and the window will travel up with no bounce back or pinch protection If the switch is released before the window is fully closed the window will stop For example this can be used to overcome the resistance of
441. te The cargo tie downs at the A rear edge of the floor are not tether anchors 2 il Si 234 2011 MKT mki Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 3 Clip the tether strap to the anchor as shown If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly the child safety seat may not be retained properly in the event of a collision 4 Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the manufacturer s instructions If the safety seat is not anchored properly the risk of a child being injured in a collision greatly increases If your child restraint system is equipped with a tether strap and the child restraint manufacturer recommends its use Ford also recommends its use Child booster seats The belt positioning booster booster seat is used to improve the fit of the vehicle safety belt Children outgrow a typical child seat e g convertible or toddler seat when they weigh about 40 Ib 18 kg and are around four 4 years of age Consult your child safety seat owner guide for the weight height and age limits specific to your child safety seat Keep your child in the child safety seat if it properly fits the child remains appropriate for their weight height and age AND if properly secured to the vehicle Although the lap shoulder belt will provide some protection children who have outgrown a typical child seat are still too small for lap shoulder belts to fit properly and wearin
442. tered using the key on the driver s side door In order to prevent the perimeter alarm system from triggering the ignition must be turned to start or on before the 12 second chime expires See Perimeter alarm system in the Locks and Security chapter POWER REDUCED TO LOWER TEMP Displayed when vehicle performance is reduced due to high engine fluid temperatures See Engine fluid temperature management and What you should know about fail safe cooling in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter SERVICE TIRE MOBILITY KIT if equipped Displayed when the tire mobility kit requires service See your authorized dealer for more information 31 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems AUDIO SYSTEMS Mobile media system Q aa RR O PHONE CLIMATE 5 J MENU RADIO MEDIA SOUND 2 3 4 5 SHUFFLE 14 SEEK bi DISP 40 9 WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving and that you comply with all applicable laws Your vehicle may be equipped with a mobile media system which allows you to listen to record and save m
443. teristics of your vehicle e Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by loose sand water gravel snow or ice If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement e If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement slow down but avoid severe brake application ease the vehicle back onto the pavement only after reducing your speed Do not turn the steering wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface e It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow down gradually before returning to the pavement You may lose control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too sharply or abruptly e It often may be less risky to strike small objects such as highway reflectors with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide sideways out of control or rollover Remember your safety and the safety of others should be your primary concern 317 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving If your vehicle gets stuck If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by shifting between forward and reverse gears stopping between shifts in a steady pattern Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear Your vehicle is equipped with traction control It may be beneficial to disengage the traction control system while attempting to rock the vehicle Do not rock the vehicle
444. the liftgate may reverse to the full open position Verify that the gate is closed before operating or moving the vehicle especially in an enclosure like a garage or a parking structure The liftgate or it components could be damaged in an enclosure if the liftgate is open When power operating the liftgate at temperatures below 32 F 0 C the liftgate may stop about 5 inches 12 7 cm from the full open position The liftgate can be fully opened by pushing it upward to the maximum open position The power liftgate feature can be enabled or disabled using the message center controls With the setting turned off power operation is disabled from the liftgate control button and from the rear cargo area button The transmitter and instrument panel switch will still continue to operate the liftgate regardless of the position state of the message center Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter To power open or close the liftgate from the instrument panel Press the button located to the left mf of the steering column once to power open or close the liftgate To power open or close the liftgate with the transmitter Press amp twice within three seconds to power open or close the liftgate Refer to Remote entry system in the Locks and Security chapter 139 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls To power open the liftgate with the outside liftgate control button 1 Unlock t
445. the refrigerator freezer This will help it maintain a more consistent cooling temperature 112 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Refrigerator Briefly press and hold the COOL side of the control The indicator light on the cool side of the switch will illuminate and the indicator light on the freeze side will glow when the refrigerator is active When in cool mode the temperature will cool to approximately 41 F 5 C Briefly press and hold COOL again to turn off the refrigerator or briefly press and hold FREEZE to switch over to freezer mode FREEZE gt COOL Freezer Briefly press and hold the FREEZE side of the control and both indicator lights will illuminate when the freezer is active When in freeze mode the temperature will cool to approximately 23 F 5 C Press FREEZE again to turn off the freezer or press COOL to switch over to refrigerator mode When the vehicle is turned off the refrigerator freezer will also turn off and will turn back on to the last used mode freeze or cool once the vehicle is restarted Cleaning and maintenance The refrigerator freezer is maintenance free but you can clean the inside of the unit and the cover with a mild soap and water solution when needed Note Under certain conditions condensation on the inside walls of the refrigerator is normal AUXILIARY POWER POINT 12V DC Power outlets are designed for accessory
446. the engine These objects will not cause damage to the coded key but may cause a momentary issue if they are too close to the key when starting the engine If a problem occurs turn the ignition off remove all objects on the key chain away from the coded key and restart the engine Note Do not leave a duplicate coded key in the vehicle Always take your keys and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle Anti theft indicator The anti theft indicator is located in the instrument panel cluster e When the ignition is off the AN indicator will flash once every two seconds to indicate the R SecuriLock system is functioning as a theft deterrent Automatic arming The vehicle is armed immediately after turning the ignition off 165 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Automatic disarming The vehicle is disarmed immediately after the ignition is turned on Replacement of intelligent access keys Note Your vehicle comes equipped with two intelligent access keys The Intelligent Access Key functions as both a programmed key that operates the driver door lock activates Intelligent Access with Push Button Start systems as well as a remote keyless entry transmitter A maximum of four intelligent access keys can be programmed to your vehicle If your Intelligent Access Key are lost or stolen and you don t have an extra key you will need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized deal
447. the fuel tank full with regular unleaded fuel 442 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Special operating condition log DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace Deater VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace Scheduled Maintenance Guide DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Come Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Come Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Come Hours Miveace 444 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace Scheduled
448. the high beams on and off Enabling disabling auto high beams Enabling disabling and or checking the status of the automatic high beam system can be performed using the message center See Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter Activating high beams If there is no traffic in front of the vehicle the high beams will come on automatically and the EO light will display in the instrument panel if the following are true e The headlamp control is in auto lamp mode e Fog lamps are turned off e The ambient light level is low enough that high beams are needed e Vehicle speed must be greater than 32 mph 51 km h e Severe weather is not detected 98 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights Deactivating high beams The automatic high beams will deactivate if any of the following events occur e An approaching vehicle s headlights or a preceding vehicle s tail lamps are detected The headlamp control is moved out of the autolamps position The vehicle speed falls below 27 mph 48 km h The ambient light level is high enough that high beams are not needed Severe rain snow or fog is detected The camera is blocked Note Activating the multi function lever will put the headlamps in manual high beam mode constant or flash to pass until the lever is returned to the neutral position To manually override the auto high beam_and go to low beam the headlamp control must be taken out
449. the roof fully opened To close the panoramic Vista Roof and power sunshades Pull the es control down and release until the glass panel stops at the express close position Firmly pull and hold the control again to fully close the Vista Roof Pull the control down again and release to close the sunshades at the express close position Firmly pull and hold the control again to fully close the front and rear sunshades To vent the panoramic Vista Roof From the closed position press and release the TILT control To close pull and hold the TILT control down Note If the panoramic Vista Roof is excessively operated the glass and shade motors will automatically go into a fail safe jog mode manual intermittent operation to prevent overheating and or damage to the motor The motors will revert back to normal operation after a period of idle time 133 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a universal garage door opener which can be used to replace the common hand held transmitter HomeLink Wireless Control System if equipped The HomeLink Wireless Control System located on the driver s visor provides a convenient way to nay replace up to three hand held transmitters with a single built in O O device This feature will learn the radio frequency codes of most t
450. their safety belts even when an air bag supplemental restraint system SRS is provided WARNING When possible all children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position WARNING The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches 25 cm between an occupant s chest and the driver airbag module WARNING Never place your arm over the air bag module as a deploying air bag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries To properly position yourself away from the airbag e Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably e Recline the seat slightly one or two degrees from the upright position WARNING Do not put anything on or over the air bag module Placing objects on or over the air bag inflation area may cause those objects to be propelled by the air bag into your face and torso causing serious injury WARNING Do not attempt to service repair or modify the airbag supplemental restraint systems or its fuses See your authorized dealer 208 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of the vehicle Gncluding frame bumper front end body structure and tow hooks may affect the performance of the airbag system increasing the risk of injury Do not modify the front end of the vehic
451. thout the IA key present inside the vehicle 279 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Switching the vehicle off when not in park It is recommended that you shift into the P Park position before switching your vehicle off If you switch your vehicle off with the shifter in any position other than P Park the message SHIFT TO PARK will be displayed in the message center If the vehicle is left in this state your key in ignition chime will activate when the driver door is opened and you may drain your vehicle s battery In order to avoid draining your battery it is recommended that you always shift to P Park before or immediately after switching your vehicle off Absence of the intelligent access key Once the vehicle has started the vehicle will remain running until being turned off by the START STOP button even if the IA key is no longer found in the vehicle Whenever a door is opened and then closed while the vehicle is running the system will search for an IA key inside the vehicle and the message center will display NO KEY DETECTED if the IA key is no longer present This message is a reminder that someone else in the vehicle may have taken the IA key when exiting the vehicle If the IA key is no longer present in the vehicle you will not be able to re start your vehicle outside of the Fast Restart time see Fast Restart Feature above It is important to be aware of where your IA key is located in
452. ting USA fus Driving Roll Stability Control RSC Roll Stability Control RSC may help to maintain roll stability of the vehicle during adverse maneuvers RSC operates by detecting the vehicle s roll motion and the rate at which it changes and by applying the brakes to one or more wheels individually During an event that activates the RSC system the stability control light in the instrument cluster will flash Certain adverse driving maneuvers may activate the RSC system which include e Emergency lane change e Taking a turn too fast e Quick maneuvering to avoid an accident pedestrian or obstacle Switching off traction control If the vehicle is stuck in snow mud or sand and seems to lose engine power switching off the traction Control features of the AdvanceTrac with RSC system may be beneficial because the wheels are allowed to spin This will restore full engine power and will enhance momentum through the obstacle To turn off the AdvanceTrac TCS system press the traction control OFF off button The off switch could look like either of the two graphics shown Full features of the TCS can be restored by pressing the traction control button again or by turning off and restarting the engine If you switch off the traction control the stability control off light f will illuminate steadily Pressing the traction control button again will OFF turn off the stability control l
453. ting and Safety Restraints chapter for more information 5 Temperature selection Turn to increase decrease the air temperature in the rear of the vehicle 93 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls 6 ay Rear passenger side cooled seat control if equipped Press to activate Refer to Rear seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter for more information 7 AUTO Press to activate automatic control of the airflow direction in the rear of the vehicle The system will automatically determine the airflow distribution in order to reach and maintain the desired temperature 8 REAR LOCK Illuminates when the rear auxiliary climate system is being controlled by the front controls The rear auxiliary climate controls will not work when this is illuminated 9 gi Rear driver side cooled seat control if equipped Press to activate Refer to Rear seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter for more information REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER The rear defroster control is located on the climate control panel and works to clear the rear window of fog and thin ice The ignition must be on to operate the rear window defroster The rear defroster turns off automatically after 10 minutes or when the ignition is turned off To manually turn off the defroster before 10 minutes have passed press the control again Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean the inside of the rear window
454. to the touch or during exposure to strong direct sunlight e Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for best results e Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to eliminate water spotting e It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the winter months as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause damage to the vehicle e Immediately remove items such as gasoline diesel fuel bird droppings and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle s paintwork and trim over time Use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 which is available from your authorized dealer e Remove any exterior accessories such as antennas before entering a car wash e Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted surface if these substances come in contact with your vehicle wash off as soon as possible Exterior chrome e Wash the vehicle first using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo such as Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A e Use Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner ZC 15 available from your authorized dealer Apply the product as you would a wax to clean bumpers and other chrome parts allow the cleaner to dry for a few minutes then wipe off the haze with a clean dry rag e Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads as they can scratch the chrome surface 363 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guid
455. to turn off after you have filled your tires to the recommended inflation pressure How temperature affects your tire pressure The tire pressure monitoring system TPMS monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic tire While driving in a normal manner a typical passenger tire inflation pressure may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi 14 to 28 kPa from a cold start situation If the vehicle is stationary over night with the outside temperature significantly lower than the daytime temperature the tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi 21 kPa for a drop of 30 F 17 C in ambient temperature This lower pressure value may be detected by the TPMS as being significantly lower than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the TPMS warning for low tire pressure If the low tire pressure warning light is on visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat If one or more tires are flat repair as necessary Check air pressure in the road tires If any tire is 261 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading under inflated carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest location where air can be added to the tires Inflate all the tires to the recommended inflation pressure SNOW TIRES AND CABLES CHAINS WARNING Snow tires must be the same size load index speed rating as those originally provided by Ford Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and perf
456. top functioning and default to front wheel drive WARNING Do not become overconfident in the ability of AWD vehicles Although a AWD vehicle may accelerate better than two wheel drive vehicle in low traction situations it won t stop any faster than two wheel drive vehicles Always drive at a safe speed How your vehicle differs from other vehicles Crossover vehicles can differ from some other vehicles in a few noticeable ways Your vehicle may be e Higher to allow higher load carrying capacity e Shorter to give it the capability to approach inclines All other things held equal a shorter wheelbase may make your vehicle quicker to respond to steering inputs than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase e Narrower to provide greater maneuverability in tight spaces As a result of the above dimensional differences crossover vehicles often will have a higher center of gravity and a greater difference in center of gravity between the loaded and unloaded condition These differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle differently than an ordinary passenger car 241 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires The Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width F
457. tors e Antenna obstructions For optimal reception performance keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build up and keep luggage and other material as far away from the antenna as possible Terrain Hills mountains tall buildings bridges tunnels freeway overpasses parking garages dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception e Station overload When you pass a ground based broadcast repeating tower a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and result in an audio mute You will hear an audio mute when there is a satellite radio signal interference Your display may show ACQUIRING to indicate the interference Satellite radio electronic serial number ESN You will need your ESN to activate modify or track your satellite radio account The ESN is found on the System Information Screen SR ESN XXXXXXXXXXXX To access press the I hard button i and select the System Info tab on the touchscreen Note SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right to change rearrange add or delete programming including canceling moving or adding particular channels and its prices at any time with or without notice to you Ford Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming changes 65 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Troubleshooting tips ACQUIRING Radio requires more No action required This than two seconds to message should di
458. towing 353 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Table of Contents Customer Assistance 355 Reporting safety defects U S only 361 Reporting safety defects Canada only 362 Cleaning 363 Maintenance and Specifications 372 Engine compartment 374 Engine oil 378 Battery 382 Engine coolant 384 Fuel information 391 Air filter s 409 Part numbers 413 Maintenance product specifications and capacities 414 Engine data 417 Accessories 421 Ford Extended Service Plan 423 Scheduled Maintenance Guide 427 Normal scheduled maintenance and log 433 Index 448 All rights reserved Reproduction by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying recording or by any information storage and retrieval system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written authorization from Ford Motor Company Ford may change the contents without notice and without incurring obligation Copyright 2010 Ford Motor Company 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction CONGRATULATIONS Congratulations on acquiring your new Ford Motor Company product Please take the time to get well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook The more you know and understand about your vehicle the greater the safety and pleasure you will derive from driving it For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the following website e In the United States www ford com e In Ca
459. trained technicians and one stop service from routine maintenance like oil changes and tire rotations to repairs like brake service check out the value your Ford and Lincoln Mercury dealers can offer WHICH MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE SHOULD YOU FOLLOW Owner checks and services Certain basic maintenance checks and inspections should be performed by the owner or a service technician at the intervals indicated Service information and supporting specifications are provided in this Owner s Guide Any adverse condition should be brought to the attention of your dealer or qualified service technician as soon as possible for the proper service advice The owner maintenance service checks are generally not covered by warranties so you may be charged for labor parts or lubricants used 429 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide Maximum oil change interval C As indicated by the instrument cluster message center can be up to one year or 10 000 miles 16 000 km Engine coolant change interval 6 years or 100 000 miles 160 000 km change engine coolant whichever comes first After initial change change engine coolant every 3 years or 50 000 miles 80 000 km Check every month Check function of all interior and exterior lights Check tires for wear and correct air pressure including spare tire Check windshield washer fluid level Check engine oil level Check every six months eck la
460. transmission and prevents the front wheels from turning To put your vehicle in gear e Press the brake pedal e Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear To put your vehicle in P Park e Come to a complete stop e Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P Park WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Switch the ignition off and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle R Reverse With the gearshift lever in R Reverse the vehicle will move backward Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R Reverse 293 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving N Neutral With the gearshift lever in N Neutral the vehicle can be started and is free to roll Hold the brake pedal down while in this position D Drive with Overdrive The normal driving position for the best fuel economy Transmission operates in gears one through six M Manual SelectShift Automatic Transmission with Grade Assist Initially moving the lever to M Manual activates grade assist and cancels overdrive Grade Assist e Provides additional grade engine braking for downhill driving and extends lower gear operation on uphill climbs for hilly terrain or mountainous os areas as Provides additional engine va braking through the automatic transmission shift strategy which reacts to vehicle inputs vehicle acce
461. transmission of the radio frequency signal 134 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls 1 Position the end of your hand held transmitter 1 3 inches PA 2 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program located on your visor while keeping the indicator light in view 2 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink and hand held transmitter buttons until the HomeLink indicator light changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light Now you may release both the HomeLink and hand held transmitter buttons Note Some entry gates and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 2 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator and Canadian Programming in this section for Canadian residents 3 Firmly press and hold for five seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button up to two separate times to activate the door If the door does not activate press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and observe the indicator light e If the indicator light stays on constantly programming is complete and your device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed and released e If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light continue with Programming Steps 4 through 6 to complete programming of a rolling code equipped device most commonly a garage door opener 4 At the garage door opener receiver motor head unit i
462. udgment or the need to apply the brakes This system does NOT activate the brakes automatically Failure to press the brake pedal to activate the brakes may result in a collision WARNING The collision warning system with brake support cannot help prevent all collisions Do not rely on this system to replace driver judgment and the need to maintain distance and speed Note The collision warning with brake support will not detect warn or respond to potential collisions with vehicles to the rear or sides of the vehicle Operation The radar sensor detects vehicles ahead that are moving in the same as direction as your vehicle CJ CJ If the radar detects that your vehicle is rapidly closing on another vehicle a red warning light will illuminate and an audible warning chime will sound cS After that if the risk of collision a further increases after the warning light the brake support prepares yo ae the brake system for rapid braking This may be apparent to the driver as However the system will not automatically activate the brakes The vehicle will not stop unless the driver presses the brake pedal If the brake pedal is pressed then braking is implemented with full brake function even if the force on the brake pedal is light The collision warning system is active at speeds above approximately 5 mph 8 km h jo 301 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving
463. ug wrench 5 Replace the flat tire with the spare tire making sure the valve stem is facing outward Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered 6 Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 7 Remove the jack and fully tighten the lug nuts in the order shown Refer to Wheel lug nut torque specifications later in this chapter for the proper lug nut torque specification 8 Install the wheel cover if equipped Stowing the tire and jack 1 Fully collapse the jack fold the lug wrench socket into the handle and place the jack and wrench into the felt bag as shown Place the extension bolt or L shaped bolt into the external pocket of the felt bag Take care to position the jack as shown to ensure that the locating holes in the jack base can be placed on the locating tabs of the jack mounting bracket in the spare tire tub 338 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies 2 Securely close the wrench compartment and the jack bag using the Velcro strips 3 Place the jack kit on the angled bracket in the spare tire tub using the locating tabs to position the jack correctly 4 Insert the straight end of the jack retention bracket through the eyelet of the angled bracket and swing the retention bracket over the jack With the jack in place place the loop
464. uipped with radio transmitters Any such equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service technician e Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your vehicle particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive use e To avoid interference with other vehicle functions such as anti lock braking systems amateur radio users who install radios and antennas onto their vehicle should not locate the Amateur Radio Antennas in the area of the driver s side hood e Electrical or electronic accessories or components that are added to the vehicle by the authorized dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery performance and durability 422 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Ford Extended Service Plan FORD ESP EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS U S ONLY More than 30 million Ford Lincoln and Mercury owners have discovered the powerful protection of Ford ESP It is the only extended service plan backed by Ford Motor Company and provides peace of mind protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage Up to 500 Covered Vehicle Components There are four new vehicle Extended Service Plans with different levels of coverage Ask your dealer for details PremiumCare Our most comprehensive coverage With over 500 covered components this plan is so complete that we generally only discuss what s not cove
465. ulate instantaneous fuel economy When your vehicle is not moving this function shows one or no bars illuminated Instantaneous fuel economy cannot be reset TIMER Timer displays the trip elapsed drive time To operate do the following 1 Press and release RESET in order to start the timer 2 Press and release RESET to pause the timer 3 Press and hold RESET until the timer resets Blank screen The message center display will be blank after cycling through all of the Info menu items System check and vehicle feature customization Press the SETUP button repeatedly to cycle the message center through ee ae RESET the following features RESET FOR SYSTEM CHECK When this message appears press the RESET button and the message center will begin to cycle through the following systems and provide a status of the item if needed 20 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster 1 PASSIVE ENTRY PASSIVE START PEPS 2 OIL LIFE 3 WASHER FLUID LEVEL 4 DOOR AJAR STATUS 5 LIFTGATE STATUS 6 BRAKE SYSTEM 7 TIRE PRESSURE 8 BLIND SPOT SYSTEM if equipped 9 CROSS TRAFFIC SYSTEM if equipped 10 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL ACC if equipped 11 PARK AID 12 FUEL LEVEL 13 MYKEY DISTANCE if MyKey is programmed 14 MYKEY S PROGRAMMED 15 ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED Note Some systems show a message only if a condition is present OIL LIFE This displays the remaining oil life
466. ump the brakes Refer to the Brakes section of this chapter for additional information on the operation of the anti lock brake system WARNING If you are driving in slippery conditions that require tire chains or cables then it is critical that you drive cautiously Keep speeds down allow for longer stopping distances and avoid aggressive steering to reduce the chances of a loss of vehicle control which can lead to serious injury or death If the rear end of the vehicle slides while cornering steer in the direction of the slide until you regain control of the vehicle 321 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Maintenance and modifications The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed and tested to provide predictable performance whether loaded or empty and durable load carrying capability For this reason Ford Motor Company strongly recommends that you do not make modifications such as adding or removing parts such as lift kits or stabilizer bars or by using replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make it more likely the vehicle will rollover as a result of a loss of control Ford Motor Company recommends that caution be used with any vehicle equipped with a high load or device such as ladder or luggage racks Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty incre
467. ure listed previously 346 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Removal of the sealant canister from the temporary mobility kit 1 Unwrap the clear tube from the compressor housing GES gt Sa 2 Press the button located on the temporary mobility kit compressor housing below the canister while pulling up on the sealant canister Installation of the sealant canister to the temporary mobility kit 1 Align the sealant canister with the temporary mobility kit housing 347 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies 2 Once aligned seat the sealant canister by lightly pushing down until you hear an audible click 3 Wrap the clear tube around the compressor housing Note If you experience any difficulties with the removal or installation of the sealant canister consult your Ford Motor Company authorized dealer for assistance Be sure to check the sealant compound s use by date regularly Use By Utiliser avant The use by date is on the lower right hand corner of the label located on the sealant canister bottle The sealant canister should be replaced after four years 348 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque at 100 miles 160 km after any wheel disturbance tire rotation
468. ure that the engine block heater heater cord and extension cord are solidly connected A poor connection can cause the cord to 281 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving become very hot and may result in an electrical shock or fire Be sure to check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system has been operating for approximately a half hour e Finally have the engine block heater system checked during your fall tune up to be sure it s in good working order How to use the engine block heater Ensure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use To clean them use a dry cloth Depending on the type of factory installed equipment your engine block heater will use 4 to 1 0 kilowatt hours of energy per hour of use Your factory installed block heater system does not have a thermostat however maximum temperature is attained after approximately three hours of operation Block heater operation longer than three hours will not improve system performance and will unnecessarily use additional electricity Make sure system is unplugged and properly stowed before driving the vehicle While not in use make sure the protective cover seals the prongs of the engine block heater cord plug BRAKES Occasional brake noise is normal If a metal to metal continuous grinding or continuous squeal sound is present the brake linings may be worn out and should be inspected by an authorized dealer
469. ush agitation to remove brake dust and dirt could wear away the clearcoat finish over time e Do not use hydrofluoric acid based or high caustic based wheel cleaners steel wool fuels or strong household detergent e To remove tar and grease use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 available from your authorized dealer ENGINE Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt buildup keep the engine warmer than normal When washing e Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine The high pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause damage 364 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the engine block or other engine components Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser ZC 20 on all parts that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean In Canada use Motorcraft Engine Shampoo CXC 66 A Never wash or rinse the engine while it is hot or running water in the running engine may cause internal damage Never wash or rinse any ignition coil spark plug wire or spark plug well or the area in and around these locations Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning the engine 3 7L V6 engine 365 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning 3 5L V6 EcoBoost engine PLASTIC NON PAINTED EXTERIOR PARTS
470. usic play DVDs audio and video and also access some climate control functions Press the hard buttons on the system face such as RADIO or MEDIA to access corresponding menus on the touchscreen Tabs will appear along the left side of the touchscreen which represent major components within that menu Simply touch the desired tab to access 1 I information Press to access the information menu Press while ae the information menu is active to step through the information tabs of the Calendar System Info System Information and Help 32 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 2 PHONE Press PHONE to access SYNC phone features Refer to your SYNC supplement for more information 3 CLIMATE Press CLIMATE to access the climate menu Press the button while the climate menu is active to step through the climate menu tabs of Front Zone and Rear Zone 4 amp Eject Press amp Eject to eject the disc in the slot 5 TUNE In radio or satellite radio mode if activated turn to advance in individual increments up down the frequency channel listing In MP3 mode turn to advance to the next previous folder gt N Press to play or pause a CD Jukebox User Device or DVD when playing in the mobile media system 6 DISP Press the DISP button repeatedly to step through the following display modes On Status Bar Only and Off 7 CLOCK Press to access the clock s
471. vehicle Note To program MyKey features refer to MyKey in this chapter PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM The perimeter anti theft system will help protect your vehicle from unauthorized entry If there is any potential perimeter anti theft problem with your vehicle ensure ALL Intelligent Access Keys are brought to the authorized dealer to aid in troubleshooting Arming the system When armed this system will respond if unauthorized entry is attempted When unauthorized entry occurs the system will flash the turn signal lamps and will sound the horn The system is ready to arm whenever the ignition is off Any of the following actions will prearm the alarm system e Press the a control on the transmitter 167 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security When you press the lock control twice within three seconds on your transmitter the horn will chirp once to let you know that all doors the hood and the liftgate are closed If any of these are not closed the horn will chirp twice to warn you that a door the hood or the liftgate is still open e Press the driver or passenger SS power door lock control while the door is open then close the door amp EE e Press and hold the 7 e 8 and 9 e 0 controls on the keyless entry pad at the same time to lock the doors driver s door must be closed e Lock the door by turning the key in the door key cylinder There is a 20 second
472. ver s responsibility to stay alert drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times The controls for using your cruise control are located on the steering wheel 1 Press and release the ON control The message center will display CRUISE ON RADAR READY 2 Accelerate to the desired speed 123 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls 3 Press and release the SET control The vehicle speed will be stored in the memory and the message center will display SET XXX MPH your desired speed 4 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal 5 The green cruise indicator light on the instrument cluster will illuminate if there are no vehicles detected in front of you while the yellow Rx ACC indicator light on the instrument cluster will illuminate if there is a vehicle detected in front of you Following a vehicle WARNING When following a vehicle in front of you the vehicle will not decelerate automatically to a stop nor will the vehicle always decelerate quickly enough to avoid a collision without driver intervention Always apply the brakes when necessary Failing to do so may result in a collision serious injury or death When a vehicle ahead of you enters the same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in the same lane the vehicle speed will adjust automatically to maintain a preset gap distance The distance setting is adjustable refer to Setting the gap distance in thi
473. ver s door in this situation refer to Intelligent access key in this chapter for more information on the location and use of the mechanical key blade Your vehicle will allow you to unlock and enter your vehicle without actively using a key or transmitter You can use the intelligent access feature at the driver door or at the liftgate You can activate the intelligent access feature as long as you have one of your IA keys within range of the driver door or the liftgate Activating intelligent access at the Driver s Door If your IA key is within 3 feet 1 meter of the driver s door you can activate your intelligent access system by pressing any button on the keyless entry keypad The driver s door will automatically unlock and the door can be opened Note If two stage unlocking is disabled all doors will unlock when you press any button on the keyless entry keypad Activating intelligent access at the liftgate If your IA key is within 3 feet 1 meter of the liftgate you can activate your intelligent access system by pressing the exterior liftgate release button hidden under the trim above the license plate The liftgate will release and open Push button start The push button start system allows you to start your vehicle without using a key Refer to Push button start in the Driving chapter 157 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Unlocking the doors two stage unlock 1 Press C
474. w the radar to detect that it is no longer blocked Note The vehicle must be in D Drive and a few vehicles must pass so that the BLIS can clear a blocked state Heavy rainfall or heavy snowfall is No action required by the driver interfering with the radar signals The system will automatically reset to an unblocked state once the rainfall snowfall rate decreases or stops Do not use BLIS and or CTA in heavy rainfall or heavy snowfall Due to the nature of radar technology it is possible to get a blockage warning and not be blocked This is rare and known as a false blockage warning A false blocked condition will either self clear or clear after a key cycle 315 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Trailer tow false alerts When towing a trailer the sensors may detect the trailer thus causing a false alert It may be desirable to turn the BLIS off if the false alerts become annoying Day and night brightness The BLIS and or CTA alert will automatically dim when the headlamp switch is in PARK ON or AUTO ON and night time darkness has been detected by the sun sensor ALL WHEEL DRIVE AWD SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a full time all wheel drive AWD system The AWD system is an active system meaning it not only responds to wheel slip between the front and rear axles but also has the ability to anticipate wheel slip and transfer torque to the rear wheels
475. weight carrying hitch and ball which uniformly spreads the trailer tongue loads through the vehicle s underbody structure WARNING Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label WARNING Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could result in engine damage transmission damage structural damage loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover and personal injury Preparing to tow Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer and make sure it is properly attached to your vehicle Contact your authorized dealer or a reliable trailer dealer as soon as possible if you require assistance Hitches Do not use hitches that clamp onto the vehicle bumper use a load carrying hitch You must distribute the load in your trailer so that 10 15 of the total weight of the trailer is on the tongue 271 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Weight distributing hitch When hooking up a trailer using a weight distributing hitch always use the following procedure 1 Park the vehicle without the trailer on a level surface 2 Measure the height of the top of the front wheel opening on the fender this is HI 3 Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the weight distributing bars connected 4 Measure the height of the top of the front wheel opening on the fender a second time this is H2 5 Instal
476. wer point whenever the device is not in use Do not use any extension cord with the 110 VAC power point since it will defeat the safety protection design provided by the cap and twist tab Doing so my cause the power point to overload due to powering multiple devices that can reach beyond the 150W load limit and could result in fire or serious injury The power point can switch to a fault mode when it is overloaded overheated or shorted For overloading and shorting conditions unplug your device and turn the ignition key off then on For an overheating condition let the system cool off then turn the ignition key off then on The 110V AC power point can provide power whenever the vehicle ignition is in the run position and the power point green indicator light located in the top left corner is turned on Refer to the indicator light code below for the power point status Indicator light code Green light is on Power point is ready to supply power Green light is off Power point power supply is off Ignition is not in RUN position Green light is blinking Power point is in fault mode POWER WINDOWS WARNING Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let children play with the power windows They may seriously injure themselves 115 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls WARNING When closing the power windows you should verify they are free of obstructions and ensure t
477. when a tire is punctured A tire puncture within the tire s tread area can be repaired in two stages with the temporary mobility kit e In the first stage the tire will be reinflated with a sealing compound and air After the tire has been reinflated you will need to drive the vehicle a short distance approximately 4 miles 6 km to distribute the sealant in the tire e In the second stage you will need to check the tire pressure and adjust if necessary to the vehicle s tire inflation pressure First stage Reinflating the tire with sealing compound and air Preparation Park the vehicle in a safe level and secure area away from moving traffic Turn the hazard lights on Apply the parking brake and turn the engine off Inspect the flat tire for visible damage Sealant compound contains latex To avoid any allergic reactions use the non latex gloves located in the accessory box on the underside of the temporary mobility kit housing Do not remove any foreign object that has pierced the tire If a puncture is located in the tire sidewall stop and call roadside assistance 1 Remove the valve cap from the tire valve 2 Unwrap the clear tube from the compressor housing 3 Remove the tube cap and fasten the metal connector of the tube to the tire valve turning clockwise Make sure the connection is tightly fastened 343 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies 4 Plug the power ca
478. wipers will continue to wipe as long as the presence of moisture is detected on the windshield More or less wiping may occur depending on humidity mist or light rain or road spray Keep the outside of the windshield clean especially the area around the rear view mirror where the sensor is located or rain sensor performance may be affected Note During winter driving conditions with ice snow or a salty road mist inconsistent or unexpected wiping or smearing may occur In these conditions you can lower the sensitivity to reduce the amount of smearing or override the feature by selecting low or high speed wiping or turning the wiper system off Note The rain sensing wiper feature must be turned off before entering a car wash Windshield washer Press the end of the stalk e briefly causes a single swipe of the wipers without washer fluid e a quick press and hold the wipers will swipe three times with washer fluid e along press and hold the wipers and washer fluid will be activated for up to ten seconds Courtesy wipe feature One extra wipe will occur a few seconds after washing the front window to clear any excess washer fluid remaining on the windshield 108 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Note Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty This may cause the washer pump to overheat Check the washer fluid level frequently Do not operate the wipers whe
479. wners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide Deater VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace Deater VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace Scheduled Maintenance Guide DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Come Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Come Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace 438 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace DEALER
480. y or verbally provide to 911 operators the vehicle location such as latitude and longitude and or other details about the vehicle or crash or personal information about the occupants to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services If you do not want to disclose this information do not activate the 911 Assist feature See your SYNC supplement for more information Additionally when you connect to Traffic Directions and Information if equipped U S only the service uses GPS technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle s current location travel direction and speed vehicle travel information only to help provide you with the directions traffic reports or business searches your request If you do not want Ford or its vendors to receive this information do not activate the service Ford Motor Company and the vendors it uses to provide you with this information do not store your vehicle travel information For more information see Traffic Directions and Information Terms and Conditions See your SYNC supplement for more information CELL PHONE USE The use of Mobile Communications Equipment has become increasingly important in the conduct of business and personal affairs However drivers must not compromise their own or others safety when using such equipment Mobile Communications can enhance personal safety and security when appropriately used particularly in emergency
481. y belts and seats equipped with side airbags e Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner e Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet amp Upholstery Cleaner ZC 54 If grease or tar is present on the material spot clean the area first with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover ZC 14 In Canada use Motorcraft Multi Purpose Cleaner CXC 101 e If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning clean the entire area immediately but do not oversaturate or the ring will set e Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners which can stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of the seat materials WARNING Do not use cleaning solvents bleach or dye on the vehicle s safety belts as these actions may weaken the belt webbing 368 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning WARNING On vehicles equipped with seat mounted airbags do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents Such products could contaminate the side airbag system and affect performance of the side airbag in a collision LEATHER SEATS IF EQUIPPED EXCEPT FOR THE KING RANCH EDITION For King Ranch leather seats refer to a separate section in this chapter e Clean spills and stains as quickly as possible e For routine cleaning wipe the surface with a soft damp cloth For more thorough cleaning wipe the surface with a mild soap and water so
482. y checking tire pressure The tire pressure should be checked periodically at least monthly using a tire gauge see Inflating your tires in this chapter Failure to properly maintain your tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure loss of control vehicle rollover and personal injury Changing tires with TPMS Each road tire is equipped with a tire pressure sensor located inside the tire wheel cavity The pressure sensor is attached to the valve stem The pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is not visible unless the tire is removed Care must be taken when changing the tire to avoid damaging the sensor It is recommended that you always have your tires serviced by an authorized dealer The tire pressure should be checked periodically at least monthly using an accurate tire gauge refer to Inflating your tires in this chapter Understanding your tire pressure monitoring system TPMS The tire pressure monitoring system measures pressure in your four road tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle The low tire pressure warning lamp will turn on if the tire pressure is significantly low Once the light is illuminated your tires are under inflated and need to be inflated to the manufacturer s recommended tire pressure Even if the light turns on and a short time later turns off your tire pressure still needs to be checked Visit www checkmytires org for additional information When your temporar
483. y spare tire is installed When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary spare the TPMS system will continue to identify an issue to remind you that the damaged road wheel tire needs to be repaired and put back on your vehicle 258 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading To restore the full functionality of the tire pressure monitoring system have the damaged road wheel tire repaired and remounted on your vehicle For additional information refer to Changing tires with TPMS in this section When you believe your system is not operating properly The main function of the tire pressure monitoring system is to warn you when your tires need air It can also warn you in the event the system is no longer capable of functioning as intended Please refer to the following chart for information concerning your tire pressure monitoring system 259 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Low tire pressure Possible cause Customer action required warning light Solid warning light Tire s 1 Check your tire pressure to under inflated ensure tires are properly inflated refer to Inflating your tires in this chapter 2 After inflating your tires to the manufacturer s recommended inflation pressure as shown on the Tire Label located on the edge of driver s door or the B Pillar the vehicle must be driven for at least two mi
484. y whenever you leave your vehicle WARNING If the parking brake is fully released but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated the brakes may not be working properly See your authorized dealer 292 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION Automatic transmission adaptive learning Your transmission is equipped with an adaptive learning strategy found in the vehicle computer This feature is designed to increase durability and provide consistent shift feel over the life of the vehicle A new vehicle or transmission may have firm and or soft shifts This operation is considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the transmission Over time the adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation Additionally whenever the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed the strategy must be relearned Understanding the gearshift positions of the 6 speed automatic transmission Your vehicle has been designed to improve fuel economy by reducing fuel usage while coasting or decelerating When you take your foot off the accelerator pedal and the vehicle begins to slow down the torque converter clutch locks up and aggressively shuts off fuel flow to the engine while decelerating This fuel economy benefit may be perceived as a light to medium braking sensation when removing your foot from the accelerator pedal P Park This position locks the
485. you in the same lane The driver can select from one of three GAP settings the controls are located on the steering wheel At startup the system sets the gap to the last selected setting Once activated the driver can deactivate the system at any time by either pressing the brake pedal or pressing the steering wheel ON OFF control In addition the driver can temporarily increase the vehicle speed above the current speed by manually pressing on the accelerator pedal 122 2011 MKT mkt Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls WARNING Always pay close attention to changing road conditions especially when using Adaptive Cruise Control Adaptive Cruise Control cannot replace attentive driving Failing to follow any of the warnings below or failing to pay attention to the road may result in a collision serious injury or death WARNING Adaptive cruise control is not a collision warning or avoidance system Additionally adaptive cruise control will not detect e Stationary or slow moving vehicles below 6 mph 10 km h e Pedestrians or objects in the roadway e Oncoming vehicles in the same lane WARNING Do not use the adaptive cruise control when entering or leaving a highway in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding slippery or unpaved WARNING Do not use in poor visibility specifically fog rain spray or snow Setting adaptive cruise control Note It is the dri
486. zle or the fuel fill funnel see Refilling with a portable fuel container for funnel location provided with the vehicle several times to dislodge any debris and or allow the inlet to close properly If this action corrects the problem the check fuel fill inlet lamp or CHECK FUEL FILL INLET message may not reset immediately It may take several driving cycles for the check fuel fill inlet lamp or CHECK FUEL FILL INLET message to turn off A driving cycle consists of an engine start up after four or more hours with the engine off followed by city highway driving Continuing to drive with the check fuel fill inlet lamp or CHECK FUEL FILL INLET message on may cause the service engine soon lamp to turn on as well WARNING The fuel system may be under pressure If you hear a hissing sound near the fuel filler door Easy Fuel no cap fuel system do not refuel until the sound stops Otherwise fuel may spray out which could cause serious personal injury Choosing the right fuel Use only UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED fuel blended with a maximum of 10 ethanol Do not use fuel ethanol E85 diesel methanol leaded fuel or any other fuel The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law and could damage your vehicle Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic compounds including manganese based additives Note Use of any fuel other than those recommended may cause powertrain damage a loss of vehicle performance a

Lincoln 2011 MKT Automobile User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents